arrow-left

Only this pageAll pages
gitbookPowered by GitBook
triangle-exclamation
Couldn't generate the PDF for 462 pages, generation stopped at 100.
Extend with 50 more pages.
1 of 100

13.latest (LTS)

Loading...

Loading...

Fundamentals

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Loading...

Legacy Documentation

Resources and links for older versions of Umbraco CMS.

This documentation platform covers only major versions of the Umbraco CMS since Umbraco 9. If you are using an older version of Umbraco CMS, you will need to go elsewhere.

The documentation for Umbraco 7 and 8 lives on .

Get to know Umbraco

All the fundamentals of using Umbraco - from making a local installation to extending the backend.

In this part of the Umbraco CMS documentation, you can get to know the product and the default functionality. It is here you start your Umbraco journey with the installation, setup, and basics of working with the CMS.

our.umbraco.comarrow-up-right

Umbraco 7 Documentation

Umbraco 8 Documentation

Umbraco EOL Documentation

Cover

Setup

Find requirements for both local development and hosting as well as guides for installing and upgrading Umbraco CMS.

Cover

Backoffice

Learn about the different sections found in the Umbraco CMS backoffice and get an overview of the available features.

Cover

Data

Dive a little deeper and learn how to create different types of data directly from the Umbraco CMS backoffice.

Cover

Design

Get to know the different options the Umbraco CMS backoffice provides for designing your website.

Cover

Code

A high-level overview of working with some of the more advanced elements like services and notifications.

Umbraco CMS Documentation

Your main resource when building and managing an Umbraco CMS website.

Umbraco CMS is a flexible and editor-friendly Content Management System (CMS) that allows you to create beautiful and modern websites. Use the latest version of .NET, integrate with your favorite services, and help your customers launch a website tailored to their specific needs.

Learn more about Umbraco CMS and get an overview of the top features on Umbraco.comarrow-up-right.

The documentation for Umbraco CMS provides information for experienced Umbraco and .NET developers. It also offers guides and high-level articles for people starting out with the CMS.

Creating a Basic Websitechevron-rightConfigurationchevron-rightRequirementschevron-rightUsing Notificationschevron-right

Setup

Information on the requirements to setup, install & upgrade Umbraco

How to install and configure your Umbraco installation.

hashtag
Requirements

Defines the system requirements to run Umbraco.

hashtag

Umbraco installation steps and guidelines.

hashtag

Covers the steps to upgrade your copy of Umbraco to a newer version.

hashtag

Information about server setup for Umbraco including information about permissions and load balancing.

hashtag

How to configure your Umbraco installation. Includes information about all of Umbraco's configuration files and options.

hashtag

How to install the latest nightly builds.

Installation
Upgrade your project
Server setup
Configuration
Installing Nightly Builds

Fundamentals

Learn the basics of working with Umbraco CMS. How to install and setup your first site is also included in this section.

Install Umbraco CMS

Ready to get started with Umbraco? Head over to the Setup section to learn how to install Umbraco CMS.

Tutorials

Find detailed step-by-step guides on everything from building a site from scratch to implementing a custom maintenance page.

Cover
Cover
Cover

Built-in Property Editors

Logging With Load Balancing

Umbraco v8+ uses Serilog for logging. When load balancing Umbraco consideration should be given as to how the log files from each server will be accessed.

There are many Serilog Sinks available. One of these may be appropriate to store logs for all servers in a central repository such as Azure Application Insights or Elmah.io.

For more information, see SeriLog Provided Sinksarrow-up-right.

Requirements

hashtag
Browsers

The Umbraco UI works in all modern browsers:

  • Chrome (Latest)

  • Edge (Chromium)

  • Firefox (Latest)

  • Safari (Latest)

hashtag
Local Development

Below you can find the minimum requirements to run Umbraco 13 on your machine:

  • One of the

  • One of the following .NET Tools or Editors:

Umbraco can be installed with a SQLite or SQL Server database and configured with a . For SQL Server, indicating a minimum supported version of SQL Server 2016.

circle-info

When using Visual Studio as your primary Integrated Development Environment (IDE) we recommend .

hashtag
Hosting

hashtag
Recommendation requirements to run Umbraco

As Umbraco releases are aligned to the .NET release cadence, it's also aligned with Microsoft's Long-term support policy for the underlying framework. For the best experience, we would recommend that you ensure to be on the latest and supported Microsoft versions to run and host Umbraco CMS:

  • and other

circle-info

For the above, as Umbraco version 13 is based on .NET 8 you will need to follow the .NET 8 supported versions.

For more information, see the article in the Microsoft documentation.

circle-check

You can use to manage the hosting infrastructure. All Umbraco Cloud plans are hosted on Microsoft Azure, which gives your site a proven and solid foundation.

hashtag
Other recommendation

  • Ability to set file permissions to include create/read/write (or better) for the user that "owns" the Application Pool for your site. This would typically be NETWORK SERVICE.

hashtag
Database Account Roles

The database account used in the connection string will need permission to read and write from tables. It will also require permission to create schema during installs and upgrades:

  • The db_owner role has full permissions on the database.

  • To use an account with more restricted permissions, the db_datareader and db_datawriter roles will be needed for normal use to read from and write to the database. The db_ddladmin role, which can modify the database schema, is required for installs and upgrades of the CMS and/or any packages that create database tables.

For more information on the Database-level roles, see the .

circle-info

For more information on how to create a database user via SQL, you can check the .

Property Editors

Learn more about the default property editors that ships with an Umbraco installation.

A Property Editor is the editor that a Data Type references. A Data Type is defined by a user in the Umbraco backoffice and references a Property Editor. In Umbraco a Property Editor is defined in a JSON manifest file and associated JavaScript files.

When creating a Data Type, specify the property editor for the Data Type to use by selecting from the "Property editor" list (as shown below).

Data Type Definition

hashtag
Built-in Property Editors in Umbraco

Umbraco comes pre-installed with many useful property editors.

hashtag
More information

hashtag
Tutorials

Infinite Editing

This section explains how the concept of infinite editing in the Umbraco backoffice works.

This feature enables you to work with your content without losing the context of what you are doing.

Document Types are in different sections than content but infinite editing enables you to make changes to them directly from the content you are editing.

Infinite Editing

In the example showcased above, prevalues are being added to a Data Type, without losing the context of the content that's being worked on. The example also shows how you can edit images, without being sent to the 'Media' section.

hashtag
Customize

Infinite editing is a feature that comes out of the box with Umbraco. The feature can be customized, which enables you as a developer to improve the workflow for your editors.

hashtag
Read more

Block Editors

The Block Editors are property editors that enabled you to build advanced editor tools using a set of predefined Document Types.

Umbraco CMS currently ships with two Block Editors: the Block List and the Block Grid.

hashtag
Block List

hashtag

hashtag
Customizing Block Editors

hashtag

Learn how to create custom views for the blocks used in your Block Grid or Block List property editors.

hashtag

Get an overview of available configurations for the label properties.

Decimal

Alias: Umbraco.Decimal

Returns: decimal

hashtag
Data Type Definition Example

Date

Returns: Date

Displays a calendar UI for selecting dates which are saved as a DateTime value.

hashtag
Data Type Definition Example

The only setting that is available for manipulating the Date property is to set a format. By default the format of the date in the Umbraco backoffice will be

Configuring The Grid Layout

A grid layout contains multiple configuration options to allow developers to tailor the grid to a very specific site design. Configuring the layout can be divided into 2 overall parts:

hashtag
Layouts

A layout is the general grid "container", it contains one or more sections which content editors can use to insert preconfigured rows. There are 2 main usage scenarios of layouts:

Running Umbraco on Linux/macOS

Since Umbraco 9 it has been possible to run Umbraco CMS natively on Linux or macOS High Sierra 10.13 and newer.

With Umbraco CMS on .NET Core, Linux and macOS is natively supported with SQLite as the database.

In the below section, we describe how to get started with running Umbraco CMS on Linux or macOS.

hashtag
How to get started running Umbraco CMS on Linux or macOS

To get started with Umbraco CMS first have a look at the

Visual Studio Codearrow-up-right with the IISExpress extensionarrow-up-right

  • Microsoft Visual Studioarrow-up-right 2022 version 17.8 or higher.

    • Optional: JetBrains Riderarrow-up-right version 2022.3 and higher

  • .NET Core CLI

  • .NET Supported releasesarrow-up-right

    .NET 8.0 and higherarrow-up-right
    .NET 8 - Supported OS versionsarrow-up-right
    connection string
    support is aligned with Microsoftarrow-up-right
    finding and downloading the Software Development Kits (SDKs) for Visual Studioarrow-up-right
    Windows Supported releasesarrow-up-right
    MacOs Supported releasesarrow-up-right
    Ubuntu Supported distributionsarrow-up-right
    Linux Packagesarrow-up-right
    IIS Supported releasesarrow-up-right
    SQL Server Supported releasesarrow-up-right
    SQLitearrow-up-right
    Host and deploy ASP.NET Core applicationsarrow-up-right
    Umbraco Cloudarrow-up-right
    Microsoft documentationarrow-up-right
    Microsoft documentationarrow-up-right
    Block Grid
    Build custom views for blocks
    Configure Block Editor label properties
    Customizing Data Types
    How to create a custom Property Editor
    Umbraco 8: Infinite Editing (official blog post from Umbraco HQ)arrow-up-right

    Grid Layout Best Practices

    The grid layout editor offers non-technical editors a more visual editing environment to layout content pages and enter content of many different kinds.

    The editor offers many configuration options, and as a website implementor, you could be tempted to use the grid for nearly every kind of content entry - this is however not encouraged.

    To help developers determine when to use the grid layout, we've outlined the 2 major use-cases below.

    hashtag
    1. As a RTE Replacement

    The grid should primarily be used to replace content entry in a rich text editor (RTE). Where editors before would struggle with aligning images, lists and text or using tables inside the editor to layout content in columns.

    The grid solves this scenario, giving editors predefined layouts and editors to enter content. They do not have to worry about how the content is rendered, since everything is stored in a very semantic format passing on that responsibility to the developer implementing the website.

    hashtag
    2. Managing widgets

    Another common scenario the grid layout editor supports are managing and inserting widgets on a page. Using the grid, editors can pick pre-made components, either text, images, embedded elements or macros and insert them in a sidebar on the page.

    This could replace various setups involving content pickers, repeatable content editors and other kinds of collections of content nodes and macros.

    hashtag
    Limitations

    With the above usage scenarios in mind, consider the grids limitations. First of all, all content entered into the grid is stored as a single property value on the content node, as a big JSON object. This means that as soon as the values are stored in the database, there is no managed API to drill into the grid content and target specific cell content. A grid layout is not a recommended storage of reusable content - it wasn't designed for this scenario. If you wish to reuse content in multiple pages, it is still recommended that you store these pieces of content as separate content nodes, so they can be stored, cached and queried as usual.

    hashtag
    Customisation

    Keep all customisation in the /App_Plugins/ folder. This makes it easier to share across multiple projects and ensures that nothing is lost in an update process.

    hashtag
    Keep it basic

    The grid cannot solve every problem, neither was it meant to. It absolutely shines when configured correctly and designed to solve well-defined editor tasks, like entering content in a pre-defined layout and preconfigured options. If you put a standard grid editor on every page, expecting editors to do magic, you will be disappointed - and so will your editor.

    So keep the use cases basic, spend time to configure and tune the grid in detail, this will truly make your editors love you.

    .

    Once you've made sure you meet the requirements it is time to install the Umbraco Templates on your system.

    To do this follow the Install using .NET CLI guide.

    With the templates installed on your system, it is now possible to create Umbraco projects.

    To create a project, there are two options:

    • Continue creating projects using the .NET CLI.

    • Create new projects using Visual Studio (only macOS).

    To create new projects using Visual Studio, you can use the Install using Visual Studio guide.

    Once you create a new project it will use SQLite by default on Linux/macOS.

    If you prefer using SQL Server as your database, you can either install it locally or run it via Dockerarrow-up-right.

    requirements for running Umbraco CMS
    In the example above the possible values for the input field would be [8, 8.5, 9, 9.5, 10]

    All other values will be removed in the content editor when saving or publishing.

    If the value of Step Size is not set then all decimal values between 8 and 10 is possible to input in the content editor.

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Content Example

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Data Type Definition Example
    YYYY-MM-DD
    , but you can change this to something else. See
    for the supported formats.

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Content Example

    hashtag
    MVC View Example - displays a datetime

    hashtag
    Typed

    hashtag
    Dynamic (Obsolete)

    circle-exclamation

    See Common pitfalls for more information about why the dynamic approach is obsolete.

    Data Type Definition Example
    MomentJS.comarrow-up-right

    A single column layout which to the content editor will act like a full page canvas to insert elements on

  • A multiple column layout with a main content body, and one or more sidebar columns to insert lists or other sidebar widgets on.

  • You can however configure as many layouts and layout sections as you wish, each section in the layout must be given a width in columns, so editors gets an accurate preview of their layout.

    hashtag
    Row configurations

    A row in the grid editor contains one or more cells, which divide the row into areas where editors can enter content. So a row is merely a container of areas to insert content into. When you add a new row, you are asked to give it a name, then define cells inside the row by clicking the "+" icon. Each cell has a default width set to 4, but by clicking the inserted cell you can control its width.

    It is possible to setup configurable attributes(class, rel, href) and inline styling on rows.

    You can add as many cells as you like. If they overflow the total width of the row, they will be arranged after each other horizontally as you'd expect in a grid system.

    Each cell can by default contain any type of editor such as textstring editors, imagespicker, embedded media or Umbraco macros. To override this behavior, uncheck the allow all editors option and you can specify which editors will be available for the row.

    Server setup

    This section describes different ways of setting up servers for use with Umbraco

    This section describes different ways of setting up servers for use with Umbraco

    hashtag
    Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and HTTPS

    We strongly encourage the use of HTTPS with Umbraco installations especially in production environments. Using HTTPS will greatly enhance the security of your website, see the Security reference for more information.

    hashtag

    To ensure a stable and smoothly running Umbraco installation, these permissions need to be set correctly.

    hashtag

    Information about hosting a v9 application using IIS.

    hashtag

    Information on how to deploy Umbraco in a Load Balanced scenario and other details to consider when setting up Umbraco for load balancing.

    hashtag

    Best practices for running Umbraco on Azure Web Apps.

    hashtag

    The runtime mode setting optimizes Umbraco for the best development experience or optimal production environment.

    hashtag

    Overview of topics to consider when running Umbraco in Docker.

    DateTime

    Alias: Umbraco.DateTime

    Returns: DateTime

    Displays a calendar UI for selecting dates which are saved as a DateTime value.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    There are two settings available for manipulating the DateTime property.

    One is to set a format. By default the format of the date in the Umbraco backoffice will be YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss, but you can change this to something else. See for the supported formats.

    The second setting is "Offset time". When enabling this setting the displayed time will be offset with the servers timezone. This can be useful in cases where an editor is in a different timezone than the hosted server.

    hashtag
    Content Example

    hashtag
    MVC View Example - displays a datetime

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the .

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Data

    This section focuses on how to create data using the Umbraco backoffice

    This section focuses on how to create data using the Umbraco backoffice.

    There are three kinds of content in Umbraco:

    • Your normal website content that exists in the content section.

    • Media content such as images, videos and PDFs that are stored in the Media section.

    • Finally Members, used for user profiles and frontend authentication which you can find in the Members section.

    A fundamental principle in Umbraco is that all content types have a definition (Document Types, Media Types, Member Types). These definitions are highly customizable, meaning you can add properties and have complete control over how the data is organized.

    hashtag

    Defining Documents Types, adding properties and creating content.

    hashtag

    Defining Media Types and uploading files to the media section, using upload fields and image cropper.

    hashtag

    Defining Member Types and creating members for authentication and user profiles.

    hashtag

    Creating and editing Data Types.

    hashtag

    Schedule when content should be published / unpublished automatically.

    hashtag

    Overview of how to add and reorder tabs, convert a group to a tab and manage the “Generic” tab

    hashtag

    Control who has access to the Umbraco backoffice and what permissions they have.

    hashtag

    An introduction to Relations and Relation Types, creating, and managing relationships between different entities in Umbraco.

    hashtag

    Using Dictionary Items, you can store a value for each language. Dictionary Items have a unique key which is used to fetch the value of the Dictionary Item.

    hashtag

    How to keep the noise down whilst ensuring your important content versions stick around indefinitely.

    Grid Layout (Legacy)

    circle-info

    We highly recommend that you use the Block Grid instead.

    The Grid Layout has been marked as obsolete and development on the property editor has been discontinued. It will be removed as a core property editor with the release of Umbraco 14, planned for Summer 2024.

    Returns: JSON

    Gives editors a grid layout editor which allows them to insert different types of content in a predefined layout.

    hashtag

    The basic concept of Grid Layouts.

    hashtag

    How to setup your Grid Layout data type.

    hashtag

    Add settings and styles.

    hashtag

    Explanation of default Grid editors and how to customise them.

    hashtag

    Build your own Grid editor from the ground up.

    hashtag

    Render content created with Grid Layouts in your templates.

    hashtag

    General guidelines when contemplating Grid Layout implementation.

    hashtag

    Example how to add values programmatically.

    Rendering Grid In a Template

    hashtag
    Using @Html.GetGridHtml

    To render a property based on the grid inside a template you should use the HtmlHelper extension:

    @Html.GetGridHtml(Model, "propertyAlias")

    This will render the grid item with the alias "propertyAlias" from the current page models' content.

    This will by default use the view /views/partials/grid/bootstrap3.cshtml you can also use other provided grid template rendering files - for example, the built-in bootstrap2.cshtml view by overloading this helper:

    You can create your own custom grid rendering file for your favorite or custom grid framework implementation. Tip: copy one of the existing files as a starting point. By convention, if you create your mycustomrenderer.cshtml file in /views/partials/grid you can render the grid property like so:

    Possible paths where you can add the custom Grid layout views:

    What Are Grid Layouts?

    To understand how the grid layout editor works, we must first understand the structure of the grid layouts.

    Grid layouts consists of two main areas that need to be configured, grid layout area and grid rows.

    hashtag
    Grid Layout

    The layout area is where the overall page layout is defined. Layout areas are divided in to layout sections e.g. a sidebar section and content section. The size of the layout sections is defined in columns. For a full-width content area use max number of columns (12 for Bootstrap 3). Each layout section contains one or more rows.

    hashtag
    Grid Rows

    Grid rows is where the actual content goes. Each row is divided into cells that contain the property editors. The size of the cells is defined in columns. Unlike the layouts sections it is possible to add more cells than the max number of columns - they will stack as they should in a grid system.

    Textarea

    Alias: Umbraco.TextArea

    Returns: String

    Textarea is an HTML textarea control for multiple lines of text. It can be configured to have a fixed character limit, as well as define how big the space for writing can be. By default, there is no character limit unless it's specifically set to a specific value like 200 for instance. If you don't specify the number of rows, 10 will be the amount of rows the textarea will be occupying, unless changed to a custom value.

    hashtag

    Eye Dropper Color Picker

    Alias: Umbraco.ColorPicker.EyeDropper

    Returns: string

    The Eye Dropper Color picker allows you to choose a color from the full color spectrum using HEX and RGBA.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    Member Picker

    Alias: Umbraco.MemberPicker

    Returns: IPublishedContent

    The member picker opens a panel to pick a specific member from the member section. The value saved is of type IPublishedContent.

    hashtag

    Member Group Picker

    Alias: Umbraco.MemberGroupPicker

    Returns: string

    The Member Group Picker opens a panel to pick one or more member groups from the Member section. The value saved is of type string (comma separated IDs).

    hashtag

    Radiobutton List

    Alias: Umbraco.RadioButtonList

    Returns: string

    Pretty much like the name indicates this Data type enables editors to choose from list of radio buttons and returns the value of the selected item as string.

    hashtag

    Data Types

    Learn about the data types in Umbraco.

    A Data Type defines the type of input for a property. So when adding a property (on Document Types, Media Types and Members) and selecting the Type you are selecting a Data Type. There are preconfigured Data Types available in Umbraco and more can be added in the Settings section.

    hashtag
    What is a Data Type?

    A Data Type can be something basic (textstring, number, true/false,...) or it can be more complex (multi node tree picker, image cropper, Grid Layout).

    Rich Text Editor Styles

    It is possible to define specific styles and fonts for the Rich Text Editor (RTE). Once you have defined the styles, and enabled them on the RTE Data Type, the styles can be accessed directly in the Content section.

    hashtag
    Creating RTE Styles

    The RTE styles are created and managed in the Umbraco backoffice.

    Email Address

    In this article you can learn how to use the build in email property editor

    Alias: Umbraco.EmailAddress

    Returns: String

    Displays an email address.

    hashtag
    Settings

    Default Document Types

    On this page, you will find the default Document Types in Umbraco. If you want to use these document types, you can create them in the Settings section.

    hashtag
    Document type with template

    Creating document types with templates allows you to define both the content structure and the visual presentation of a particular type of content item. It ensures a consistent and cohesive look and feel across your website while also enabling structured content management. This approach helps separate content from design, making it easier to manage and update your website's content and appearance independently through templates.

    Scheduled Publishing

    Each document in Umbraco can be scheduled for publishing and unpublishing on a pre-defined date and time.

    Each document in Umbraco can be scheduled for publishing and unpublishing on a pre-defined date and time.

    You can find the options to do this click on the arrow next to the Save and publish button and pick Schedule...

    This will open a Schedule Publishing dialog where you can specify dates and time.

    Toggle

    Returns: Boolean

    Toggle is a standard checkbox which saves either 0 or 1, depending on the checkbox being checked or not.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    @Model.MyDecimal
    @Model.Value("MyDecimal")
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'myDecimal'. 
        content.SetValue("myDecimal", 3);
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'myDecimal'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.MyDecimal).Alias, 3);
    }
    @(Model.Content.GetPropertyValue<DateTime>("datePicker").ToString("dd MM yyyy"))
    @{
        @CurrentPage.datePicker.ToString("dd-MM-yyyy")
    }
    File & folder permissions
    Hosting v9+ in IIS
    Load Balanced setup
    Running Umbraco on Azure Web Apps
    Runtime modes
    Running Umbraco in Docker
    Defining Content
    Creating Media
    Creating Members
    Customizing Data Types
    Scheduled Publishing
    Adding Tabs
    Users
    Relations
    Dictionary Items
    Content Version Cleanup (v9.1.0+)
    What are Grid Layouts
    Configuring the Grid Layout data type
    Settings and styling
    Grid editors
    Build your own Grid editor
    Render Grid in template
    Grid Layout Best Practices
    Add values programmatically
    Watch this tutorial on how to get started building your first Umbraco CMS website.
    MomentJS.comarrow-up-right
    Content Service
    Data Type Definition Example
    Content Example
    @Html.GetGridHtml(Model, "propertyAlias", "bootstrap3")
    @Html.GetGridHtml(Model, "propertyAlias", "mycustomrenderer")
    /Views/grid/mycustomrenderer.cshtml
    /Views/Shared/grid/mycustomrenderer.cshtml
    /Views/Partials/grid/mycustomrenderer.cshtml
    /Views/MacroPartials/grid/mycustomrenderer.cshtml
    /Views/Render/grid/mycustomrenderer.cshtml
    /Views/Shared/grid/mycustomrenderer.cshtml
    /Pages/Shared/grid/mycustomrenderer.cshtml
    @Model.DatePicker
    @Model.Value("datePicker")
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = new Guid("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'datePicker'
        content.SetValue("datePicker", DateTime.Now);
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'datePicker'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.DatePicker).Alias, DateTime.Now);
    }
    Data Type Definition Example

    hashtag
    Without a character limit

    Textarea Data Type Definition

    hashtag
    With a character limit

    Textarea Data Type Definition With Limits

    hashtag
    Settings

    hashtag
    Content Example

    hashtag
    Without a character and rows limit

    Textarea Content Example

    hashtag
    With a character limit and rows limit

    Textbox Content Example With Limits

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add value programmatically

    See the example below to learn how a value can be added or changed programmatically to a Textarea property. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Eye Dropper Color Picker Data Type Definition

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Eye Dropper Color Picker Content

    hashtag
    Example with Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Example without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Data Type Definition Example
    Media Picker Data Type Definition

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Member Picker Content

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Data Type Definition Example
    Member Group Picker Type Definition

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Member Grouep Picker Content

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    You can also add multiple groups by creating a comma separated string with the desired member group IDs.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Data Type Definition Example
    Radiobutton List Data Type Definition
    circle-info

    You can use dictionary items to translate the values of a Radiobutton List property editor in a multilingual setup. For more details, see the Creating a Multilingual Site article.

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Radiobutton List Content

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Typed

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    The Data Type references a Property Editor and if the Property Editor has settings these are configured on the Data Type. This means you can have multiple Data Types referencing the same Property Editor.

    An example of this could be to have two dropdown Data Types both referencing the same dropdown Property Editor. One configured to show a list of cities, the other a list of countries.

    hashtag
    Creating a new Data Type

    To create a new Data Type, go to the Settings section within the backoffice. Thereafter click the menu icon to the right of the Data Types folder and select Create->New Data Type. Name the Data Type - we'll call it Dropdown Cities.

    Dropdown List
    • Property Editor: This is where you pick the Property Editor that our Dropdown Cities Data Type will be referencing. Pick the Dropdown and now you will see the configuration options that are available for a Data Type referencing the Dropdown Property Editor.

    • Enable multiple choice: By enabling this it will be possible to select multiple options from the dropdown.

    • Add prevalue: Here you can add prevalues to the Data Type by entering the value you want into the input field and pressing the add button or hitting Enter on your keyboard.

    When you're happy with the list press Save. It is now possible to select this Data Type for a property on Document Types, Media Types, and Members. Doing this will then create a dropdown list for the editor to choose from and save the choice as a string.

    hashtag
    Customizing Data Types

    To customize an existing Data Type go to the Settings section, expand the Data Types folder and select the Data Type you want to edit.

    Besides the Data Types that are available out of the box there are some additional Property Editors. For example, think of the Slider and Block List.

    hashtag
    Viewing Data Type References

    To view the Data Type reference, go to the Settings section and expand the Data Types folder. Select the Data Type you wish to view the reference for and click the Info tab.

    Content Picker References

    This gives you an overview of the Types that currently use the Data Type.

    Learn more about viewing references or implementing tracking in the Tracking References article.

    hashtag
    More information

    • List of available Data Types

    • Property Editors

    hashtag
    Related Services

    • DataTypeService

    hashtag
    Umbraco Learning Base Channel

    Find the Stylesheets folder in the Settings section.

  • Right-click the folder and select Create....

  • Choose New Rich Text Editor style sheet file.

  • Give the new stylesheet a name and Save it.

  • This will generate an empty CSS file in your project.

    At this point, you can start adding specific styles, that your editors can then use in the Content section when creating and writing new content.

    Add specific RTE styles

    The image above is an example of how an RTE style can be configured. When working with these styles, the Preview feature will show you how the style will look when applied.

    Every style you add, will automatically be added to the CSS file. The file will be placed in the same location as the rest of your CSS files. It is possible to edit the file directly from the backoffice as well. Access it from the Code tab in the top-right corner.

    Edit CSS file directly in the backoffice

    hashtag
    Using RTE Styles

    In order for your editors to be able to use the styles when working with content, two things needs to be done.

    hashtag
    1. Enable "Style select"

    The styles will be accessed by the editors using the "Formats" dropdown in the toolbar of the RTE. In order the enable the dropdown, the "Style select" toolbar option needs to be checked.

    This can be done by accessing the RTE Data Type directly from the "Info" tab on the Content. You can also find the RTE Data Type in the Settings section of the backoffice and make the changes from there. Learn more about the configuration options in the RTE Config article.

    hashtag
    2. Select the styles

    You can have as many different styles for your RTEs as you want. You might want to have different styles for different RTE Data Types.

    When configuring your RTE Data Types, you can select which stylesheets your content editors should be able to use.

    Choose stylesheets on the Data Type
    Rich Text Editor Styles

    The Email Address Property Editor does not come with any further configuration. The property can be configured once it has been added to a Document Type.

    Mandatory Checkbox Example

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Single email address content example

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add value programmatically

    See the example below to learn how a value can be added or changed programmatically to an Email-address property. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    circle-info

    The value sent to an EmailAddress property needs to be a correct email address, For example: [email protected].

    It is recommended that you set up validation on this property, in order to verify whether the value added is in the correct format.

    hashtag
    Document type

    Creating a Document Type (without a template) is about defining the content structure and fields that can be used across different content items. You might use document types without templates for creating consistent, structured content that doesn't require a predefined page layout. For example blog posts or product listings.

    hashtag
    Compositions

    Compositions provide a way to create reusable sets of properties that can be added to one or more document types. This can help simplify the management and consistency of content types across your website.

    When using a mixed setup, you can take advantage of nesting and use compositions by clicking on "Compositions..." option.

    circle-exclamation

    If you create 2 compositions that contain some common properties it is only possible to pick one of the compositions in a Document Type. If preferred, those compositions that cannot be used can be marked as hidden by checkmarking the Hide unavailable options.

    hashtag
    Element Type

    An Element Type is a Document Type without a template containing schema configurations for repeating a set of properties. These are for defining schema in the Block List Editor, Block Grid Editor, or other Element Type based editors.

    Element Types cannot be used to create content that resides in the Content tree. When you create an Element type, it automatically sets the Is Element Type flag to True on the Permissions tab.

    Element Types are created using the same workflow as regular Document Types but usually contain fewer properties. You can also create Element Types as part of configuring a Block Grid or Block List Data Type.

    hashtag
    Timezones

    Your server may be in a different timezone than where you are located. You are able to select a date and time in your timezone and Umbraco will make sure that the item gets published at that time. So, if you select 12PM then the item will be published at 12PM in the timezone you are in. This may be 8PM on the server, which is indicated when you select the date and time.

    Scheduled publishing

    If you are in the same timezone as the server, this message will not appear under the date picker.

    circle-info

    In Umbraco versions lower than 7.5, the time you select has to be the time on the server. These older versions of Umbraco do not detect your local timezone.

    hashtag
    Permissions

    All users with access to the Content section in the Umbraco backoffice are able to schedule content for publish/unpublish.

    hashtag
    Configuration

    In some cases you will need to adjust your configuration to ensure that scheduled publishing/unpublishing works. The schedule works by the server sending an HTTP(S) request to itself.

    If you are in a load balanced environment special care must be given to ensure you've configured this correctly, see the docs here

    If you are not load balancing, the way that Umbraco determines the base URL to send the scheduled HTTP(S) request to is as follows:

    • umbracoSettings:settings/web.routing/@umbracoApplicationUrl if it exists (see these docs for details)

    • Else umbracoSettings:settings/scheduledTasks/@baseUrl if it exits (deprecated)

    • Else umbracoSettings:distributedCall/servers if we have the server in there (deprecated, see load balance docs)

    • Else it's based on the first request that the website receives and uses the base URL of this request (default)

    If the umbracoApplicationUrl is used, the value also specifies the scheme (either HTTP or HTTPS). The request for scheduled publishing will always be sent over HTTPS if the appSettings umbracoUseSSL is set to true.

    hashtag
    Troubleshooting

    If your scheduled publishing/unpublishing is not working as expected it is probably an issue that your server cannot communicate with the scheduled publishing endpoint. This can be caused by a number of reasons such as:

    • Url rewrites in place that prevent the endpoint from being reached

    • DNS misconfiguration not allowing the server to communicate to the base URL used in the first request that the website receives - which could be directly affected by a firewall/Network Address Translation (NAT)/load balancer that your server sites behind

    • Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and/or umbracoUseSSL misconfiguration not allowing the server to communicate to the scheduled publishing endpoint on the correct http/https scheme

    To better diagnose the issue you can temporarily change your log4net config settings to be DEBUG instead of INFO. This will give you all sorts of information including being able to see whether or not the scheduled publishing endpoint is being reached or not.

    In some cases it might be easiest to specify the umbracoSettings:settings/web.routing/@umbracoApplicationUrl setting. This is to ensure that your server is communicating to itself on the correct URL.

    Scheduled publishing
    Scheduled publishing
    The Toggle property has a setting which allows you to set the default value of the checkbox, either checked (true) or unchecked (false).

    It is also possible to define a label, that will be displayed next to the checkbox on the content.

    hashtag
    Content Example

    No Edit Content Example

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    True/False Data Type Definition

    Install using .NET CLI

    We have made custom Umbraco templates that are available for use with dotnet new. The steps below will demonstrate the minimum amount of actions required to get you going and set up an Umbraco project from the command line using .NET templates.

    hashtag
    Video Tutorial

    hashtag
    Install the template

    1. Install the latest .

    2. Run dotnet new install Umbraco.Templates to install the project templates. &#xNAN;The solution is packaged up into the NuGet package and can be installed into the dotnet CLI.

    Once that is complete, you can see that Umbraco was added to the list of available projects types by running dotnet new --list:

    circle-info

    In some cases the templates may silently fail to install (usually this is an issue with NuGet sources). If this occurs you can try specifying the NuGet source in the command by running dotnet new install Umbraco.Templates --nuget-source "https://api.nuget.org/v3/index.json".

    To get help on a project template with dotnet new run the following command:

    dotnet new umbraco -h

    From that command's output, you will get a better understanding of what are the default template options, as well as those command-line flags specific to Umbraco that you can use (as seen below):

    hashtag
    Create an Umbraco project

    1. Create a new empty Umbraco solution: dotnet new umbraco -n MyCustomUmbracoProject

    You will now have a new project with the name MyCustomUmbracoProject, or the name you chose to use. The new project can be opened and run using your favorite IDE or you can continue using the CLI commands.

    circle-info

    If you want to create a solution file as well you can run the commands below. dotnet new sln dotnet sln add MyCustomUmbracoProject

    hashtag
    Run Umbraco

    1. Navigate to the newly created project folder: cd MyCustomUmbracoProject

    2. Build and run the new Umbraco .Net Core project: dotnet build dotnet run

    The project is now running on the and has assigned a free available port to run it on. Look in the terminal window after the dotnet run command to see the URLs.

    The next step is to run through the Umbraco CMS installation. If you chose to use MS SQL Server/Azure you will need to add your connection string during this setup process to get access to the Umbraco backoffice.

    Running Umbraco in Docker

    Exactly how you choose to compose your Dockerfile will depend on your project specific needs. This section is not intended as a comprehensive guide, rather as an overview of topics to be aware of when hosting in Docker.

    hashtag
    What is Docker

    Docker is a platform for developing, shipping, and running applications in containers. Multiple services exist for hosting these containers. For more information, refer to the official Docker Documentationarrow-up-right

    hashtag
    The Docker file system

    By default, files created inside a container are written to an ephemeral, writable container layer. This means that the files don't persist when the container is removed, and it's challenging to get files out of the container. Additionally, this writable layer is not suitable for performance-critical data processing.

    This has implications when running Umbraco in Docker.

    For more information, refer to the .

    hashtag
    General file system consideration

    In general, when working with files and Docker you work in a "push" fashion with read-only layers. When you build, you take all your files and "push" them into this read-only layer.

    This means that you should avoid making files on the fly, and instead rely on building your image.

    In an Umbraco context, this means you should not create or edit template, script or stylesheet files via the backoffice. These should be deployed as part of your web application and not managed via Umbraco.

    Similarly, you shouldn't use InMemory modelsbuilder, since that also relies on creating files on the disk. While this is not a hard requirement, it doesn't provide any value unless you are live editing your site.

    Instead, configure models builder to use "source code" mode in development, and "none" in production, as .

    hashtag
    Logs

    Umbraco writes logs to the /umbraco/Logs/ directory. Due to the performance implications of writing to a writable layer, and the limited size, it is recommended to mount a volume to this directory.

    hashtag
    Data

    The /umbraco/Data/ directory is used to store temporary files, such as file uploads. Considering the limitations of the writable layer, you should also mount a volume to this directory.

    hashtag
    Media

    It's recommended to not store media in the writable layer. This is for similar performance reasons as logs, but also for practical hosting reasons. You likely want to persist media files between containers.

    One solution is to use bind mounts. The ideal setup, though, is to store the media and ImageSharp cache externally. For more information, refer to the .

    hashtag
    Required files

    Your solution may require some specific files to run, such as license files. You will need to pass these files into the container at build time, or mount them externally.

    hashtag
    HTTPS

    When running websites in Docker, it's common to do so behind a reverse proxy or load balancer. In these scenarios you will likely handle SSL termination at the reverse proxy. This means that Umbraco will not be aware of the SSL termination, and will complain about not using HTTPS.

    Umbraco checks for HTTPS in two locations:

    1. The HstsCheck health check - This will result in a failed healthcheck.

    2. The UseHttpsValidator - This will result in a build error, if Production runtime mode is used.

    To avoid these checks failing, you can remove them in your project.

    hashtag
    Health Check

    The health check must be removed via configuration, through the appsettings.json file, environment variables, or similar. For more information see the .

    The HstsCheck key is E2048C48-21C5-4BE1-A80B-8062162DF124 so the appsettings will look something like:

    hashtag
    Runtime mode validator

    The UseHttpsValidator must be removed through code For more information see the .

    The code to remove the validator can look something like:

    Local IIS With Umbraco

    This article describes how to run an Umbraco 9 site on a local IIS server.

    This is a quick guide on getting your Umbraco website running locally on IIS.

    The guide will assume you already have IIS configured and know your way around it, as well as having a local website you wish to host.

    hashtag
    Setting up prerequisites

    First, you need to ensure you have "Development time IIS support installed". To check this, go to the Visual Studio installer, click modify and check on the right side under "ASP.NET and web development":

    Once that is installed you should set up a new IIS site - and make sure to add the hostname to your hosts file as well. Here is my setup for an example:

    circle-info

    For the path you want to point it at the root of your site - where the .csproj file is.

    hashtag
    Add permissions to NuGet cache folder

    You might need to change permissions for the NuGet cache folder - C:\users\<username>\.nuget\packages. The user or group (IIS_IUSRS) that the IIS site is running on requires Read permissions on this folder because this is where some of the files for Umbraco and Umbraco packages are being served from during development. If the IIS user or group does not have permission to read from the NuGet cache folder, you could run into a DirectoryNotFoundException while running the site.

    When the site is published these files are copied from the NuGet cache folder to wwwroot/umbraco and wwwroot/App_Plugins and these folders will typically have the correct permissions. For more information on setting permissions, see the article.

    hashtag
    Add new launch profile

    At this point you can go to your Visual Studio solution of the site and in the Properties folder there is a launchSettings.json file, that looks like this:

    You can add a new profile called IIS, and point it at your local domain. Here it is with my example domain:

    At this point IIS will be added to the launch profiles, and you can run the site from Visual Studio by choosing IIS in the dropdown:

    And finally the site is running from your local IIS:

    Hosting Umbraco in IIS

    Information on hosting Umbraco on IIS

    hashtag
    Configuring IIS for .NET

    • Install the .NET Core Runtimearrow-up-right and download the Hosting Bundlearrow-up-right. Ensure you download the correct .NET version as per the Requirements article.

    • Restart IIS (net stop was /y followed by net start w3svc)

    • Create a site in IIS and ensure that the .NET Common Language Runtime (CLR) version is set to No Managed Code for the Application Pool.

    hashtag
    Publish website for manual deployment to IIS

    You can use the dotnet CLI to compile and collate all files required for hosting

    Alternatively, you can use the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) publishing in Visual Studio to compile and collate all the required files for the application to run.

    In Visual Studio, select the Umbraco web project in the Solution Explorer and choose the Publish... command.

    circle-info

    Deploy a website for automated deployment with Azure DevOps to IIS

    You can use the to deploy your website to your Web Server. This task is a wrapper for MSDeploy.exe and can be configured as preferred.

    hashtag
    Environment Variables in ApplicationHost.config

    In the Management section you find the Configuration Editor:

    One section is of particular interest:

    • In the first, left hand dropdown list (Section:) choose: system.webServer/aspNetCore section.

    • In the second, right hand dropdown list (From:) choose: ApplicationHost.config <location path='[YOUR-SITENAME]'>. This ensures your settings will be stored in a machine specific file. The configuration files might end in a public repository and should not contain sensitive data like Connection Strings or Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) configuration with username and password. Additionally, by default the configuration file will be overwritten during each publish processes.

    Find the line named environmentVariables and open the dialog to add environment variables. These work similar to the launchSettings. You can define ASPNETCORE_ENVIRONMENT and create an appSettings.[ASPNETCORE_ENVIRONMENT].json file. Or even better create environment variables for sensitive settings like passwords. There are some differences to launchSettings.json configuration:

    • Variable names need to change the object structure form JSON by combining the segments with double underscore __ e.g. ConnectionStrings__umbracoDbDSN

    • Escaped backslashes \\ e.g. serverName\\databaseInstanceName are replaced by single backslash \ e.g. DATABASESERVER123\SQL2017

    hashtag
    IIS Hosting models

    IIS can host .NET applications using 2 different hosting models

    • In-process hosting runs a .NET app in the same process as its IIS worker process

    • - to enable this model you need to edit your .csproj file and add:

    Out-of-process .NET apps run separately from the IIS worker process. The module controls the management of the Kestrel server and requests are proxied between them.

    Add Values Programmatically

    hashtag
    Configuration

    For this example, the default grid configuration has been used.

    Grid configuration

    hashtag
    Set value

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the .

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Install using Visual Studio

    A guide to install Umbraco CMS using Visual Studio.

    hashtag
    Prerequisites

    • Install the newest Umbraco dotnet templates.

      • In Visual Studio 2022, the .NET CLI templates are enabled to appear, by default. For information on how to enable .NET CLI templates in Visual Studio 2019, see the article.

    • Check the to ensure you have everything you need to start your Umbraco project.

    hashtag
    Quick Start

    This is an abbreviated version of the installation steps. Jump to the section for a more thorough guide.

    • Open Visual Studio.

    • Go to File > New > Project, search for Umbraco.

    hashtag
    Video Tutorial

    hashtag
    Create a new Umbraco project

    To install Umbraco we first need to install Umbraco's dotnet new templates.

    For more information check the first 2 steps of .

    hashtag
    Create the Visual Studio project

    Go to File > New > Project and search for Umbraco in the Search for templates field.

    Once you select Umbraco Project (Umbraco HQ) navigate to the next step by clicking Next.

    hashtag
    Configure project

    In this step, you will be able to give your project a name specific to the project you are creating.

    circle-info

    Refrain from changing the Solution name, as this will cause a namespace conflict with the CMS itself.

    hashtag
    Additional information

    In the next step, you are able to specify some additional parameters like the Target framework. The rest are optional.

    You can then click the Create button and your Umbraco Project will be ready for you.

    hashtag
    Running the site

    You can now run the site through Visual Studio using F5 or the Debug button.

    Follow the installation wizard and after a few steps, you will get a message saying the installation was a success.

    hashtag
    Next steps

    You are now ready to start building your Umbraco project. Have a look below for different resources on the next steps.

    Sections

    In this article you can learn more about the various sections you can find within the Umbraco Backoffice.

    A section in Umbraco is where you perform specific tasks related to a particular area of Umbraco. For example Content, Settings and Users are all sections. You can navigate between the different sections by clicking the corresponding icon in the section menu which is positioned at the top of the Backoffice.

    The Section menu is the horizontal menu located at the top of the Umbraco Backoffice.

    There are eight default sections that come with Umbraco:

    hashtag
    Content

    The Content section contains the content of the website. Content is displayed as nodes in the content tree. Nodes can also show content state:

    • Grayed out nodes have not been published

    • Nodes have unpublished versions (but are currently published)

    • Nodes are protected from the public (can only be accessed by a logged in Member)

    In order to create content, you must define it using Document Types.

    hashtag
    Media

    The Media section contains the media for the website. By default, you can create folders and upload media files (images and PDFs). You can customize the existing media types or define your own from the Settings section.

    hashtag
    Settings

    The Settings section is where you can work with the website layout files, languages, and define media and content types. In this section, you can also find the Log Viewer to browse through your log files.

    The Settings tree consists of:

    • Document Types

    • Media Types

    • Member Types

    The Settings section of the Umbraco backoffice has its own set of default dashboards. For more information, see the article.

    hashtag
    Packages

    In this section, you can browse and install packages into your Umbraco solution. You can also get an overview of all the installed packages as well as uninstall packages you no longer need.

    hashtag
    Users

    Manage, create, and customize Backoffice users and user groups.

    hashtag
    Members

    Manage, create, and customize members and member groups.

    hashtag
    Forms

    You can install Umbraco Forms directly from the Backoffice by clicking the install button. Once installed, this section is where you create and manage your forms.

    hashtag
    Translation

    This is the section where you create and manage your dictionary items.

    hashtag
    Help sections

    In the top-right corner, you'll find a search tool, which is also accessible by hitting CTRL + Space on your keyboard.

    Next to the search tool, there is a help section. In the help section you can find Backoffice tours and links to Umbraco resources such as documentation and UmbracoTV.

    There is also a small 'user section' with shortcuts to edit the currently logged in user, and view their most recent activities.

    hashtag
    Custom Sections

    Along with the default sections that come with Umbraco, you can create your own .

    hashtag
    Access based on User Group

    A User can access a particular section based on the User Group permissions.

    Learn more about how to configure the permissions in the article about .

    Document Type Localization

    Here you will learn how to apply localization for Document Types in Umbraco.

    The Umbraco backoffice is fully localized to match the user's configured language. When defining Document Types, you can apply localization to:

    • Document Type names and descriptions.

    • Property names and descriptions.

    • Custom property validation messages.

    • Tab and group names.

    Setting up localization for Document Types is a two-step process:

    • Create the localizations in .

    • Apply the localizations to the Document Types.

    circle-info

    Everything in this article also applies to defining .

    hashtag
    Creating localizations

    User defined language files are created in /config/lang and must be named {language}.user.xml. For example: en-us.user.xml.

    There are no specific requirements as to how localizations should be structured for use in Document Types. The following localizations have been used for the samples in this article:

    circle-info

    Umbraco must be restarted to pick up on changes to language files.

    hashtag
    Applying localizations

    The localizations are applied by using the syntax #{area alias}_{key alias}.

    1. Create a Document Type with template called #contentTypes_article with alias: articlePage.

    2. Under the newly created Document Type follow these steps:

    • Name the description to #contentTypes_article-desc.

    • Create a new tab called #tabs_content.

    • Add a new group called #groups_titles

    • Add a property called #properties_subTitle with alias subTitle.

      • Set description to #properties_subTitle-desc.

    1. When creating and editing the content, you will see that the backoffice now uses the configured localizations.

    1. Create a new "Article" content:

    1. When trying to save the content without adding the mandatory content, you will see a warning as expected:

    Settings Dashboards

    A guide displaying the options available in the Settings section in Umbraco CMS backoffice.

    The Settings section of the Umbraco backoffice has its own set of default dashboards. In this article, you can get an overview of each dashboard available in the Settings section:

    chevron-rightWelcomehashtag

    The Welcome dashboard is the first dashboard in the Settings section. Like all dashboards, it is displayed next to the Settings tree and consists of a view that can be customized. The Welcome dashboard consists of links to different resources that can be used when developing your Umbraco website.

    chevron-rightExamine Managementhashtag

    The Examine Management dashboard provides an overview of the Examine functionality available directly within the Umbraco backoffice. The Umbraco backoffice allows you to view details about your Examine indexes and searchers - all in one place. You can see which fields are being indexed and rebuild the indexes if there's a problem. You can also test keywords to see what results will be returned.

    For more information about Examine Management, see the article.

    chevron-rightPublished Statushashtag

    The Published Status dashboard displays the status of your site in the Published Cache Status section alongside the Content and Media nodes value. The Caches section provides three options: Memory Cache, Database Cache, and Internals (NuCache).

    • Memory Cache - Reloads the in-memory cache by entirely reloading it from the database cache. Use it when you think that the memory cache has not been properly refreshed.

    chevron-rightModels Builderhashtag

    Models builder is a tool that can generate a complete set of strongly-typed published content models for Umbraco. Models are available in both controllers and views. When using the Models Builder, the content cache does not return IPublishedContent objects anymore but returns strongly typed models implementing IPublishedContent.

    The Models Builder dashboard displays the following information:

    chevron-rightHealth Checkhashtag

    Health Checks are used to determine the status of your Umbraco project. It is a handy list of checks to see if your Umbraco installation is configured according to best practices. It's possible to add your custom-built health checks.

    For more information about Health Checks, see the articles.

    chevron-rightProfilinghashtag

    You can use the built-in performance profiler to assess the performance when rendering pages. To activate the profiler for a specific page rendering, add umbDebug=true to the querystring when requesting the page.

    The Profiling dashboard provides a toggle option - Activate the profiler by default to keep the profiler active by default for all page renderings. You can use this option without having to set umbDebug=true on each page request. The toggle button sets a cookie named UMB-DEBUG in your browser, which then activates the profiler automatically.

    chevron-rightTelemetry Datahashtag

    The Telemetry Data dashboard is a consent screen that is used for collecting system and usage information from your installation. Here, you can see what type of data is being collected and even adjust the level of reporting. Currently, there are three levels available: Minimal, Basic, and Detailed.

    Detailed is the default option where the data sent contains:

    • Anonymized site ID, Umbraco version, and packages installed.

    Textbox

    How to use the TextBox property editors in Umbraco CMS.

    Alias: Umbraco.Textbox

    Returns: String

    Textbox is an HTML input control for text. It can be configured to have a fixed character limit. The default maximum amount of characters is 512 unless it's specifically changed to a lower amount.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    hashtag
    Content Example

    hashtag
    Without a character limit

    hashtag
    With a character limit

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the .

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Numeric

    Alias: Umbraco.Integer

    Returns: Integer

    Numeric is an HTML input control for entering numbers. Since it's a standard HTML element the options and behaviour are all controlled by the browser and therefore is beyond the control of Umbraco.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    hashtag
    Minimum

    This allows you to set up a minimum value. If you will always need a minimum value of 10 this is where you set it up and whenever you use the datatype the value will always start at 10. It's not possible to change the value to anything lower than 10. Only higher values will be accepted.

    hashtag
    Step Size

    This allows you to control by how much value should be allowed to increase/decrease when clicking the up/down arrows. If you try to enter a value that does not match with the step setting then it will not be accepted.

    hashtag
    Maximum

    This allows you to set up a maximum value. If you will always need a maximum value of 100 this is where you set it up. It's not possible to change the value to anything higher than 100. Only lower values will be accepted.

    hashtag
    Settings

    hashtag
    Content Example

    hashtag
    MVC View Examples

    hashtag
    Rendering the output casting to an int (without Modelsbuilder)

    By casting the output as an int it's possible for you to do mathematical operations with the value.

    hashtag
    Rendering the output casting to a string (Without Modelsbuilder)

    You can also render the output by casting it to a string, which means you will not be able to do mathematical operations

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the .

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Label

    Alias: Umbraco.Label

    Returns: String

    Label is a non-editable control and can only be used to display a pre-set value.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    hashtag
    Value type

    If you want to set a value other than a String, you can define the data using one of the other available Data Types. These include Decimal, Date/time, Time, Integer, and Big integer.

    There is also a Value Type: Long string if you need to set a long string value for your Label.

    hashtag
    Content Example

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Without ModelsBuilder

    hashtag
    With ModelsBuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the .

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    File And Folder Permissions

    Information on file and folder permissions required for Umbraco sites

    circle-info

    To ensure a stable and smoothly running Umbraco installation, these permissions need to be set correctly. These permissions should be set up before or during the installation of Umbraco.

    The main account that requires 'modify' file permissions to be set on the folders below, is the account used start Umbraco. If Umbraco is hosted in IIS this will be the Application Pool Identity for the IIS website. Usually IIS APPPOOL\appPoolName or a specific local account or in some circumstances Network Service. If in doubt, ask your server admin / hosting company. Additionally, the Internet User (IUSR) account and IIS_IUSRS account only require 'read only' access to the site's folders.

    Generally, when developing locally with Visual Studio or Rider, permissions do not need to be strictly applied.

    circle-info

    If you have any specific static files/media items/etc, you should add the appropriate permissions accordingly.

    The permissions documentation should allow you to run a plain Umbraco install successfully.

    File / folder
    Permission
    Comment

    File Upload

    Alias: Umbraco.UploadField

    Returns: string

    Adds an upload field, which allows documents or images to be uploaded to Umbraco.

    You can define which file types should be accepted through the upload field.

    circle-info

    Backoffice

    Learn more about the Umbraco backoffice which is the admin side of your Umbraco website.

    In this article you can learn more about the common terms and concepts that are used throughout the Umbraco backoffice.

    hashtag

    When you go to the backoffice for the first time, you're presented with the login screen.

    Upgrade from Umbraco 8 to the latest version

    Learn how to upgrade your Umbraco 8 project to Umbraco 10.

    triangle-exclamation

    It is currently not possible to upgrade directly from Umbraco 8 to the latest version.

    The recommended approach for upgrading from version 8 to the latest version is to use this guide to upgrade from Umbraco 8 to Umbraco 10. Umbraco 10 contains the that must be upgraded from Umbraco 8. You can then use the steps to upgrade from Umbraco 10 to the latest version.

    Unattended Installs

    In some cases, you might need to install Umbraco instances automatically without having to run through the installation wizard to configure the instance.

    You can use the Unattended installs feature to allow for quick installation and set up of Umbraco instances on something like Azure Web Apps.

    This article will give you the details you need to install Umbraco unattended.

    hashtag
    Get clean install of Umbraco

    Multi Url Picker

    Alias: Umbraco.MultiUrlPicker

    Returns: IEnumerable<Link> or Link

    Multi Url Picker allows an editor to pick and sort multiple urls. This property editor returns a single item if the "Maximum number of items" Data Type setting is set to 1 or a collection if it is 0. These can either be internal, external or media.

    hashtag

    Standalone File System

    circle-info

    No file replication is configured, deployment handles updating files on the different servers.

    If the file system on your servers isn't performing any file replication then no Umbraco configuration file changes are necessary. However Media will need to be configured to use a shared location such as Blob storage or S3.

    Depending on the configuration and performance of the environment's local storage you might need to consider and the .

    List View

    Alias: Umbraco.Listview

    Returns: IEnumerable<IPublishedContent>

    List View display a list of categories when it is enabled on a Document Type that has children.

    hashtag

    Slider

    Alias: Umbraco.Slider

    Returns: decimal or Umbraco.Core.Models.Range<decimal>

    Pretty much like the name indicates this Data type enables editors to choose a value with a range using a slider.

    There are two flavors of the slider. One with a single value picker. One with a minimum and maximum value.

    Repeatable Textstrings

    Alias: Umbraco.MultipleTextstring

    Returns: array of strings

    The Repeatable textstrings property editor enables a content editor to make a list of text items. For best use with an unordered-list.

    hashtag

    Color Picker

    Alias: Umbraco.ColorPicker

    Returns: String (Hexadecimal)

    Returns: Umbraco.Cms.Core.PropertyEditors.ValueConverters.ColorPickerValueConverter.PickedColor (When using labels)

    The Color picker allows you to set some predetermined colors that the editor can choose between.

    It's possible to add a label to use with the color.

    Dropdown

    Alias: Umbraco.DropDown.Flexible

    Returns: String or IEnumerable<string>

    Displays a list of preset values. Either a single value or multiple values (formatted as a collection of strings) can be returned.

    hashtag

    Build Your Own Editor

    circle-info

    The samples in this section have not been verified against the latest version of Umbraco.

    A new Property Editor called the Block based Grid editor will soon be available as a substitute for the existing Grid Layout editor. For more information, see the in the Umbraco Roadmap.

    Create a file in /App_Plugins/yourpackage/editor.html and add the following to the editor.html file:

    Install using Visual Studio Code

    Follow these steps to set up an Umbraco project with Visual Studio Code. The benefit of using Visual Studio Code is that it is super quick to get up and running.

    hashtag
    Installing and setting up Visual Studio Code

    1. Go to

    Content Picker

    Alias: Umbraco.ContentPicker

    Returns: IPublishedContent

    The content picker opens a panel to pick a specific page from the content structure. The value saved is the selected nodes

    hashtag

    Default Data/Media Types

    On this page you will find the media types and Data Types in Umbraco. These types are not created automatically after an upgrade. If you want to use the new types, you can create them yourself.

    circle-info

    After upgrading, the default media types are not created automatically. If you create them manually, make sure to:

    • Set the permission for each of the media types to

    Checkbox List

    Alias: Umbraco.CheckBoxList

    Returns: IEnumerable<string>

    Displays a list of preset values as a list of checkbox controls. The text saved is an IEnumerable collection of the text values.

    circle-info

    Unlike other property editors, the Prevalue IDs are not directly accessible in Razor.

    @{
        if (Model.HasValue("description")){
            <p>@(Model.Value<string>("description"))</p>
        }
    }
    @if (!Model.HasValue(Model.Description))
    {
       <p>@Model.Description</p>
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of your page
        var guid = new Guid("796a8d5c-b7bb-46d9-bc57-ab834d0d1248");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've just defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid);
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'description'
        content.SetValue("description", "This is some text for the text area!");
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'description'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.Description).Alias, "This is some text for the text area!");
    }
    @{
        var color = Model.Color?.ToString();
    
        if (color != null)
        {
            <body style="background-color: @color"></body>
        }
    }
    @{
        var color = Model.Value<string>("Color");
    
        if (color != null)
        {
            <body style="background-color: @color"></body>
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'color'.
        content.SetValue("color", "#6fa8dc");
        
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'color'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.Color).Alias, "#6fa8dc");
        
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'theme'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.Theme).Alias, "rgba(111, 168, 220, 0.7)");
    }
    @{
        if (Model.HasValue("author"))
        {
            var member = Model.Value<IPublishedContent>("author");
            @member.Name
        }
    }
    @{
        if (Model.Author != null)
        {
            var member = Model.Author;
            @member.Name
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the member ID
        var authorId = Guid.Parse("ed944097281e4492bcdf783355219450");
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'author'. 
        content.SetValue("author", authorId);
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core;
    
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        var udi = Udi.Create(Constants.UdiEntityType.Member, authorId);
        
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'author'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.Author).Alias, udi);
    }
    @if (Model.HasValue("memberGroup"))
    {
        var memberGroup = Model.Value<string>("memberGroup"); 
        <p>@memberGroup</p>
    }
    @if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(Model.MemberGroup))
    {
        <p>@Model.MemberGroup</p>
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = new Guid("796a8d5c-b7bb-46d9-bc57-ab834d0d1248");
        
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'memberGroup'. The value is the specific ID of the member group
        content.SetValue("memberGroup", 1067);
                
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'memberGroup'. 
        content.SetValue("memberGroup", "1067","1068");
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core;
    
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'memberGroup'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.MemberGroup).Alias, 1067);
    }
    @if (Model.HasValue("colorTheme"))
    {
        var value = Model.Value("colorTheme");
        <p>@value</p>
    }
    @if (Model.ColorTheme != null)
    {
        var value = Model.ColorTheme;
        <p>@value</p>
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = new Guid("796a8d5c-b7bb-46d9-bc57-ab834d0d1248");
        
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
        
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'colorTheme'
        content.SetValue("colorTheme", "water");
                
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'colorTheme'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.ColorTheme).Alias, "water");
    }
    @if (Model.HasValue("email"))
    {
        var emailAddress = Model.Value<string>("email");
        <p>@emailAddress</p>
    }
    @if (!string.IsNullOrWhiteSpace(Model.Email))
    {
        <p>@Model.Email</p>
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of your page
        var guid = new Guid("796a8d5c-b7bb-46d9-bc57-ab834d0d1248");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've just defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid);
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'email'
        content.SetValue("email", "[email protected]");
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        if (!Model.Value<bool>("myCheckBox"))
        {
            <p>The Checkbox is not checked!</p>
        }
    }
    @{
        if (!Model.MyCheckbox)
        {
            <p>The Checkbox is not checked!</p>
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = new Guid("796a8d5c-b7bb-46d9-bc57-ab834d0d1248");
        
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'myCheckBox'
        content.SetValue("myCheckBox", true);
                
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'myCheckBox'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor,x => x.MyCheckBox).Alias, true);
    
    }
    Database Cache - Rebuilds the database cache that is the content of the cmsContentNu table. Use it when reloading the Memory Cache is not enough and you think that the database cache has not been properly generated.
  • Internals - Lets you trigger a NuCache snapshots collection.

  • Details on how Models Builder is configured, that is: InMemoryAuto, Nothing, SourceCodeAuto, and SourceCodeManual.
  • Provides a button to generate models (if the models mode is SourceCodeManual mode only).

  • Reports the last error (if any) that would have prevented models from being properly generated.

  • For more information about Models Builder, see the Models Builder article.

    For more information about MiniProfiler, see the MiniProfiler section in the Debugging article.
  • Number of: Root nodes, Content nodes, Macros, Media, Document Types, Templates, Languages, Domains, User Group, Users, Members, and Property Editors in use.

  • System information: Webserver, server OS, server framework, server OS language, and database provider.

  • Configuration settings: Modelsbuilder mode, if custom Umbraco path exists, ASP environment, and if you are in debug mode.

  • Basic contains:

    • Anonymized site ID, Umbraco version, and packages installed.

    Minimal contains:

    • Anonymized site ID only

    You can see the specific data being sent on each of the levels directly in the Telemetry Data Dashboard.

    Additionally, Telemetry Data also sends anonymized, analytical data on package usage in Umbraco. Having solid data on package usage is important for both package developers and the Umbraco ecosystem. For more information about Package Telemetry, see the Package Telemetryarrow-up-right section in the Umbraco 9.2 Release Blog Post.

    Examine Management
    Health Check

    /wwwroot/css

    Modify / Full control

    Should always have modify rights as the folder and its files are used for css files.

    /wwwroot/media

    Modify / Full control

    Should always have modify rights as the folder and its files are used for Media files uploaded via the Umbraco CMS backoffice.

    /wwwroot/scripts

    Modify / Full control

    Should always have modify rights as the folder and its files are used for script files.

    /appSettings*.json

    Modify / Full control

    Only needed for setting database and a global identifier during installation. So can be set to read-only afterwards for enhanced security.

    /App_Plugins

    Modify / Full control

    Should always have modify rights as the folder and its files are used by packages. Not part of your project by default.

    /umbraco

    Modify / Full control

    Should always have modify rights as the folder and its files are used for cache and storage.

    /Views

    Modify / Full control

    Should always have modify rights as the folder and its files are used for Templates, Partial views, and Macro files.

    Docker documentation on storagearrow-up-right
    described when using runtime modesarrow-up-right
    Azure Blob Storage documentationarrow-up-right
    Health Check documentation
    Runtime mode documentation
    File and folder permissions
    Checking the IIS module exists
    IIS site example
    Launch profiles
    Local IIS site
    IIS Release task in Azure DevOpsarrow-up-right
    In-process (default)arrow-up-right
    Out-of-processarrow-up-right
    IIS Application Pool
    Publish...
    IIS Website Configuration
    IIS Configuration Editor
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    Content Service
    .
  • Add a property called #properties_title with alias title.

    • Set description to #properties_title-desc.

    • Use a TextString editor.

    • Enable to Set this field as mandatory.

    • Under validation add #properties_title-message.

  • Use a TextString editor.
  • Enable to Allow as root in the Permissions tab.

  • user defined language files
    Media Types
    Applying localization to a property
    Applying localization to a Document Type
    Localized document creation dialog
    Localized document editing
    Localized property validation
    Content Service
    Textbox Data Type Definition
    Textbox Content Example
    Textbox Content Example Without a Character Limit
    Content Service
    Numeric Data Type Definition
    Numeric Content Definition
    Content Service
    Label Data Type Definition
    Label Content Example
    hashtag
    Synchronised File System
    circle-info

    The servers are performing file replication, updates to a file on one server, updates the corresponding file on any other servers.

    If the file system on your servers is performing file replication then the Umbraco temporary folder (~/umbraco/Data/TEMP) must be excluded from replication.

    If the file system on your servers is located on shared storage you will need to configure Umbraco to locate the Umbraco temporary folder outside of the shared storage.

    hashtag
    Replication techniques

    A common way to replicate files on Windows Server is to use [DFS](https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windows/desktop/bb540031(v=vs.85), which is included with Windows Server.

    Additional DFS resources:

    • Overview of DFS Replication in Windows Server 2008 R2arrow-up-right

    • Watch an intro to installing and working with DFSarrow-up-right

    There are other alternatives for file replication out there, some free and some licensed. You'll need to decide which solution is best for your environment.

    hashtag
    Non-replicated files

    When deploying Umbraco in a load balanced scenario using file replication, it is important to ensure that not all files are replicated - otherwise you will experience file locking issues. Here are the folders and files that should not be replicated:

    • ~/umbraco/Data/TEMP/*

    circle-info

    Alternatively store the Umbraco temporary files in the local server's 'temp' folder and set Examine to use a Directory Factory.

    Achieve this by changing the value of the LuceneDirectoryFactory setting to 'TempFileSystemDirectoryFactory' in the appsettings.json. The downside is that if you need to view temporary files you'll have to find it in the temp files. Locating the file this way isn't always clear.

    Below is shown how to do this in a Json configuration source.

    • ~/umbraco/Logs/*

      • This is optional and depends on how you want your logs configured (see below)

    If for some reason your file replication solution doesn't allow you to not replicate specific files folders (which it should!!) then you can use an alternative approach by using virtual directories.

    The following is not the recommended setup but it is a viable alternative:

    • Copy the ~/umbraco/Data/TEMP directory to each server, outside of any replication areas or to a unique folder for each server.

    • Create a virtual directory (not a virtual application) in the ~/umbraco/Data/ folder, and name it TEMP. Point the virtual directory to the folder you created in step 2.

    • You may delete the ~/umbraco/Data/TEMP folder from the file system - not IIS as this may delete the virtual directory - if you wish.

    hashtag
    IIS Setup

    IIS configuration is pretty straightforward with file replication. IIS is only reading files from its own file system like a normal IIS website.

    hashtag
    Mixture of standalone & synchronised

    In some scenarios you have a mixture of standalone and synchronised file systems. An example of this is Azure Web Apps where the file system isn't replicated between backoffice and front end servers but is replicated between all front end servers, in this configuration you should follow the steps for synchronised file systems.

    There is a specific documentation for load balancing with Azure Web Apps

    hashtag
    Examine Directory Factory Options

    • The TempFileSystemDirectoryFactory allows Examine to store indexes directly in the environment temporary storage directory, and should be used instead of SyncTempEnvDirectoryFactory mentioned above.

    • The SyncedTempFileSystemDirectoryFactory enables Examine to sync indexes between the remote file system and the local environment temporary storage directory, the indexes will be accessed from the temporary storage directory. This setting is needed because Lucene has issues when working from a remote file share so the files need to be read/accessed locally. Any time the index is updated, this setting will ensure that both the locally created indexes and the normal indexes are written to. This will ensure that when the app is restarted or the local environment temp files are cleared out that the index files can be restored from the centrally stored index files.

    circle-info

    If you are load balancing with Azure Web Apps make sure to check out the article we have for that specific set-up.

    hashtag
    Advanced techniques

    Once you are familiar with how flexible load balancing works, you might be interested in some advanced techniques.

    Examine Directory Factory Options
    Umbraco temporary storage locationarrow-up-right
    Save the file and add an editor to the /App_Plugins/yourpackage/package.manifest file:

    Add a new file: /App_Plugins/yourpackage/editor.cshtml - this file will handle rendering the entered data - this path is done by convention so:

    • view: 'editor' => views/partials/grid/editors/editor.cshtml

    • view: '/App_Plugins/path.html' => /App_Plugins/path.cshtml

    If you wish to use something entirely different you can give the editor a separate render value which follow the same conventions.

    hashtag
    Grid editor controller

    If you are building something slightly more complex then a text area, you will need to add a controller to the grid editor view. So first add a ng-controller attribute to the grid editor html - this works like building a property editor:

    To wire up a controller to this view, create the file /App_Plugins/yourpackage/editor.controller.js and add a standard angular controller declaration:

    Finally, we need to tell Umbraco to load this JavaScript controller when the Umbraco application boots. This is like building a property editor. Add your JavaScript (and css dependencies) in the package.manifest file in the /yourpackage folder, and configure it to load your controller file.

    So to summarize, to create a custom grid editor from scratch, you will need to:

    • Create a grid editor view .html file

    • Create a grid render .cshtml file

    • Create a grid editor controller .js file

    • Create a package.manifest to register the editor and make Umbraco load needed files

    This process tries to be as close to building property editors as currently possible.

    hashtag
    Rendering grid editor content

    Next add this c# to the .cshtml file:

    When rendering the .cshtml file will receive a dynamic model with the raw data of the editor:

    So you can now use these value to build your razor output like so:

    Block based Grid editor for Umbraco CMSarrow-up-right
      "Umbraco": {
        "CMS": {
          "HealthChecks" : {
            "DisabledChecks": [
              {
                "Id": "E2048C48-21C5-4BE1-A80B-8062162DF124"
              }
            ]
          },
          {...}
    using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Composing;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Runtime.RuntimeModeValidators;
    
    namespace MySite;
    
    public class DockerChecksRemover : IComposer
    {
        public void Compose(IUmbracoBuilder builder)
            => builder.RuntimeModeValidators().Remove<UseHttpsValidator>();
    }
    
    {
      "iisSettings": {
        "windowsAuthentication": false,
        "anonymousAuthentication": true,
        "iisExpress": {
          "applicationUrl": "http://localhost:40264",
          "sslPort": 44360
        }
      },
      "profiles": {
        "IIS Express": {
          "commandName": "IISExpress",
          "launchBrowser": true,
          "environmentVariables": {
            "ASPNETCORE_ENVIRONMENT": "Development"
          }
        },
        "Umbraco.Web.UI.NetCore": {
          "commandName": "Project",
          "environmentVariables": {
            "ASPNETCORE_ENVIRONMENT": "Development"
          },
          "applicationUrl": "https://localhost:44360;http://localhost:40264"
        }
      }
    }
    {
      "iisSettings": {
        "windowsAuthentication": false,
        "anonymousAuthentication": true,
        "iis": {
          "applicationUrl": "https://testsite.local",
          "sslPort": 0
        },
        "iisExpress": {
          "applicationUrl": "http://localhost:40264",
          "sslPort": 44360
        }
      },
      "profiles": {
        "IIS Express": {
          "commandName": "IISExpress",
          "launchBrowser": true,
          "environmentVariables": {
            "ASPNETCORE_ENVIRONMENT": "Development"
          }
        },
        "IIS": {
          "commandName": "IIS",
          "launchBrowser": true,
          "launchUrl": "https://testsite.local",
          "environmentVariables": {
            "ASPNETCORE_ENVIRONMENT": "Development"
          }
        },
        "Umbraco.Web.UI.NetCore": {
          "commandName": "Project",
          "environmentVariables": {
            "ASPNETCORE_ENVIRONMENT": "Development"
          },
          "applicationUrl": "https://localhost:44360;http://localhost:40264"
        }
      }
    }
    dotnet publish -o ../deployment-artefacts -f net7.0
    <PropertyGroup>
      <AspNetCoreHostingModel>OutOfProcess</AspNetCoreHostingModel>
    </PropertyGroup>
    @using Newtonsoft.Json
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
    	// Get access to ContentService
    	var contentService = Services;
    
    	// Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
    	var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
    	// Get the page using the GUID you've defined
    	var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
    	// Create a variable for the grid value with the 1 one column layout and add a headline
    	var gridValue = new GridValue
    	{
    		Name = "1 column layout",
    		Sections = new List<GridValue.GridSection>
    		{
    			new GridValue.GridSection
    			{
    				Rows = new List<GridValue.GridRow>
    				{
    					new GridValue.GridRow
    					{
    						Name = "Headline",
    						Id = new Guid(),
    						Areas = new List<GridValue.GridArea>
    						{
    							new GridValue.GridArea
    							{
    								Controls = new List<GridValue.GridControl>
    								{
    									new GridValue.GridControl
    									{
    										Editor = new GridValue.GridEditor
    										{
    											Alias = "headline"
    										},
    										Value = "Our Umbraco"
    									}
    								}
    							}
    
    						}
    					}
    				}
    
    			}
    		}
    	};
    
    	// Serialize the grid value
    	var serializedGridValue = JsonConvert.SerializeObject(gridValue);
    
    	// Set the value of the property with alias 'body'
    	content.SetValue("body", serializedGridValue);
    
    	// Save the change
    	contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'body'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.Body).Alias, serializedGridValue);
    }
    en-us.user.xml
    <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" standalone="yes"?>
    <language>
        <area alias="contentTypes">
            <key alias="article">Article page</key>
            <key alias="article-desc">A textual, article-like page on the site. Use this as the main type of content.</key>
            <key alias="landing">Landing page</key>
            <key alias="landing-desc">An inviting, very graphical page. Use this as an entry point for a campaign, and supplement with Articles.</key>
        </area>
        <area alias="tabs">
            <key alias="content">Page content</key>
            <key alias="seo">SEO configuration</key>
        </area>
        <area alias="groups">
            <key alias="titles">Page titles</key>
        </area>
        <area alias="properties">
            <key alias="title">Main title</key>
            <key alias="title-desc">This is the main title of the page.</key>
            <key alias="title-message">The main title is required for this page.</key>
            <key alias="subTitle">Sub title</key>
            <key alias="subTitle-desc">This is the sub title of the page.</key>
        </area>
    </language>
    @{
        // Perform an null-check on the field with alias 'pageTitle'
        if (Model.HasValue("pageTitle")){
            // Print the value of the field with alias 'pageTitle'
            <p>@(Model.Value("pageTitle"))</p>
        }
    }
    @{
        // Perform an null-check on the field with alias 'pageTitle'
        @if (!Model.HasValue(Model.PageTitle))
        {
            // Print the value of the field with alias 'pageTitle'
            <p>@Model.PageTitle</p>
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = new Guid("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'pageTitle'
        content.SetValue("pageTitle", "Umbraco Demo");
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'pageTitle'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.PageTitle).Alias, "Umbraco Demo");
    }
    @{
        int students = Model.HasValue("students") ? Model.Value<int>("students") : 0;
        int teachers = Model.HasValue("teachers") ? Model.Value<int>("teachers") : 0;
        int totalTravellers = students + teachers;
    
        <p>@totalTravellers</p>
    }
    @{
        if(Model.HasValue("students")){
            <p>@(Model.Value<string>("students"))</p>
        }
    }
    @{
        int students = Model.Students;
        int teachers = Model.Teachers;
        int totalTravellers = students + teachers;
    
        <p>@totalTravellers</p>
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = new Guid("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'students'
        content.SetValue("students", 20);
        
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'students'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.Students).Alias, 20);
    }
    @{
        if (Model.HasValue("pageLabel")){
            <p>@(Model.Value("pageLabel"))</p>
        }
    }
    @{
        if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(Model.PageLabel))
        {
            <p>@Model.PageLabel</p>
        }
    }
    @{
        @inject IContentService Services;
        
    	// Get access to ContentService
    	var contentService = Services;
    
    	// Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
    	var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
    	// Get the page using the GUID you've defined
    	var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
    	// Set the value of the property with alias 'pageLabel'. 
    	content.SetValue("pageLabel", "A pre-set string value");
    
    	// Save the change
    	contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @{
        @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'pageLabel'
         content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.MyLabel).Alias, "A Preset string");
    }
    {
        "Umbraco": {
            "CMS": {
                "Examine": {
                    "LuceneDirectoryFactory" : "TempFileSystemDirectoryFactory"
                }
            }
        }
    }
    {
        "Umbraco": {
            "CMS": {
                "Examine": {
                    "LuceneDirectoryFactory" : "TempFileSystemDirectoryFactory"
                }
            }
        }
    }
    {
        "Umbraco": {
            "CMS": {
                "Examine": {
                    "LuceneDirectoryFactory" : "SyncedTempFileSystemDirectoryFactory"
                }
            }
        }
    }
    <textarea rows="1" umb-auto-resize ng-model="control.value" ng-style="control.editor.config"></textarea>
    {
        "gridEditors": [
            {
                "name": "Code",
                "alias": "code",
                "view": "/App_Plugins/yourpackage/editor.html",
                "icon": "icon-code",
                "config": {
                    "color": "red",
                    "text-align": "right"
                }
            }
        ]
    }
    {
        "name": "Code",
        "alias": "code",
        "view": "/App_Plugins/yourpackage/editor.html",
        "render": "/App_Plugins/yourpackage/custom-render.cshtml"
    }
    <div ng-controller="my.custom.grideditorcontroller">
        <textarea>...</textarea>
    </div>
    angular.module("umbraco").controller("my.custom.grideditorcontroller", function ($scope) {
        $scope.control.value = "my new value";
    });
    {
        "gridEditors": [
            {
                "name": "Code",
                "alias": "code",
                "view": "/App_Plugins/yourpackage/editor.html",
                "icon": "icon-code",
                "config": {
                    "color": "red",
                    "text-align": "right"
                }
            }
        ],
        javascript:[
            "/App_Plugins/yourpackage/editor.controller.js"
        ]
    }
    @inherits Umbraco.Web.Mvc.UmbracoViewPage<dynamic>
    <pre>@Model</pre>
    {
        "value": "What ever value entered into the textarea",
        "editor": {
            "name": "Code",
            "alias": "code",
            "view": "/App_Plugins/yourpackage/editor.html",
            "icon": "icon-code",
            "config": {
                    "color": "red",
                    "text-align": "right"
                }
        }
    }
    <div style="color: @Model.config.color">@Model.value</div>
    Choose Umbraco Project (Umbraco HQ) then click Next.
  • Choose or specify the parameters, leave the default or leave them all empty.

  • Click Create.

  • Use CTRL+F5 to run the project and start the Umbraco installer.

  • Learn about configuration in Umbraco CMS
    .NET CLI Templates in Visual Studioarrow-up-right
    Requirements
    Create a new project
    Install Umbraco with .NET CLI
    Getting Started with Umbraco
    Tutorial: Create a website from scratch
    Find different options for hosting your Umbraco website
    The Create a new project dialog in Visual Studio.
    The Configure your new project dialog in Visual Studio.
    The Additional information dialog in Visual Studio.
    Overview of files in the project solution

    Nodes are currently locked/non-deletable

  • Nodes are containers (a List View for example)

  • Data Types
  • Macros

  • Relation Types

  • Log Viewer

  • Languages

  • Content Templates

  • Templates (.cshtml files)

  • Partial views (.cshtml files)

  • Partial View Macro Files (.cshtml files)

  • Stylesheets (.css files)

  • Scripts (.js files)

  • Settings Dashboards
    Custom Sections
    backoffice users
    For uploading and adding files and images to your Umbraco project, we recommend using the Media Picker.

    Find the full documentation for the property in the Media Picker article.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    Data Type Definition Example

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Content Example Empty
    Content Example

    In code, the property is a string, which references the location of the file.

    Example: "/media/o01axaqu/guidelines-on-remote-working.pdf"

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    circle-info

    The samples in this section have not been verified against the latest version of Umbraco.

    Instead, we recommend using the Media Picker for uploading files to your Umbraco website.

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of this property editor you need the Content Service and the Media Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Read more about the login screen.

    hashtag
    Section

    A section in Umbraco is where you do specific tasks related to that section. For example Content, Settings and Users. You can navigate between the different sections of the backoffice by clicking the corresponding icon in the section menu.

    The Section menu is the horizontal menu located on the top of the backoffice.

    Read more about the section menu.

    hashtag
    Tree

    A tree is a hierarchical list of items related (and usually restricted) to a specific concept, like for example content or media.

    You can expand trees by clicking the down arrow to the left of the node or by double-clicking the node.

    Read more about the Tree

    hashtag
    Node

    A node is an item in a tree. Media section items appear as nodes in the Media tree, while pages and content are displayed in the Content tree, and so on.

    hashtag
    Dashboards

    A dashboard is the main view you are presented with when entering a section within the backoffice. It can be used to show valuable information to the users of the system.

    Default dashboard in the content section

    Read more about Dashboards

    hashtag
    Editor

    An editor is what you use to edit different items within the backoffice. There are editors specific to editing stylesheets, there are editors for editing Macros, and so forth.

    hashtag
    Content

    Content is what you find in the Content section. Each item in the tree is called a content node. Each content node in the content tree consists of different fields, and each of them is defined by a Document Type.

    Read more about Content

    hashtag
    Document Type

    Document Types define the types of content nodes that backoffice users can create in the content tree. Each Document Type contains different properties. Each property has a specific Data Type for example text or number.

    hashtag
    Properties

    Every Document Type has properties. These are the fields that the content editor is allowed to edit for the content node.

    hashtag
    Data Type

    Each Document Type property has a Data Type that defines the type of input of that property. Data Types reference a Property Editor and are configured in the Umbraco backoffice in the Settings section. A Data Type can be something basic (text string, number, true/false) or more complex (multi-node tree picker, image cropper, etc).

    Read more about Data Types

    hashtag
    Property Editors

    A property editor is a view used by Data Types to insert content into Umbraco. An example of a property editor is the Textarea. It's possible to have many Textarea Data Types with different settings that all use the Textarea property editor.

    Read more about Property Editors

    hashtag
    Media

    Media items are used to store assets like images and video within the Media section and can be referenced from your content.

    Read more about Media

    hashtag
    Media Types

    Media Types are similar to Document Types in Umbraco, except they are specifically for media items in the Media section.

    Umbraco comes with 3 default Media Types: File, Folder, and Image.

    hashtag
    Members

    A member is someone who has access to signup, register, and login into your public website and is not to be confused with Users.

    Read more about Members

    hashtag
    Member Types

    Similar to a Document Type and a Media Type. You are able to define custom properties to store on a member such as Twitter username or website URL.

    hashtag
    Templates

    A Template is where you define the HTML markup of your website and also where you output the data from your content nodes.

    Read more about Templates

    hashtag
    Packages

    A package is the Umbraco term for an add-on or plugin used to extend the core functionalities in Umbraco. The packages can be found on the Umbraco Marketplacearrow-up-right, and the can also be browsed directly in the backoffice of the Umbraco CMS.

    hashtag
    Macros

    A macro is a reusable piece of functionality that you can reuse throughout your site. Macros can be configured with parameters and used on content nodes that have a Rich Text Editor, a Grid editor, or a Macro Picker property. You can define what macros are available for your editors to use. When an editor inserts a macro it will prompt them to fill out any of the defined parameters for the macro.

    Read more about Macros

    hashtag
    Macro Parameter Editor

    A parameter editor defines the usage of a property editor for use as a parameter for Macros.

    Read more about the Macro Parameter Editor

    hashtag
    Users

    A user is someone who has access to the Umbraco backoffice and is not to be confused with Members. When Umbraco has been installed a user will automatically be generated with the login (email) and password entered during installation. Users can be created, edited, and managed in the User section.

    hashtag
    Content Templates

    Content Templates provide a blueprint for content nodes based on an existing node.

    Login screen
    Login screen
    Since the underlying framework going from Umbraco 8 to the latest version has changed, there is no direct upgrade path. That said, it is possible to re-use the database from your Umbraco 8 project on your new project in order to maintain the content.

    It is not possible to migrate the custom code as the underlying web framework has been updated from ASP.NET to ASP.NET Core. All templates and custom code will need to be reimplemented.

    You also need to make sure that the packages you are using are available on the latest version.

    hashtag
    Prerequisites

    • A Umbraco 8 project running the latest version of Umbraco 8.

    • A backup of your Umbraco 8 project database.

    • A clean installation of the latest version of Umbraco.

    circle-info

    If you use Umbraco Forms, then on the clean installation of Umbraco, you will need to install Umbraco.Forms package as well.

    hashtag
    Video Tutorial

    circle-exclamation

    The video below shows how to complete the upgrade on an Umbraco Cloud project. Most of the process is the same, however, the video does contain some Cloud-specific elements.

    hashtag
    Step 1: Content Migration

    circle-exclamation

    If you use Umbraco Forms, make sure to have StoreUmbracoFormsInDbsetarrow-up-rightto True before step 1.

    1. Create a backup of the database from your Umbraco 8 project (after you have upgraded to the latest version of v8). For this, you can use the database backup guidearrow-up-right.

    2. Import the database backup into SQL Server Management Studio.

    3. Update the connection string in the new projects appsettings.json file so that it connects to the Umbraco 8 database:

    circle-info

    You can also add the connection details if you spin up a clean installation.

    1. Run the new project and login to authorize the upgrade.

    2. Select "Upgrade" when the upgrade wizard appears.

    3. Once the upgrade has been completed, it's recommended to login to the backoffice to verify if your project is upgraded to new version.

    circle-check

    This is only content migration and the database will be migrated.

    You need to manually update the view files and custom code implementation. For more information, see Step 3 of this guide.

    hashtag
    Step 2: File Migration

    1. The following files/folders need to be copied from the Umbraco 8 project into the new project:

      • ~/Views - Do not overwrite the default Macro and Partial View Macro files unless changes have been made to these.

      • ~/Media - Media folder from v8 needs to be copied over into the wwwroot - media folder

      • Any files/folders related to Stylesheets and JavaScript.

    2. Migrate custom configuration from the Umbraco 8 configuration files (.config) into the appsettings.json file on the new project.

      • As of Umbraco version 9, the configuration no longer lives in the Web.Config file and has been replaced by the appsettings.json file. Learn more about this in the article.

    3. , if relevant.

      • As of Umbraco Forms version 9, it is only possible to store Forms data in the database. If Umbraco Forms was used on the Umbraco 8 project, the files need to be migrated to the database.

    4. Run the new project.

      • It will give you an error screen on the frontend as none of the Template files have been updated. Follow Step 3 to resolve the errors.

    hashtag
    Step 3: Custom Code in the latest version

    The latest version of Umbraco is different from Umbraco 8 in many ways. With all the files and data migrated it is now time to rewrite and re-implement all custom code and templates.

    hashtag
    Examples of changes

    One of the changes is how published content is rendered through Template files. Due to this, it will be necessary to update all the Template files (.cshtml) to reflect these changes.

    Read more about these changes in the IPublishedContent section of the Umbraco CMS documentation.

    • Template files need to inherit from Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Views.UmbracoViewPage<ContentModels.HomePage> instead of Umbraco.Web.Mvc.UmbracoViewPage<ContentModels.HomePage>

    • Template files need to use ContentModels = Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.PublishedModels instead of ContentModels = Umbraco.Web.PublishedModels

    circle-info

    For more information on the correct namespaces or custom code, you can find the references in the API Documentation article.

    Depending on the extent of the project and the amount of custom code and implementations, this step is going to require a lot of work.

    Once the new project runs without errors on a local setup it is time to deploy the website to production.

    This concludes this tutorial. Find related information and further reading in the section below.

    hashtag
    Related Information

    • Issue tracker for known issues with Content Migrationarrow-up-right

    • Configuration in modern Umbraco

    • Configuration in legacy Umbracoarrow-up-right

    database migrationsarrow-up-right
    Upgrading to Major
    In order to get a clean instance of Umbraco, follow our installation guide for how to Install an Umbraco project template.

    hashtag
    Configure your database

    As you will not be running through the installation wizard when using this feature, you need to manually tell Umbraco which database to use.

    • Set up and configure a new database - see Requirements for details.

    • Add the connection string using configuration.

    circle-info

    Umbraco can create an SQL Server database for you during the unattended install process. The user specified by the credentials in your connection string needs to have the CREATE DATABASE permission granted and the global setting InstallMissingDatabase is set to true.

    If your connection string is for SQLite or SQL Server Express LocalDB it is assumed that a database should be created when missing. This is regardless of the value of the InstallMissingDatabase setting.

    hashtag
    SQL Server Example in appsettings.json

    circle-info

    The 'umbracoDbDSN_ProviderName' attribute sets the .NET Framework data provider name for the DataSource control's connection. For more information on the data providers included in the .Net Framework, see the Microsoft Documentationarrow-up-right.

    hashtag
    SQLite Example in appsettings.json

    A value is configured for the keyumbracoDbDSN_ProviderName to ensure usage of the Microsoft.Data.SQLite ADO.NET provider.

    It is recommended that you make use of the values shown below for the Cache, Foreign Keys and Pooling keywords on your connection string.

    hashtag
    Enable the unattended installs feature

    The unattended installs feature is disabled by default. In order to enable it, you need to add the following JSON object to a JSON configuration source.

    Remember to set the value of InstallUnattended to true.

    Alternatively you may set your configuration with Environment Variables or other means. Learn more about this in the Microsoft .Net Core config documentationarrow-up-right.

    The keys for this would then be as follows:

    hashtag
    Initialize the unattended install

    After completing the steps above you can now initialize the installation by booting up the Umbraco instance.

    Once it has completed, you should see the following when visiting the frontend of the site.

    hashtag
    Configuration options

    Depending on your preferences, you can use any type of configuration to specify the connection string and login information, as well as enable unattended install. With the extending configuration functionality, it is possible to read from all kinds of sources. One example can be using a JSON file or environment variables.

    Program.cs has a condition, which if met, an appsettings.Local.json file will be added and configured as a configuration source.

    Having intellisense will help you to add your connection string and information needed for the unattended install.

    hashtag
    More support

    We have added support for unattended installs with Name, Email and Password, and Connection String as CLI params, which are also available in Visual Studio. There you can fill in your information as follows:

    hashtag
    CLI

    hashtag
    Visual Studio

    Data Type Definition Example
    Related Links Data Type Definition

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Media Picker Content

    hashtag
    MVC View Example - value converters enabled

    hashtag
    Typed

    If Max number of items is configured to 1

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Enable list view

    If enabled, editors will be able to see multiple children from a list on a content node that has children. When not enabled, no list will be shown and all children will be shown in the Content Tree.

    Enable List view example

    hashtag
    Settings

    List view settings example
    List view settings example 2

    hashtag
    Page Size

    Defines how many child content nodes you want to see per page. This will limit how many content items you will see in your list. If you set it to 5, then only 5 content items will be shown in the list.

    hashtag
    Order By

    Will sort your list by the selection you choose in the dropdown. By default it selects "Last edited" and you get the following three columns:

    • Last edited - When the content node was last edited and saved.

    • Name - Name of the content node(s).

    • Created by - This is the user who the content node was created by.

    You can add more sorting to this list by adding more datatypes to the columns in the "Columns Displayed" section.

    hashtag
    Order Direction

    You can select order of the content nodes displayed, "Acsending" or "Descending". The order is affected by the "Order By" selection.

    hashtag
    Columns Displayed

    It is possible to add more columns to the list, via adding the properties through the dropdown. These properties are based on the Data Types which are used by the Document Type. It will show up in the dropdown by its alias and not the name on the property.

    List view property example
    List view property example

    Once you have selected a column that you want to display, the next thing you want to do is define what its name should be and what kind of value it should display. You can also move the headers around, re-ordering how the headers should look. This is done by the move icon on the left side of the alias.

    The template section is where you define what kind of value you want to display. The value of the column is in the value variable.

    hashtag
    Layouts

    The list view comes with two layouts by default. A list and a grid view. These views can be disabled if you are not interested in any of them.

    circle-info

    A minimum of one layout needs to be enabled for the list view to work.

    You can also make your own layout and add it to the settings. For example, if you wanted to change the width or length of the grid, you will be able to do so.

    hashtag
    Bulk Action Permissions

    Select what kind of action is available on the list view.

    • Allow bulk publish - content only

    • Allow bulk unpublish - content only

    • Allow bulk copy - content only

    • Allow bulk move

    • Allow bulk delete

    hashtag
    Content app icon

    Changes the icon in the backoffice of the listview. By default it will look like the image below.

    List icon example

    hashtag
    Content app name

    You can change the name of the listview itself. Default if empty: 'Child Items'.

    hashtag
    Show Content App First

    Enable this to show the content app by default instead of the list view

    hashtag
    Content Example

    hashtag
    Generic field value

    This example uses a generic field on a child item and displays it in the list.

    The {{ value }} will take the value of the Email property and display it in the list, as shown on the image below.

    List view content example email

    hashtag
    Member name

    First, a Member Picker property needs to be present on the content item. In this example, the child item has gotten a Member Picker Data Type with the alias of isAuthor.

    List view member picker

    Now that the child item has a member and the value that should be displayed is the name of the picked value, the next step is to reconfigure the template value in the listview setting.

    List view member picker

    This will take the value picked up by the member picker.

    And display it in the listview. Shown in the example below:

    hashtag
    Other examples

    List view other examples
    List view other examples
    List view example
    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example
    Slider Data Type Definition

    hashtag
    Content Example

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    hashtag
    With a range off

    hashtag
    With a range on

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Data Type Definition Example
    Repeatable textstrings Data Type Definition

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Repeatable textstrings Content

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    circle-info

    To add multiple values to the repeatable text strings property editor you have to put each value on a new line. This can be achieved using either \r\n\ or Environment.NewLine.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example
    Color Picker Data Type Definition

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Color Picker Content

    hashtag
    Example with Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Example without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Settings

    hashtag
    Enable multiple choice

    If enabled, editors will be able to select multiple values from the dropdown otherwise only a single value can be selected.

    hashtag
    Prevalues

    Prevalues are the options which are shown in the dropdown list. You can add, edit, or remove values here.

    circle-info

    You can use dictionary items to translate the values of a Dropdown property editor in a multilingual setup. For more details, see the Creating a Multilingual Site article.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    Dropdown Data Type Definition

    hashtag
    Content Example

    hashtag
    Single Value

    Single dropdown content example

    hashtag
    Multiple Values

    Multiple dropdown content example

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Single item - without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Multiple items - without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Single item - with Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Multiple items - with Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    and download Visual Studio Code for free.
  • Once installed, launch Visual Studio Code.

  • Click the extensions menu at the bottom on the left side. Then search for C# and install it.

    Visual Studio Code install extension
  • hashtag
    Creating your Umbraco project

    Follow the Templates Guide to create your project folder.

    hashtag
    Configure Visual Studio Code to run the Umbraco project

    Open your project folder in Visual Studio Code, your project will look something like this:

    Fresh Umbraco installation

    Now we need to tell Visual Studio Code how to run your project.

    Open the command palette, you can use the shortcut Ctrl+Shift+P, and type in Tasks: Configure and select the Tasks: Configure Task option:

    Configure task option

    Select "Create task.json from template"

    Create task from template

    Now select ".NET Core" as your template.

    Create .NET Core Template

    Visual Studio Code creates a folder called .vscode that contains a file called tasks.json. The tasks.json file tells Visual Studio Code how to build your project.

    Now that we've told Visual Studio Code how to build your project, we need to tell it how to launch it. Visual Studio Code can do this for you. First, select the little play button in the left side menu, and then select the "create a launch.json file" link.

    Creating launch.json file

    This will prompt a menu to appear, select .NET 5+ and .NET Core:

    Prompt Menu
    circle-info

    If .NET 5+ and .NET Core is missing in the drop-down menu:

    1. Press Ctrl + Shift + P (on Windows/Linux) or Cmd + Shift + P (on macOS) to open the Command Palette.

    2. Search for the command .NET: Generate Assets for Build and Debug. This command will generate the necessary assets for building and debugging your .NET application.

    Now you'll see a green play button appear with a dropdown where ".NET Core Launch (web)" is selected.

    Green Play button options

    If you navigate to the Files section, a new launch.json file is created in the .vscode folder. When you press F5, the launch.json file tells Visual Studio Code to build your project, run it, and then open a browser .

    With that, you're ready to run the project! Press F5, or click the little green play button in the Run and Debug section to run your brand new Umbraco site locally.

    hashtag
    Umbraco Web Installer

    This section covers the installation and configuration of Umbraco inside your web browser when you run Umbraco for the first time.

    You will see the install screen where you will need to fill in some data before Umbraco can be installed.

    Web Installer - Lets Get Started

    When the installer is done, you will be logged into the backoffice.

    Congratulations, you have installed an Umbraco site!

    circle-info

    You can log into your Umbraco site by entering the following into your browser: http://yoursite.com/umbraco/.

    https://code.visualstudio.com/arrow-up-right
    Data Type Definition Example
    Content Picker Data Type Definition

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Content Picker Content

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    UDI
    Allow at root
    .
  • Ensure that the Folder media type allows the new media types as children.

  • hashtag
    Data Types

    hashtag
    UploadArticle

    The UploadArticle Data Type has the following configuration:

    • Property editor: FileUpload

    • Accepted file extensions: pdf, docx, doc

    hashtag
    UploadAudio

    The UploadAudio Data Type has the following configuration:

    • Property editor: FileUpload

    • Accepted file extensions: mp3, weba, oga, opus

    hashtag
    UploadVectorGraphics

    The UploadVectorGraphics Data Type has the following configuration:

    • Property editor: FileUpload

    • Accepted file extensions: svg

    hashtag
    UploadVideo

    The UploadVideo Data Type has the following configuration:

    • Property editor: FileUpload

    • Accepted file extensions: mp4, webm, ogv

    hashtag
    Media Types

    hashtag
    UmbracoMediaArticle

    The UmbracoMediaArticle media type has the following properties:

    • umbracoFile - Upload File

    • umbracoExtension - Label (string)

    • umbracoBytes - Label (bigint)

    MediaArticle

    hashtag
    UmbracoMediaAudio

    The UmbracoMediaAudio media type has the following properties:

    • umbracoFile Upload Audio

    • umbracoExtension Label (string)

    • umbracoBytes Label (bigint)

    MediaAudio

    hashtag
    UmbracoMediaVectorGraphics

    The UmbracoMediaVectorGraphics media type has the following properties:

    • umbracoFile - Upload Vector Graphics

    • umbracoExtension Label (string)

    • umbracoBytes Label (bigint)

    MediaVectorGraphics

    hashtag
    UmbracoMediaVideo

    The UmbracoMediaVideo media type has the following properties:

    • umbracoFile - Upload Video

    • umbracoExtension - Label (string)

    • umbracoBytes - Label (bigint)

    MediaVideo
    circle-info

    You can also create localization files for Media Types. You can read more about this in the Document Type Localization article.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    True/Checkbox List Definition
    circle-info

    You can use dictionary items to translate the values of a Checkbox List property editor in a multilingual setup. For more details, see the Creating a Multilingual Site article.

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Checkbox List Example

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    .NET SDKarrow-up-right
    Umbraco.Templatesarrow-up-right
    Kestrel serverarrow-up-right

    Minor upgrades for Umbraco 7

    This article provides details on how to upgrade to the next minor version when using Umbraco 7.

    Sometimes there are exceptions to these guidelines, which are listed in the version-specific guide.

    hashtag
    Note

    It is necessary to run the upgrade installer on each environment of your Umbraco site. If you want to update your staging and live site then you need to repeat the steps below and make sure that you click through the install screens to complete the upgrade.

    hashtag
    Contents

    In this article you will find instructions for 2 different ways of upgrading:

    hashtag
    Upgrade using NuGet

    1. Open up the Package Console and type: Update-Package UmbracoCms

    2. Choose "No to All" by pressing the "L" when prompted.

    Alternatively, you can use the Visual Studio NuGet Package Manager to upgrade:

    1. Open the NuGet Package Manager and select the Updates pane to get a list of available updates.

    2. Choose the package called UmbracoCms and select update.

    The upgrade will run through all the files and make sure you have the latest changes while leaving the files you have updated.

    hashtag
    Upgrades to versions lower than 7.2.0

    If you're not upgrading to 7.2.0 or higher then you should follow these extra instructions. If you are upgrading to 7.2.0+ then you can skip this and go to .

    You will be asked to overwrite your web.config file and the files in /config, make sure to answer No to those questions.

    For some inexplicable reason, the installation will fail if you click "No to All" (in the GUI) or answer "L" (in the package manager console) to the question: "File 'Web.config' already exists in project 'MySite'. Do you want to overwrite it?" So make sure to only answer "No" (in the GUI) or "N" (in the package manager console).

    We will overwrite the web.config file. We'll back it up so don't worry. You can find the backup in App_Data\NuGetBackup\20140320-165450\. The 20140320-165450 bit is the date and time when the backup occurred, which varies. You can then merge your config files and make sure they're up to date.

    hashtag
    Upgrade manually from a zip file

    Download the .zip file for the new version you are upgrading to from

    Copy the following folders from inside the .zip file over the existing folders in your site:

    • /bin

    • /Umbraco

    • /Umbraco_Client

    circle-info

    There are hosting providers (we know of one: RackSpace Cloud) that require proper casing of file and folder names. Generally, on Windows, this is not a problem. Is your hosting provider forcing proper casing? You'll then need to verify that folders and files are named in the same casing as the version you're upgrading to.

    hashtag
    Merge configuration files

    You can expect some changes to the following configuration files:

    • Any file in the /Config folder

    • The /Global.asax file

    • The web.config

    Use a tool like to check changes between all of the config files. Depending on when you last did this there may have been updates to a few of them.

    There's also the possibility that files in the /Config folder are new or have been removed(we note this in the release notes). WinMerge (and other diff tools) is able to compare folders as well so you can spot these differences.

    Up until version 6.0.0 it was necessary to change the version number in ClientDependency.config. This was to clear the cached HTML/CSS/JS files in the backoffice. Change the current version number to one that's higher than that. Make sure not to skip this step as you might get strange behavior in the backoffice otherwise.

    hashtag
    Merge UI.xml and language

    Some packages (like Contour and Umbraco Forms) add dialogs to the UI.xml. Make sure to merge those changes back in from your backup during the upgrade so that the packages continue to work. This file can be found in: /Umbraco/Config/Create/UI.xml.

    Packages like Contour, Umbraco Forms, and Courier also make changes to the language files located in: /Umbraco/Config/Lang/*.xml (typically en.xml).

    hashtag
    Finalize

    After copying the files and making the config changes, you can open your site. You should see the installer which will guide you through the upgrade.

    The installer will do two things:

    • Update the version number in the web.config

    • Upgrade your database in case there are any changes

    We are aware that, currently, the installer is asking you for the database details of a blank database while upgrading. In the near future this will be pre-filled with your existing details and the wording will be updated. So no need to be scared. Enter the details of your existing database and Umbraco will upgrade it to the latest version when necessary.

    hashtag
    Post installation

    One important recommendation is to always remove the install folder immediately after upgrading Umbraco and never to upload it to a live server.

    hashtag
    Potential issues and gotchas

    hashtag
    Browser cache

    Google Chrome has notoriously aggressive caching. If something doesn't seem to work well in the backoffice, make sure to clear cache and cookies thoroughly (for other browsers as well). Normally the browser cache problem is automatically handled in an Umbraco upgrade by modifying the config/ClientDependency.config version number. If you wish to re-force this update you can increment this version number. This will ensure that any server-side cache of JavaScript and stylesheets gets cleared as well.

    One way to nudge the cache in Chrome is to open the developer tools (F12) and go to the settings (the cog icon). There will be a checkbox that says "Disable cache (while DevTools is open)". Once this checkbox is on you can refresh the page and the cache should be invalidated. To force it even more, the "reload" button next to your address bar now has extra options when you right-click it. It should have "Normal reload", "Hard reload" and "Empty cache and hard reload" now. The last option is the most thorough and you might want to try that.

    Load Balancing Azure Web Apps

    Ensure you read the Load Balancing overview and general Azure Web Apps documentation before you begin - you will need to ensure that your ASP.NET Core & logging configurations are correct.

    hashtag
    Azure Requirements

    • 2 x App service plans with 1 x web app in each:

      • One for the backoffice (Administrative) environment

      • One for your scalable public-facing environment (Public)

    • 1 x SQL server that is shared with these 2 web apps

    The setup above will allow for the proper scaling of the Administrative and Public web apps.

    The App Service plan with the Administrative web app should only be scaled up. The reason for this is that the web app needs to stay as a single instance.

    The App Service plan with the Public web app can be scaled both out and up.

    hashtag
    Lucene/Examine configuration

    The single instance Backoffice Administrative Web App should be set to use .

    The multi-instance Scalable Public Web App should be set to use .

    hashtag
    Umbraco TEMP files

    When an instance of Umbraco starts up it generates some 'temporary' files on disk. In a normal IIS environment, these would be created within the folders of the Web Application. In an Azure Web App, we want these to be created in the local storage of the actual server that Azure happens to be used for the Web App. So we set this configuration setting to 'true' and the temporary files will be located in the environment temporary folder. This is required for both the performance of the website as well as to prevent file locks from occurring due to the nature of Azure Web Apps shared files system.

    hashtag
    Host synchronization

    Umbraco runs within a .

    When a host restarts, the current host 'winds down' while another host is started. This means there can be more than one live host during a restart. Restarts can occur in many scenarios including when an Azure Web App auto-transitions between hosts, you scale the instances or you utilize slot swapping.

    Some file system based services in Umbraco such as the Published Cache and Lucene files can only be accessed by a single host at once. Umbraco manages this synchronization by an object called IMainDom.

    By default Umbraco v9.4 & 9.5 uses a system-wide semaphore locking mechanism. This mechanism only works on Windows systems and doesn't work with multi-instance Azure Web Apps. We need to swap it out for an alternative file system based locking mechanism by using the following appSetting. With Umbraco v10+ FileSystemMainDomLock is the default setting.

    Apply this setting to both the SCHEDULINGPUBLISHER Administrative server and the SUBSCRIBER scalable public-facing servers.

    hashtag
    Steps to set-up an environment

    1. Create an Azure SQL database

    2. Install Umbraco on your backoffice administrative environment and ensure to use your Azure SQL Database

    3. Install Umbraco on your scalable public-facing environment and ensure to use your Azure SQL Database

    circle-info

    Ensure all Azure resources are in the same region to avoid connection lag.

    hashtag
    Scaling

    Do not scale your backoffice administrative environment this is not supported and can cause issues.

    The public-facing subscriber Azure Web Apps can be manually or automatically scaled up or down and is supported by Umbraco's load balancing.

    hashtag
    Deployment considerations

    Since you have 2 x web apps, when you deploy you will need to deploy to both places - There are various automation techniques you can use to simplify the process. That is outside the scope of this article.

    circle-info

    This also means that you should not be editing templates or views on a live server as SchedulingPublisher and Subscriber environments do not share the same file system. Changes should be made in a development environment and then pushed to each live environment.

    Blocks in Rich Text Editor

    It is possible to insert Blocks into the markup of the Rich Text Editor (RTE). Once you've defined the Block Type as part of the RTE Data Type and enabled the Blocks Toolbar Option. Then Blocks can be created directly inside the Rich Text Editor.

    hashtag
    Configure Blocks

    The Block List property editor is configured in the same way as any standard property editor, via the Data Types admin interface.

    To set up your Block List Editor property, create a new Data Type and select Block List from the list of available property editors.

    Then you will see the configuration options for a Block List as shown below.

    The Data Type editor allows you to configure the following properties:

    • Available Blocks - Here you will define the Block Types to be available for use in the property. Read more on how to set up Block Types below.

    • Blocks Live editing mode - Enabling this will make editing of a Block happen directly to the Rich Text Editor, making changes appear as you type.

    hashtag
    Setup Block Types

    Block Types are Element Types that need to be created before you can start configuring them as Block Types. This can be done either directly from the property editor setup process, or you can set them up beforehand. If they are set beforehand then they need to be added to the Rich Text Editor afterward.

    Once you add an Element Type as a Block Type on your Rich Text Editor Data Type you will have options to configure it further.

    Each Block has a set of properties that are optional to configure. They are described below.

    hashtag
    Editor Appearance

    By configuring the properties in the group you can customize the user experience for your content editors when they work with the blocks in the Content section.

    • Label - Define a label for the appearance of the Block in the editor. The label can use AngularJS template string syntax to display values of properties.

    • Display Inline with text - When turned on the Block Element will be able to stay in line with text or other elements. If not the Block will stay on its own line.

    • Custom view - Overwrite the AngularJS view for the block presentation in the Content editor. Use this to make a more visual presentation of the block or even make your own editing experience by adding your own AngularJS controller to the view.

    hashtag
    Data Models

    It is possible to use two separate Element Types for your Block Types. It's required to have one for Content and optional to add one for Settings.

    • Content model - This presents the Element Type used as a model for the content section of this Block. This cannot be changed, but you can open the Element Type to perform edits or view the properties available. Useful when writing your Label.

    • Settings model - Add a Settings section to your Block based on a given Element Type. When picked you can open the Element Type or choose to remove the settings section again.

    hashtag
    Catalogue appearance

    These properties refer to how the Block is presented in the Block catalog when editors choose which Blocks to use for their content.

    • Background color - Define a background color to be displayed beneath the icon or thumbnail. Eg. #424242.

    • Icon Color - Change the color of the Element Type icon. Eg. #242424.

    The thumbnails for the catalog are presented in the format of 16:10, and we recommend a resolution of 400px width and 250px height.

    hashtag
    Advanced

    These properties are relevant when you work with custom views.

    • Force hide content editor - If you made a custom view that enables you to edit the content part of a block and you are using default editing mode (not inline) you might want to hide the content editor from the block editor overlay.

    hashtag
    Rendering Blocks

    To render Blocks in the frontend, you must create Partial Views for each Block.

    The Partial Views must be:

    • Named by the alias of the Element Type that is being used as the Content Model for the Block.

    • Placed in the folder Views/Partials/RichText/Components/.

    For example, if the Element Type alias of the Content Model is myBlockType, a Partial View must be created at Views/Partials/RichText/Components/MyBlockType.cshtml.

    The Partial View will receive the model of Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Blocks.RichTextBlockItem. This gives you the option to access properties of the Content and Settings Models of your Block, as illustrated in the following sample:

    If you use ModelsBuilder, you can specify the Content Model (and optionally the Settings Model) in the Partial View model. This allows for type-safe access to the Block data.

    The following example shows a Partial View of a Block with MyBlockType as Content Model and MyBlockSettingsType as Settings Model:

    hashtag
    Build a Custom Backoffice View

    Building Custom Views for Block representations in Backoffice is the same for all Block Editors.

    Members

    Members are used for registering and authentication external / frontend users of an Umbraco installation. This could be Forum members and Intranet members.

    Members are used for registering and authenticating external users of an Umbraco installation (ie. forum members, intranet users and so forth).

    This guide will explain how to define and create members in the backoffice. If you want to work with members using the service APIs, links can be found at the end of the document.

    There is a default Member Type that can be used to create members. You can customize this to fit your needs or create your own Member Type from scratch.

    hashtag
    Creating a Member

    Go to the Members section, right-click Members in the member tree, click Create and choose Member.

    Members have a number of mandatory properties that need to be filled in before a member can be saved. The properties are Login, Email, and the two Password fields in the Member tab.

    There are also a number of default properties in the Member tab which are stored in the database in the tables Member andTwoFactorLogin:

    • umbracoMemberFailedPasswordAttempts

    • umbracoMemberApproved

    • umbracoMemberLockedOut

    Once the Member is created and saved you can access it by expanding the Members tree and clicking All Members to get a list view. You can also view members of a specific type by selecting the member type in the Members tree.

    hashtag

    Sensitive properties on a members data will not be displayed to backoffice users unless they have appropriate permissions. In order to see the values of the default properties in the Member tab you need to have the Sensitive data User Group. By having this group added to a user they will also have the option to mark member type properties as sensitive.

    More information can be found under .

    hashtag
    Creating a Member Type

    You can create your own Member Types and add tabs, groups and properties as you would with Document Types.

    Go to the Settings section, right-click Member Types and select Create. You will now be taken to the Member Type editor that is used to define and edit the Member Type. Name the new Member Type and click Save.

    Once created, the Member Type will have no properties, so you have the freedom to add your own properties or compositions.

    hashtag
    Assigning a Member Composition

    When creating a Member Type you can assign compositions. Compositions allow you to inherit tabs and properties from existing member types instead of creating them from scratch.

    For example on the member type that you have created, click on Composition. Then you can choose the existing Member type which then you will inherit its tabs, groups, and properties.

    The default Member type has a Membership group which includes umbracoMemberComments property along with the other default properties. The other properties can be seen only in the Member tab when creating a member.

    It is possible to add more groups and more properties to each of the Member Types you create, as well as the default Member Type.

    hashtag
    Creating Member Groups

    Member Groups define roles for your members that can be used for role-based protection. A member can be in multiple groups.

    To create a new Member Group click the menu icon next to the Member Groups node in the Members section. Choose Create, name the group, and save the group.

    hashtag
    Assigning a Member Group

    To assign a member to a specific group find the member you wish to assign and find the Properties group. Here you can see which groups the member is already part of. You can also add the member to more groups or remove the member from already assigned groups:

    hashtag
    Technical

    As a developer you are able to leverage your website when you build on the Members section of Umbraco. The member's section is by default in the Umbraco backoffice, but you can still use it to implement some work on your front end. Members are created using ASP.NET Core Identity, so there are some provider settings that can be set in appsettings.json - here are the defaults:

    You can find out more about the services methods in the reference section of the documentation by following the links below.

    hashtag
    References

    • Video:

    • Video:

    • Video:

    hashtag
    Related Services

    Media Picker (Legacy)

    circle-info

    We highly recommend that you use the Media Picker instead.

    This updated property contains more customizable features, and we recommend using this over the Media Picker, which is also marked as the old version of the picker.

    Alias: Umbraco.MediaPicker

    Returns: IEnumerable<IPublishedContent> or IPublishedContent

    This property editors returns a single item if the "Pick multiple items" Data Type setting is disabled or a collection if it is enabled.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    hashtag
    Ignore user start nodes

    Use Settings to overrule user permissions, to enable any user of this property to pick any Media Item of the choosen Start node.

    When this setting is enabled, a user who doesn't normally have access to the media selected as "Start Node" (/Design in this case), can access the media when using this particular Media Picker. If no Start node has been defined for this property any content can be viewed and selected of this property.

    hashtag
    Content Example

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Multiple enabled without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Multiple enabled with Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Multiple disabled without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Multiple disabled with Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the .

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Language Variants

    Learn how to use language variants to output your content in multiple languages.

    Language Variants allows you to vary content by culture, so you can allow a content node to exist in multiple languages.

    This article will cover the different aspects of enabling and working with language variants on your Umbraco website.

    hashtag
    Contents

    hashtag
    Video tutorial

    hashtag
    How to enable Language Variants

    To work with Language Variants you need to have more than one language enabled. This can be done from the Settings section:

    circle-info

    You will always have one default language but each language can be set to mandatory.

    hashtag
    Enabling Language Variants on Document Types

    Now that there are two languages to vary the content with, it needs to be enabled on the Document Types. To do so:

    1. Go to the Document Type in the Settings section.

    2. Open the Permissions page.

    3. Toggle Allow vary by culture.

    To allow a property on the Document Type to be varied it will have to be enabled for the property:

    hashtag
    Working with Language Variants on content

    When you return to your content node you will notice two things:

    1. At the top of the Content tree there will now be a dropdown so you can show the Content tree in the language of your choice.

    2. To the right of the content name there is now a dropdown where you can select a language. You can also open a split view so you can see two languages at once.

    Each Property Editor that does not allow variants (an Invariant Property) will by default need to be unlocked in order to be edited. The lock exists to make it clear that this change will affect more languages. Since the value of the invariant properties are shared between all variants on the website.

    circle-info

    Whether or not the lock is enabled on the invariant properties depends on the AllowEditInvariantFromNonDefault setting in the appsettings.json file.

    Learn more about the AllowEditInvariantFromNonDefault setting in the article.

    To read about how you render variant content in Templates, check out the .

    hashtag
    Test your language variants

    Culture and hostnames must be added to your language sites before the content can be tested for variants:

    1. Right-click the Home node and select Culture and hostnames....

    2. Add a specific URL per language and save. For eg: An English language variant with English (United States) as the language can be given a specific URL https://yourwebsite.com/en-us and a Danish language variant can be given a specific URL https://yourwebsite.com/dk.

    The Info content app should now show specific URLs for your language variants.

    hashtag
    Control User Group permissions on language variants

    circle-info

    This feature is available from Umbraco version 10.2.

    When you are working with a multilingual site you might want to control who can edit the different variations of the content on the website.

    This can be controlled on a User Group level. All default User Groups, except the Sensitive data group, have access to all languages out of the box.

    When "Allow access to all languages" is not checked, languages can be added and/or removed. This is to determine which variants the users in the user group have access to.

    circle-info

    Even though the language permissions have been set, a user will still be able to view and browse all the language variations. The permission setting will ensure that only the added languages are editable by users of the User Group.

    hashtag
    Related Links

    Content Templates

    In this article you can learn about how to create and use Content Templates in Umbraco.

    Content Templates allows a content editor to create a blueprint for new content nodes based on an existing node.

    hashtag
    Create - Method 1

    circle-exclamation

    Before following this method you should have some created beforehand.

    Select a Content node from the Content menu:

    Right-click the Content node and select the Create Content Template option. Alternatively, select the Actions dropdown of the content node and select the Create Content Template option:

    Give your content template a Name:

    Click the Create button and if the creation was successful, you will see a success notification:

    The new content template will be created in Content Templates node of the Settings tree:

    circle-info

    Refresh your browser, if you do not see the new content template in the Content Templates folder.

    hashtag
    Create - Method 2

    Click on the Settings menu:

    Right-click on the Content Templates tree and select the Create menu item:

    Select the Document Type you want to create a content template for:

    circle-exclamation

    You can create content templates only from Document Types or Document Types with Templates

    Give your content template a Name and click the Save button:

    The new content template will be created in Content Templates folder of the Settings tree:

    hashtag
    Edit

    To edit an existing content template, select a content template from the Content Templates folder of the Settings tree. When you have finished editing click the Save button:

    hashtag
    Use

    Once you have created a content template, you can use the template to create new content nodes. To use a content template, right-click the Content tree and select Create:

    When you click on a Document Type that has a content template you will see two options:

    • Create a new node based on a content template

    • Create a blank one

    Rich Text Editor

    Alias: Umbraco.TinyMCE

    Returns: HTML

    The Rich Text Editor (RTE) is based on tinymcearrow-up-right and is highly configurable. Depending on the configuration, it will give your content editors more flexibility when working with content that should be more than only plain text.

    circle-info

    Are you using custom configuration or plugins with TinyMCE?

    In Umbraco 11 the TinyMCE version supported has been upgraded from version 4 to version 6. You need to migrate to the latest version if you are using TinyMCE plugins or custom configuration.

    If your site is upgraded from an older version, follow the migration guides below to upgrade the TinyMCE version as well.

    hashtag

    Customize everything from toolbar options to editor size to where pasted images are saved.

    hashtag

    Use CSS to define specific editor styles and add them as formatting options of the Rich Text Editor.

    hashtag

    Use Blocks to define specific parts which can be added as part of the markup of the Rich Text Editor.

    hashtag

    Extend the functionality of the Rich Text Editor with plugins.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    hashtag
    Content Example

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the .

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Default Data Types

    Learn about the default data types in Umbraco.

    Here's a list of the default Data Types that come installed with Umbraco. There are plenty more that you can create based on the installed Property Editors.

    Umbraco 9 Data Type List

    hashtag
    Approved Color

    Adds a list of approved colors. The approved colors are added as hex values by using the color picker. Optionally, you can enable labels to give the colors different names.

    hashtag
    Checkbox List

    Displays a list of preset values as a list of checkbox controls. The preset values are modified in the Settings section under Data Types in Checkbox List where new items can be added. The value saved is a comma-separated string of prevalue IDs.

    hashtag
    Content Picker

    The Content Picker opens a modal to pick a specific page from the content structure. The value saved is the selected page's ID.

    hashtag
    Date Picker

    Displays a calendar UI for selecting date and time. The value saved is a standard DateTime value but does not contain time information.

    hashtag
    Date Picker with time

    Displays a calendar UI for selecting date and time. The value saved is a standard DateTime value.

    hashtag
    Dropdown

    Displays a list of preset values as a list where only a single value can be selected. The default Data Type does not contain any prevalues. The value saved is the selected value as a string.

    hashtag
    Dropdown multiple

    Displays a list of preset values as a list where multiple values can be selected. The default Data Type does not contain any prevlaues. The value saved is a comma separated string of prevalue IDs.

    hashtag
    Image Cropper

    Allows to upload and crop images by using a focal point. Specific crop definitions can also be added. This Data Type is used by default on the Image Media Type.

    hashtag
    Image Media Picker

    The Image Media Picker opens a modal to pick images from the Media tree or images from your Computer. The value saved is the selected media node UDI.

    hashtag
    Label

    Is a non-editable control and can be used to only display the value. It can also be used in the Media section to load in values related to the node, such as width, height and file size.

    There are six Label Data Types:

    • Label (bigint) - Allows to save a big integer value for a Label.

    • Label (datetime) - Allows to set a DateTime value for a Label.

    • Label (decimal) - Allows to set a decimal value for a Label.

    hashtag
    List View - Content

    This Data Type is used by Document Types that are set to display as list views.

    hashtag
    List View - Media

    This Data Type is used by Media Types that are set to display as list views.

    hashtag
    List View - Members

    This Data Type is used by Member Types that are set to display as list views.

    hashtag
    Media Picker

    The picker opens a modal to pick a specific media item from the Media tree. The value saved is the selected media node UDI.

    hashtag
    Member Picker

    Displays a dropdown with all the available members. A single member can be selected. The value saved is the ID of the member.

    hashtag
    Multi URL Picker

    This Data Type allows an editor to add an array of links. These can either be internal Umbraco pages external URLs or links to media in the Media section. The Data Type can be configured by limited number of links it is possible to add.

    hashtag
    Multiple Image Media Picker

    The picker opens a modal to pick multiple images from the Media tree. The value saved is a comma separated string of media node UDIs.

    hashtag
    Multiple Media Picker

    The picker opens a modal to pick multiple media items from the Media tree. The value saved is a comma separated string of media node UDIs.

    hashtag
    Numeric

    A textbox to input a numeric value.

    hashtag
    Radiobox

    This Data type enables editors to choose from a list of radiobuttons.

    hashtag
    Richtext Editor

    The TinyMCE based WYSIWYG editor. This is the standard editor used to edit larger amount of text. The editor has a lot of settings, which can be changed on the Richtext editor Data Type in the Settings section.

    In the default settings some tags such as bullet list can be used. If you want to use other tags like h1 or h2, you need to add stylesheets.

    Create Rich Text Editor stylesheets for each tag(h1 or h2) and select them when configuring the Rich Text Editor Data Type. Learn more about how to configure this Data Type in the .

    The "Style select" options need to be enabled in the toolbar section.

    An example of the stylesheet tree is as follows:

    hashtag
    Tags

    A textbox that allows you to use multiple tags on a Document Type. You can specify a Tag Group for the Data Type, if you need to use Tags on different sections of your site.

    hashtag
    Textarea

    A textarea provides a multi-line plain-text editing control. You can set the maximum allowed characters for the textarea and the number of rows, if any.

    hashtag
    Textstring

    A normal HTML input text field.

    hashtag
    True/False

    A checkbox which saves either 0 or 1, depending on the checkbox being checked or not. A common use is to create a property with the 'umbracoNaviHide' alias and the Data Type True/False. This will provide editors with the option to hide nodes in the navigation menu on the website.

    hashtag
    Upload

    Adds an upload field, which allows documents or images to be uploaded to Umbraco. This does not add them to the media library, they are added to the document data.

    There are five Upload Data Types:

    • Upload Article - Used for uploading and storing documents.

    • Upload Audio - Used for uploading and storing digital audio files.

    • Upload File - Used for uploading and storing different types of files in the Media section

    Tags

    Alias: Umbraco.Tags

    Returns: IEnumerable<string>

    The Tags property editor allows you to add multiple tags to a node.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    hashtag
    Tag group

    The Tag group setting provides a way to categorize your tags in groups. So for each category you will create a new instance of the Tags property editor and setup the unique category name for each instance. Whenever a tag is added to an instance of the tags property editor it's added to the tag group, which means it will appear in the Typeahead list when you start to add another tag. Only tags that belong to the specified group will be listed. If you have a "Frontend" group and a "Backend" group the tags from the "Frontend" group will only be listed if you're adding a tag to the Tags property editor configured with the "Frontend" group name and vice versa.

    hashtag
    Storage type

    Data can be saved in either Comma-Separated Values (CSV) format or in JSON format. By default data is saved in JSON format. The difference between using CSV and JSON is that with JSON you can save a tag, which includes comma separated values.

    There are built-in property value converters, which means you don't need to worry about writing them yourself or parse the JSON output when choosing "JSON" in the storage type field. Therefore on this page will work out of the box without further ado.

    hashtag
    Content Examples

    hashtag
    CSV tags

    hashtag
    JSON tags

    hashtag
    Tags typeahead

    Whenever a tag has been added it will be visible in the typeahead when you start typing on other pages.

    hashtag
    MVC View Example - displays a list of tags

    hashtag
    Multiple items - with Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Multiple items - without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Setting Tags Programmatically

    You can use the ContentService to create and update Umbraco content from c# code, when setting tags there is an extension method (SetTagsValue) on IContentBase that helps you set the value for a Tags property. Remember to add the using statement for Umbraco.Core.Models to take advantage of it.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled, you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    hashtag
    More on working with Tags

    More on working with Tags (query all of them) can be found at the

    Running Umbraco On Azure Web Apps

    This section describes best practices with running Umbraco on Azure Web Apps

    hashtag
    What are Azure Web Apps

    They have been called a few names in the past, many people still know Azure Web Apps as Azure Web Sites.

    App Service is a fully Managed Platform for professional developers that brings a rich set of capabilities to web, mobile and integration scenarios. Quickly create and deploy mission critical web Apps that scale with your business by using Azure App Service.

    Umbraco will run on Azure Web Apps but there are some configuration options and specific Azure Web Apps environment limitations to be aware of.

    hashtag
    Recommended configuration

    You need to add these configuration values. E.g in a json configuration source like appSettings.json:

    You can also copy the following JSON directly into your Azure Web App configuration via the Advanced Edit feature.

    Remember to add an ASPNETCORE_ENVIRONMENT variable with values Development, Staging, or Production.

    The minimum recommended Azure SQL Tier is "S2", however noticeable performance improvements are seen in higher Tiers

    If you are load balancing or require the scaling ("scale out") ability of Azure Web Apps then you need to consult the . This is due to the fact that a lot more needs to be configured to support scaling/auto-scaling.

    hashtag
    Storage

    It is important to know that Azure Web Apps uses a remote file share to host the files to run your website. This is due to the files running your website do not exist on the machine running your website. In many cases this isn't an issue. It can become one if you have a large amount of IO operations running over remote file-share.

    hashtag
    Issues with read-only filesystems

    Although Umbraco can be configured to use environmental storage it still requires its working-directory to be writable. If Umbraco is deployed to a read-only file system it will .

    For example, Azure's is not supported by Umbraco. To check if your web app is using this feature you can check the WEBSITE_RUN_FROM_PACKAGE environment variable.

    hashtag
    Scaling

    If you require the scaling ("scale out") ability of Azure Web Apps you need to consult the . This is due to the fact that a lot more needs to be configured to support scaling/auto-scaling.

    hashtag
    Web worker migrations

    It's important to know that Azure Web Apps may move your website between their 'workers' at any given time. This is normally a transparent operation. In some cases you may be affected by it if any of your code or libraries use the following variables:

    • Environment.MachineName (or equivalent)

    When your site is migrated to another worker, these variables will change. You cannot rely on these variables remaining static for the lifetime of your website.

    hashtag
    How to find the Linux App Service Logs

    The quickest way to get to your logs is using the following URL template and replacing {app} with your Web App name:

    https://{app}.scm.azurewebsites.net/api/logstream

    You can also find this in the KUDU console by clicking Advanced Tools > Log Stream on the Web App in the Azure Portal.

    hashtag
    Web App secret management

    Consult the if you would like to directly reference Azure Key Vault Secrets to your Azure Web App.

    Rich Text Editor Plugins

    Information on how to work with TinyMCE plugins in the rich text editor.

    circle-exclamation

    The global configuration of TinyMCE will be removed in Umbraco 14 in order to support more rich text editors in the future. Instead, a new extension type called “tinyMcePlugin” will be added.

    hashtag
    Overview

    Rich Text Editor Configuration

    hashtag
    Configuration

    In this article you can learn about the various ways you can configure the RTE.

    hashtag

    Advanced Techniques With Flexible Load Balancing

    This describes some more advanced techniques that you could achieve with flexible load balancing

    The election process that runs during the startup of an Umbraco instance determines the server role that instance will undertake.

    There are two server roles to be aware of for flexible load balancing:

    • SchedulingPublisher - The Umbraco instance usually used for backoffice access, responsible for running scheduled tasks.

    Markdown Editor

    Alias: Umbraco.MarkdownEditor

    Returns: System.Web.HtmlString

    This built-in editor allow the user to use the markdown formatting options, from within a tinyMCE-like interface.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    User Picker

    Alias: Umbraco.UserPicker

    Returns: IPublishedContent

    The user picker opens a panel to pick a specific user from the Users section. The value saved is of type IPublishedContent.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    Installation

    Instructions on installing Umbraco on various platforms using various tools.

    hashtag
    Install Umbraco using CLI

    The fastest way to get the latest version of Umbraco up and running is using the command line (CLI).

    1. Open your command line.

    @using System.IO;
    @{
        if (Model.HasValue("myFile"))
        {
            var myFile = Model.Value<string>("myFile");
    
            <a href="@myFile">@System.IO.Path.GetFileName(myFile)</a>
        }
    
    }
    @if (!Model.HasValue(Model.MyFile))
    {
       <a href="@Model.MyFile">@System.IO.Path.GetFileName(Model.MyFile)</a>
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.IO
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Serialization
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Strings
    @inject MediaFileManager _mediaFileManager;
    @inject IShortStringHelper _shortStringHelper;
    @inject IContentTypeBaseServiceProvider _contentTypeBaseServiceProvider;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @inject IJsonSerializer _serializer;
    @inject MediaUrlGeneratorCollection _mediaUrlGeneratorCollection;
    
    @{
       // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Get access to MediaService 
        var mediaService = MediaService;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the parent where you want to add a child item
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Create a variable for the file you want to upload, in this case the Our Umbraco logo
        var imageUrl = "https://our.umbraco.com/assets/images/logo.svg";
    
        // Create a request to get the file
        var request = WebRequest.Create(imageUrl);
        var webResponse = request.GetResponse();
        var responseStream = webResponse.GetResponseStream();
    
        // Get the file name 
        var lastIndex = imageUrl.LastIndexOf("/", StringComparison.Ordinal) + 1;
        var filename = imageUrl.Substring(lastIndex, imageUrl.Length - lastIndex);
    
        // Create a media file
        var media = mediaService.CreateMediaWithIdentity("myImage", -1, "File");
        media.SetValue(_mediaFileManager, _mediaUrlGeneratorCollection, _shortStringHelper, _contentTypeBaseServiceProvider, Constants.Conventions.Media.File, filename, responseStream);
        // Save the created media 
        mediaService.Save(media);
    
        // Get the published version of the media (IPublishedContent)
        var publishedMedia = Umbraco.Media(media.Id);
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'myFile' 
        content.SetValue("myFile", publishedMedia.Url());
    
        // Save the child item
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'myFile'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.MyFile).Alias, publishedMedia.Url();
    }
    "ConnectionStrings": {
        "umbracoDbDSN": "Server=YourLocalSQLServerHere;Database=NameOfYourDatabaseHere;User Id=NameOfYourUserHere;Password=YourPasswordHere;TrustServerCertificate=True"
    }
    {
      "ConnectionStrings": {
        "umbracoDbDSN": "server=localhost;database=UmbracoUnicore;user id=sa;password='P@ssw0rd'",
        "umbracoDbDSN_ProviderName": "System.Data.SqlClient"
      }
    }
    {
      "ConnectionStrings": {
        "umbracoDbDSN": "Data Source=|DataDirectory|/Umbraco.sqlite.db;Cache=Shared;Foreign Keys=True;Pooling=True",
        "umbracoDbDSN_ProviderName": "Microsoft.Data.SQLite"
      }
    }
    {
      "Umbraco": {
        "CMS": {
          "Unattended": {
            "InstallUnattended": true,
            "UnattendedUserName": "FRIENDLY_NAME",
            "UnattendedUserEmail": "EMAIL",
            "UnattendedUserPassword": "PASSWORD"
          }
        }
      }
    }
    Umbraco__CMS__Unattended__InstallUnattended
    Umbraco__CMS__Unattended__UnattendedUserName
    Umbraco__CMS__Unattended__UnattendedUserEmail
    Umbraco__CMS__Unattended__UnattendedUserPassword
    #if DEBUG
      .ConfigureAppConfiguration(config
        => config.AddJsonFile(
          "appsettings.Local.json",
          optional: true,
          reloadOnChange: true))
    #endif
    {
        "ConnectionStrings": {
            "umbracoDbDSN": "server=localhost;database=UmbracoUnicore;user id=sa;password='P@ssw0rd'"
        },
        "Umbraco": {
            "CMS": {
                "Unattended": {
                    "InstallUnattended": true,
                    "UnattendedUserName": "FRIENDLY_NAME",
                    "UnattendedUserEmail": "EMAIL",
                    "UnattendedUserPassword": "PASSWORD"
                }
            }
        }
    }
    dotnet new umbraco -n MyNewProject --friendly-name "Friendly User" --email [email protected] --password password1234 --connection-string "Server=(localdb)\Umbraco;Database=MyDatabase;Integrated Security=true" --version 10.0.0
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models
    @{
        var links = Model.Value<IEnumerable<Link>>("footerLinks");
        if (links.Any())
        {
            <ul>
                @foreach (var link in links)
                {
                    <li><a href="@link.Url" target="@link.Target">@link.Name</a></li>
                }
            </ul>
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models
    @{
        var link = Model.Value<Link>("link");
        if (link != null)
        {
            <a href="@link.Url" target="@link.Target">@link.Name</a>
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @using Newtonsoft.Json;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Get the media you want to assign to the footer links property 
        var media = Umbraco.Media("bca8d5fa-de0a-4f2b-9520-02118d8329a8");
    
        // Create an Udi of the media
        var mediaUdi = Udi.Create(Constants.UdiEntityType.Media, media.Key);
    
        // Get the content you want to assign to the footer links property 
        var contentPage = Umbraco.Content("665d7368-e43e-4a83-b1d4-43853860dc45");
    
        // Create an Udi of the Content
        var contentPageUdi = Udi.Create(Constants.UdiEntityType.Document, contentPage.Key);
    
        // Create a list with different link types
        var externalLink = new List<Link>
        {
            // External Link
            new Link
            {
                Target = "_blank",
                Name = "Our Umbraco",
                Url = "https://our.umbraco.com/",
                Type = LinkType.External
            },
            // Media 
            new Link
            {
                Target = "_self",
                Name = media.Name,
                Url = media.MediaUrl(),
                Type = LinkType.Media,
                Udi = mediaUdi
            }, 
            // Content 
            new Link
            {
                Target = "_self",
                Name = contentPage.Name,
                Url = contentPage.Url(),
                Type = LinkType.Content,
                Udi = contentPageUdi
            }
        };
    
        // Serialize the list with links to JSON
        var links = JsonConvert.SerializeObject(externalLink);
    
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'footerLinks'. 
        content.SetValue("footerLinks", links);
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'footerLinks'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.FooterLinks).Alias, links);
    }
    @if (Model.HasValue("singleValueSlider"))
    {
        var value = Model.Value<decimal>("singleValueSlider");
        <p>@value</p>
    }
    
    @if (Model.HasValue("multiValueSlider"))
    {
        var value = Model.Value<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Range<decimal>>("multiValueSlider");
        <p>@(value.Minimum) and @(value.Maximum)</p>
    }
    // with a range off
    @if (Model.SingleValueSlider != null)
    {
        var value = Model.SingleValueSlider;
        <p>@value</p>
    }
    
    // with a range on
    @if (Model.MultiValueSlider != null)
    {
        var minValue = Model.MultiValueSlider.Minimum;
        var maxValue = Model.MultiValueSlider.Maximum;
        <p>@minValue and @maxValue</p>
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'singleValueSlider'. 
        content.SetValue("singleValueSlider", 10);
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Create a variable for the desired value of the 'multiValueSlider' property
        var range = new Range<decimal> {Minimum = 10, Maximum = 12};
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'multiValueSlider'. 
        content.SetValue("multiValueSlider", range);
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'singleValueSlider'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.SingleValueSlider).Alias, 10);
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'multiValueSlider'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.MultiValueSlider).Alias, new Range<decimal> {Minimum = 10, Maximum = 12});
    }
    @{
        if (Model.Value<string[]>("keyFeatureList").Length > 0)
        {
            <ul>
                @foreach (var item in Model.Value<string[]>("keyFeatureList"))
                {
                    <li>@item</li>
                }
            </ul>
        }
    }
    @{
        if (Model.KeyFeatureList.Any())
        {
            <ul>
                @foreach (var item in Model.KeyFeatureList)
                {
                    <li>@item</li>
                }
            </ul>
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = new Guid("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'keyFeatureList'
        content.SetValue("keyFeatureList", "Awesome" + Environment.NewLine + "Super");
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'keyFeatureList'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.KeyFeatureList).Alias, "Awesome" + Environment.NewLine + "Super");
    }
    @{
         // Model has a property called "Color" which holds a Color Picker editor
        var hexColor = Model.Color;
        // Define the label if you've included it
        String colorLabel = Model.Color.Label;
    
        if (hexColor != null)
        {
            <div style="background-color: #@hexColor">@colorLabel</div>
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PropertyEditors.ValueConverters
    @{
        // Model has a property called "Color" which holds a Color Picker editor
        var hexColor = Model.Value("Color");
        // Define the label if you've included it
        var colorLabel = Model.Value<ColorPickerValueConverter.PickedColor>("Color").Label;
    
        if (hexColor != null)
        {
            <div style="background-color: #@hexColor">@colorLabel</div>
        }
    }
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'color'. 
        // The value set here, needs to be one of the prevalues on the Color Picker
        content.SetValue("color", "38761d");
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'color'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.Color).Alias, "38761d");
    }
    @if (Model.HasValue("category"))
    {
        <p>@(Model.Value<string>("category"))</p>
    }
    @if (Model.HasValue("categories"))
    {
        var categories = Model.Value<IEnumerable<string>>("categories");
        <ul>
            @foreach (var category in categories)
            {
                <li>@category</li>
            }
        </ul>
    }
    @if (!Model.HasValue(Model.Category))
    {
       <p>@Model.Category</p>
    }
    @if (Model.Categories.Any())
    {
        <ul>
            @foreach (var category in Model.Categories)
            {
                <li>@category</li>
            }
        </ul>
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @using Newtonsoft.Json
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'categories'. 
        content.SetValue("categories", JsonConvert.SerializeObject(new[] { "News" }));
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'categories'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.Categories).Alias, JsonConvert.SerializeObject(new[] { "News" }));
    }
    @{
        IPublishedContent typedContentPicker = Model.Value<IPublishedContent>("featurePicker");
        if (typedContentPicker != null)
        {
            <p>@typedContentPicker.Name</p>
        }
    }
    @{
        IPublishedContent typedContentPicker = Model.FeaturePicker;
        if (typedContentPicker != null)
        {
            <p>@typedContentPicker.Name</p>
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Get the page you want to assign to the content picker 
        var page = Umbraco.Content("665d7368-e43e-4a83-b1d4-43853860dc45");
        
        // Create an Udi of the page
        var udi = Udi.Create(Constants.UdiEntityType.Document, page.Key);
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'featurePicker'. 
        content.SetValue("featurePicker", udi.ToString());
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core;
    
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'featurePicker'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.FeaturePicker).Alias, udi.ToString());
    }
    @{
        if (Model.HasValue("superHeros"))
        {
            <ul>
                @foreach (var item in Model.Value<IEnumerable<string>>("superHeros"))
                {
                    <li>@item</li>
                }
            </ul>
        }
    }
    @{
        if (Model.SuperHeros.Any())
        {
            <ul>
                @foreach (var item in Model.SuperHeros)
                {
                    <li>@item</li>
                }
            </ul>
        }
    }
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @using Newtonsoft.Json
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'superHeros'.
        content.SetValue("superHeros", JsonConvert.SerializeObject(new[] { "Umbraco", "CodeGarden"}));
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234);
    }
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @{
    
    // Set the value of the property with alias 'superHeros'
    content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor,x => x.SuperHeros).Alias, JsonConvert.SerializeObject(new[] { "Umbraco", "CodeGarden"}));
    }
    Templates                    Short Name               Language          Tags
    ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Umbraco Project              umbraco                  [C#]              Web/CMS/Umbraco
    Umbraco Package              umbracopackage           [C#]              Web/CMS/Umbraco/Package/Plugin
    Umbraco Project (C#)
    Author: Umbraco HQ
    Description: An empty Umbraco project ready to get started.
    Options:
      -v|--version                       The version of Umbraco.Cms to add as PackageReference.
                                         string - Optional
                                         Default: 10.0.0
    
      --use-https-redirect               Adds code to Program.cs to redirect HTTP to HTTPS and enables the UseHttps setting.
                                         bool - Optional
                                         Default: false
    
      --no-restore                       If specified, skips the automatic restore of the project on create.
                                         bool - Optional
                                         Default: false
    
      --exclude-gitignore                Whether to exclude .gitignore from the generated template.
                                         bool - Optional
                                         Default: false
    
      --minimal-gitignore                Whether to only include minimal (Umbraco specific) rules in the .gitignore.
                                         bool - Optional
                                         Default: false
    
      --connection-string                Database connection string used by Umbraco.
                                         string - Optional
    
      --connection-string-provider-name  Database connection string provider name used by Umbraco.
                                         string - Optional
                                         Default: Microsoft.Data.SqlClient
    
      --development-database-type        Database type used by Umbraco for development.
                                             None       - Do not configure a database for development.
                                             SQLite     - Use embedded SQLite database.
                                             LocalDB    - Use embedded LocalDB database (requires SQL Server Express with Advanced Services).
                                         Default: None
    
      --friendly-name                    Used to specify the name of the default admin user when using unattended install on development (stored as plain text).
                                         string - Optional
    
      --email                            Used to specify the email of the default admin user when using unattended install on development (stored as plain text).
                                         string - Optional
    
      --password                         Used to specify the password of the default admin user when using unattended install on development (stored as plain text).
                                         string - Optional
    
      --no-nodes-view-path               Path to a custom view presented with the Umbraco installation contains no published content.
                                         string - Optional
    
      -p|--PackageTestSiteName           The name of the package project this should be a test site for.
                                         string - Optional
    List view content example email
    List view member picker
    List view member picker
    If there are any specific configuration changes required for the version you are upgrading to then they will be noted in the
    .
    file in the root of your site
    (Important: make sure to copy back the version number, and the connection string as they were.)
  • In rare cases, the web.config file in the Views folder

  • Upgrade using NuGet
    Upgrade manually from a Zip file
    Merge UI.xml and language
    https://our.umbraco.com/downloadarrow-up-right
    WinMergearrow-up-right
    File conflict dialog with a web.config file in conflict
    File conflict console message with multiple files in conflict
    version-specific guide
    Video Tutorial
    Document Types in Umbraco: Defining Properties, Data Types and Property Editors
    Test: Perform some content updates on the administrative environment, ensure they work successfully in that environment, then verify that those changes appear on the scalable public-facing environment
  • Fix the backoffice environment to be the SCHEDULINGPUBLISHER scheduling server and the scalable public-facing environment to be SUBSCRIBERs - see Setting Explicit Server Roles

  • SyncedTempFileSystemDirectoryFactory
    TempFileSystemDirectoryFactory
    .NET Hostarrow-up-right
    Loadbalancing infrastructure on Azure web apps
  • Custom stylesheet - Pick your own stylesheet to be used for this block in the Content editor. By adding a stylesheet the styling of this block will become scoped. Meaning that backoffice styles are no longer present for the view of this block.

  • Overlay editor size - Set the size for the Content editor overlay for editing this block.

  • Thumbnail - Pick an image or Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) file to replace the icon of this Block in the catalog.
    Examples and more details about labels and AngularJS templates.
    Read about building a Custom View for Blocks here
    Rich Text Editor - Data Type Block Fields
    Rich Text Editor - Data Type Block Configuration
  • umbracoTwoFactorLogin

  • umbracoMemberLastLockoutDate

  • umbracoMemberLastLogin

  • umbracoMemberLastPasswordChangeDate

  • Sensitive data
    security
    Adding a memberarrow-up-right
    Member Type Propertiesarrow-up-right
    Role-Based Protectionarrow-up-right
    MemberService
    MemberType Service
    MemberGroup Service
    Member Type Editor
    Composition Member Type
    Creating a Member Group
    Assigning a Member Group
    Content Service
    Media Picker Data Type Definition
    Media Picker Content
    Migrate from version 4 to version 5arrow-up-right
    Migrate from version 5 to version 6arrow-up-right
    Migrate from version 6 to version 7arrow-up-right
    Configuration options
    Styles
    Blocks
    Plugins
    Content Service
    Rich Text Editor - Data Type
    Rich Text Editor - Content
    Label (integer) - Allows to set an integer value for a Label.
  • Label (string) - Allows to set a long string value for a Label.

  • Label (time) - Allows to set time for a Label

  • Upload Vector Graphics - Used for uploading and storing Scalable Vector Graphics (svg) files which are text files containing source code to draw the desired image.

  • Upload Video - Used for uploading and storing video files.

  • Rich Text Editor articles
    the last code example
    UmbracoHelper reference page
    Data Type Definition Example
    CSV tags example
    JSON tags example
    Tags typeahead example

    Subscriber - A scalable instance that subscribes to content updates from the SchedulingPublisher server, not recommended to be used for backoffice access.

    circle-info

    These new terms replace 'Master and Replica', in Umbraco versions 7 and 8.

    hashtag
    Explicit SchedulingPublisher server

    It is recommended to configure an explicit SchedulingPublisher server since this reduces the amount of complexity that the election process performs.

    The first thing to do is create a couple of small classes that implement IServerRoleAccessor one for each of the different server roles:

    then you'll need to replace the default IServerRoleAccessor for the your custom registrars. You'll can do this by using the SetServerRegistrar() extension method on IUmbracoBuilder from a Composer.

    Now that your subscriber servers are using your custom SubscriberServerRoleAccessor class, they will always be deemed 'Subscriber' servers and will not attempt to run the automatic server role election process or task scheduling.

    By setting your SchedulingPublisher server to use your custom SchedulingPublisherServerRoleAccessor class, it will always be deemed the 'SchedulingPublisher' and will always be the one that executes all task scheduling.

    hashtag
    Subscriber servers - Read-only database access

    circle-info

    This description pertains only to Umbraco database tables

    In some cases infrastructure admins will not want their front-end servers to have write access to the database. By default front-end servers will require write full access to the following tables:

    • umbracoServer

    • umbracoNode

    This is because by default each server will inform the database that they are active and more importantly it is used for task scheduling. Only a single server can execute task scheduling and these tables are used for servers to use a server role election process without the need for any configuration. So in the case that a subscriber server becomes the SchedulingPublisher task scheduler, it will require write access to all of the Umbraco tables.

    In order to have read-only database access configured for your front-end servers, you need to implement the Explicit SchedulingPublisher server configuration mentioned above.

    Now that your subscriber servers are using your custom SubscriberServerRoleAccessor class, they will always be deemed 'Subscriber' servers and will not attempt to run the automatic server role election process or task scheduling. Because you are no longer using the default ElectedServerRoleAccessor they will not try to ping the umbracoServer table.

    circle-info

    If using SqlMainDomLock on Azure WebApps then write-permissions are required for the following tables for all server roles including 'Subscriber'.

    • umbracoLock

    • umbracoKeyValue

    SQL Server Replica databases cannot be used as they are read-only without replacing the default MainDomLock with a custom provider.

    hashtag
    Controlling how often the load balancing instructions from the database are processed and pruned

    The configurations can be adjusted to control how often the load balancing instructions from the database are processed and pruned.

    Below is shown how to do this from a JSON configuration source.

    Options:

    • TimeToRetainInstructions - The timespan to keep instructions in the database; records older than this number will be pruned.

    • MaxProcessingInstructionCount - The maximum number of instructions that can be processed at startup; otherwise the server cold-boots (rebuilds its caches)

    • TimeBetweenSyncOperations - The timespan to wait between each sync operations

    • TimeBetweenPruneOperations - The timespan to wait between each prune operation

    These setting would normally be applied to all environments as they are added to the global app settings. If you need these settings to be environment specific, we recommend using environment specific appSetting files.

    Install the Umbraco templates:

    circle-info

    Replace 13.* with the specific version you want to install.

    Example:

    1. Create a new project:

    1. Navigate to the newly created project folder. It will be the folder containing the .csproj file:

    1. Build and run the newly created Umbraco site:

    1. The console will output a message similar to: [10:57:39 INF] Now listening on: https://localhost:44388

    2. Open your browser and navigate to that URL.

    3. Follow the instructions to finish up the installation of Umbraco.

    circle-info

    Members of the Umbraco Community have created a website that makes the installation of Umbraco a lot easier for you. You can find the website at https://psw.codeshare.co.ukarrow-up-right. On the website, you can configure your options to generate the required script to run. Click on the Install Script tab to get the commands you need to paste into the terminal. This tab also includes the commands for adding a starter kit or unattended install which creates the database for you.

    hashtag
    Alternative Methods for Installing Umbraco

    There are numerous ways to install Umbraco. Below, you can find links to different installation methods that will help you easily install and set up Umbraco projects.

    hashtag
    .NET CLI installation

    .NET CLI, included with the .NET Software Development Kit (SDK), can be used to install or uninstall .NET templates from NuGet. This can be done by using the dotnet new command on any OS. The underlying Template Engine enables the creation of custom templates which make new project bootstrapping much faster. With a few steps you can have an Umbraco project running without the need for a code editor.

    hashtag
    Visual Studio installation

    Visual Studio is used to write native code and managed code supported by .NET and many others. Its built-in tools provide the ability to develop and execute applications for any platform. Developers will be able to install Umbraco without ever having to leave Visual Studio.

    hashtag
    Run Umbraco on IIS

    Learn how to run an already installed local installation of Umbraco.

    hashtag
    VS Code installation

    Visual Studio Code is an editor with an embedded webserver (through the IIS Express extension). A fast way to get you up and running with Umbraco.

    hashtag
    Installing Nightly Builds

    From Umbraco v9 and above you can use the Nightly Builds to get the latest version to use and test before it is released. Learn how to install the Nightly builds to get started.

    hashtag
    Running Umbraco on Linux/macOS

    Since Umbraco 9 it has been possible to run Umbraco CMS natively on Linux or macOS High Sierra. To get Umbraco running you will need to follow some steps.

    hashtag
    Install Umbraco unattended

    Use the Unattended installs when spinning up Umbraco instances on something like Azure Web Apps to avoid having to run through the installation wizard.

    {
        "Umbraco": {
            "CMS": {
                "Hosting": {
                    "LocalTempStorageLocation" : "EnvironmentTemp"
                }
            }
        }
    }
    {
        "Umbraco": {
            "CMS": {
                "Global": {
                    "MainDomLock" : "FileSystemMainDomLock"
                }
            }
        }
    }
    @inherits Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Views.UmbracoViewPage<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Blocks.RichTextBlockItem>
    
    @* Output the 'heading' field from the Content Model using the `backgroundColor` field from the Settings Model as background color *@
    <h1 style="background-color:@Model.Settings.Value("backgroundColor")">@Model.Content.Value("heading")</h1>
    @inherits Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Views.UmbracoViewPage<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Blocks.RichTextBlockItem<MyBlockType, MyBlockSettingsType>>
    @using ContentModels = Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.PublishedModels;
    
    @* Output the Heading of field with alias 'heading' from the 'MyBlockType' Content Model *@
    <h1 style="background-color:@Model.Settings.BackgroundColor">@Model.Content.Heading</h1>
    {
      "$schema": "appsettings-schema.json",  
      "Umbraco": {
        "CMS": {      
          "Security": {
            "AllowPasswordReset": true,
            "AuthCookieDomain": "(No default, but takes a string)",
            "AuthCookieName": "UMB_UCONTEXT",
            "KeepUserLoggedIn": false,
            "UsernameIsEmail": true,
            "HideDisabledUsersInBackoffice": false,
            "AllowedUserNameCharacters": "abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789-._@+\\",
            "MemberPassword": {
              "RequiredLength": 10,
              "RequireNonLetterOrDigit": false,
              "RequireDigit": false,
              "RequireLowercase": false,
              "RequireUppercase": false,
              "MaxFailedAccessAttemptsBeforeLockout": 5,
              "HashAlgorithmType": "HMACSHA256"
            }
          }
        }
      }
    }
    @{
        var typedMultiMediaPicker = Model.Value<IEnumerable<IPublishedContent>>("sliders");
        foreach (var item in typedMultiMediaPicker)
        {
            <img src="@item.Url()" style="width:200px"/>
        }
    }
    @{
        var typedMultiMediaPicker = Model.Sliders;
        foreach (var item in typedMultiMediaPicker)
        {
            <img src="@item.Url()" style="width:200px" />
        }
    }
    @{
        var typedMediaPickerSingle = Model.Value<IPublishedContent>("featuredBanner");
        if (typedMediaPickerSingle != null)
        {
            <p>@typedMediaPickerSingle.Url()</p>
            <img src="@typedMediaPickerSingle.Url()" style="width:200px" alt="@typedMediaPickerSingle.Value("alt")" />
        }
    }
    @{
        var typedMediaPickerSingle = Model.FeaturedBanner;
        if (typedMediaPickerSingle is Image image)
        {
            <p>@image.Url()</p>
            <img src="@image.Url()" style="width:200px"/>
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Get the media you want to assign to the media picker 
        var media = Umbraco.Media("bca8d5fa-de0a-4f2b-9520-02118d8329a8");
    
        // Create an Udi of the media
        var udi = Udi.Create(Constants.UdiEntityType.Media, media.Key);
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'featuredBanner'. 
        content.SetValue("featuredBanner", udi.ToString());
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'featuredBanner'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.FeaturedBanner).Alias, udi.ToString());
    }
    @{
        if (Model.HasValue("richText")){
            <p>@(Model.Value("richText"))</p>
        }
    }
    @{
        if (!string.IsNullOrEmpty(Model.RichText.ToString()))
        {
            <p>@Model.RichText</p>
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Create a variable for the desired value
        var htmlValue = new HtmlString("Add some text <strong>here</strong>");
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'richText'.
        content.SetValue("richText", htmlValue);
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234);
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'richText'
            content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.RichText).Alias, "Add some text <strong>here</strong>");
    }
    Stylesheets
    -IE7
    -IE8
    -Style
    -RichEdit
    --h1
    --h2
    @if(Model.Tags.Any()){
        <ul>
            @foreach(var tag in Model.Tags){
                <li>@tag</li>
            }
        </ul>
    }
    @if(Model.HasValue("tags"))
    {
     var tags = Model.Value<IEnumerable<string>>("tags");
        <ul>
            @foreach(var tag in tags)
            {
                <li>@tag</li>
            }
        </ul>
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @using Newtonsoft.Json
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("9daf8585-6ab6-4ac2-98f0-28bf83aeea6e");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'tags'. 
        content.SetValue("tags", JsonConvert.SerializeObject(new[] { "News", "Umbraco", "Example", "Setting Tags", "Helper" }));
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'tags'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.Tags).Alias, JsonConvert.SerializeObject(new[] {  "News", "Umbraco", "Example", "Setting Tags" }));
    }
    public class SchedulingPublisherServerRoleAccessor : IServerRoleAccessor
    {
        public ServerRole CurrentServerRole => ServerRole.SchedulingPublisher;
    }
    
    public class SubscriberServerRoleAccessor : IServerRoleAccessor
    {
        public ServerRole CurrentServerRole => ServerRole.Subscriber;
    }
    // This should be executed on your single `SchedulingPublisher` server
    builder.SetServerRegistrar<SchedulingPublisherServerRoleAccessor>();
    
    // This should be executed on your `Subscriber` servers
    builder.SetServerRegistrar<SubscriberServerRoleAccessor>();
    {
        "Umbraco": {
            "CMS": {
                "Global": {
                    "DatabaseServerMessenger": {
                        "MaxProcessingInstructionCount": 1000,
                        "TimeBetweenPruneOperations": "00:01:00",
                        "TimeBetweenSyncOperations": "00:00:05",
                        "TimeToRetainInstructions": "2.00:00:00"
                    }
                }
            }
        }
    }
    dotnet new install Umbraco.Templates::13.8.1
    dotnet new install Umbraco.Templates::13.*
    dotnet new umbraco --name MyProject
    cd MyProject
    dotnet run
    The Rich Text Editor (RTE) in Umbraco is based on the open source editor TinyMCEarrow-up-right. TinyMCE is a highly customizable editor, and it is possible to extend the functionality of the editor by adding plugins.

    TinyMCE comes with a lot of plugins out of the box, but it is also possible to create your own plugins. This article will show you how to add a custom plugin to the rich text editor.

    hashtag
    Open-Source Plugins

    TinyMCE has a lot of open-source plugins available. You can find a list of these plugins on the TinyMCE websitearrow-up-right.

    hashtag
    Premium Plugins

    TinyMCE also has a number of premium pluginsarrow-up-right available. These plugins are only available for paid TinyMCE subscriptionsarrow-up-right.

    hashtag
    Adding a Plugin

    To enable plugins in the rich text editor, you need to add it to the Plugins array in the configuration of the rich text editor.

    The example above shows how to add the open-source Word Count Pluginarrow-up-right to the rich text editor. The plugin is added to the Plugins array in the configuration. The plugin itself will be shown in the statusbar of the rich text editor, so the statusbar option is also added to the CustomConfig object.

    hashtag
    Adding a premium plugin

    To add a premium plugin, you need to add the plugin name to the Plugins array in the configuration of the rich text editor. You also need to add the "CloudApiKey" to the configuration.

    We have enabled the powerpaste plugin, and configured it to allow local images. It will prompt when pasting Word documents, but for HTML documents it will clean the HTML without prompting.

    See all the available premium pluginsarrow-up-right.

    circle-info

    You can go to TinyMCE Cloudarrow-up-right and sign up for a free trial. You will get a Cloud API key that you can use to try out the premium plugins.

    hashtag
    Creating a Custom Plugin

    If you want to create your own plugin, you should in general follow the TinyMCE documentationarrow-up-right. However, there are a few things you need to be aware of to load the plugin in Umbraco. See the example below.

    hashtag
    Examples

    Load a custom plugin that gives you the ability to interact with the global tinymce editor object.

    Here we are loading a custom plugin called myrteplugin and adding a button to the editor called myrtebutton. When the button is clicked, it will insert the text Hello World! into the editor.

    The text "Hello World!" shows up after clicking the button

    The button must be added to the toolbar in the rich text editor configuration.

    Enable the button in the rich text editor configuration

    You can go to any Document Type that uses the rich text editor and click the button to insert the text Hello World! after.

    hashtag
    Learn more

    • TinyMCE documentationarrow-up-right

    • TinyMCE tutorial: Creating a pluginarrow-up-right

    Toolbar

    You have full control over which options should be available on the RTE.

    Toolbar: All options enabled

    In the examble above, all 34 options have been enabled. The options include copy/paste buttons, font styles like bold and italics, bullet lists and options to embed videos and insert images.

    hashtag
    Stylesheets

    It is possible to define specific styles that can be used when editing content using the RTE. You can use as many of these styles with the RTE as you want.

    The RTE styles are defined in CSS files which can be created in the Settings section. Read the RTE Styles article to learn more about this feature.

    hashtag
    Dimensions

    Define height and width of the editor displayed in the content section.

    hashtag
    Maximum size for inserted images

    Define the maximum size for images added through the Rich Text Editor.

    If inserted images are larger than the dimensions defined here, the images will be resized automatically.

    hashtag
    Mode

    The Rich Text Editor comes in two different modes: Classic and Inline.

    hashtag
    Classic

    The default mode which displays the toolbar at the top.

    RTE Mode: Classic

    hashtag
    Inline

    In this mode the toolbar is hidden, and only shows up when content in the editor is highlighted.

    Rich Text Editor Inline mode

    hashtag
    Blocks

    Blocks can be added as elements in the Rich Text Editor. Configuration and rendering of Blocks is described in the Blocks in Rich Text Editor article.

    hashtag
    Overlay Size

    Select the width of the link picker overlay. The overlay size comes in three sizes: Small, Medium, and Large.

    hashtag
    Hide Label

    When this option is checked the label and description for the RTE property will be hidden.

    hashtag
    Ignore User Start Nodes

    Some of the backoffice users might be restricted to a specific part of the content tree. When the "Ignore User Start Nodes" is checked, the users can pick any piece of content from the content tree, when adding internal links through the RTE.

    hashtag
    Image Upload Folder

    Images added through the RTE is by default added to the root of the Media library.

    Sometimes you might want to add the images to a specific folder. This folder can be configured using the "Image Upload Folder" setting.

    hashtag
    Advanced Configuration

    circle-exclamation

    The global configuration of RichTextEditor will be removed in Umbraco 14 to support more rich text editors in the future. Instead, a new extension type called “tinyMcePlugin” will be added.

    The RTE can also accept advanced configuration through the appSettings.json file fed into the TinyMCE configuration. This is within Umbraco:CMS:RichTextEditor and allows you to configure the following:

    • Commandsarrow-up-right

    • Pluginsarrow-up-right

    • CustomConfigarrow-up-right

    CustomConfig is slightly different from the rest as it extends the core config passed into TinyMCE.

    Read more about the advanced configuration and how to set it up in Umbraco in the Rich Text Editor Settings article.

    hashtag
    Allowing script tags in the RTE

    Sometimes you want to allow your content editors to be able to add <script> tags into the RTE. This tag is classed as invalid by default which means the configuration needs to be updated to allow it. This is not something that can be done through the CMS and requires advanced configuration in the appSettings.json file. It uses the ValidElements property to append ,script[*] to the pre-existing list of valid elements as shown below.

    Definition Example

    There are three settings available for manipulating the Markdown editor property.

    • Preview toggles if a preview of the markdown should be displayed beneath the editor in the content view.

    • Default value is inserted if no content has been saved to the Document Type using this property editor.

    • Overlay Size is used to select the width of the link picker overlay in the content view.

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Content Example

    hashtag
    Explanation of buttons from left to right

    Function
    Shortcut
    Further explanation

    toggle bold text

    Ctrl + B

    toggle italic text

    Ctrl + I

    insert link

    Ctrl + L

    This opens the Select Link interface.

    toggle quote

    Ctrl + Q

    hashtag
    Other functionality

    Function
    Shortcut

    select all

    Ctrl + A

    copy

    Ctrl + C

    paste

    Ctrl + V

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Media Picker Data Type Definition

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Member Picker Content

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    circle-info

    Getting the Value of the property will return the user ID - properties of the User can be accessed by referencing UserService.

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    You can read more about them herearrow-up-right
    Load Balancing documentation
    fail to bootarrow-up-right
    Run from Package featurearrow-up-right
    Load Balancing documentation
    Azure Key Vault documentation
    Advanced Edit
    Configuration
    Migrate Umbraco Forms data to the databasearrow-up-right
    Video tutorial
    How to enable Language Variants
    Enabling Language Variants on Document Types
    Working with Language Variants on content
    Test your language variants
    Control User Group permissions on language variants
    Related Links
    Security Settings
    rendering content section
    Umbraco 8: Language Variants (official blog post from Umbraco HQ)arrow-up-right
    Language variations
    Render varied content in Templates
    Adding a language
    Allowing variance on properties
    Allowing variance on properties
    How an invariant property looks when it is locked
    Assign access to all or individual languages on th User Group
    content
    Content Menu
    Actions Button
    Content Template Name Field
    Create Button
    New Content Template
    Settings Menu
    Create Content Template
    Select Content Type
    Content Template Name Field
    New Content Template
    Edit Content Template
    Create From Template
    Select Template

    Upgrade to Umbraco 7

    This document should be used as a reference, not a step by step guide. Upgrading will largely depend on what version of Umbraco you are currently running, what packages you have installed and the many

    The standard upgrade instructions still apply to this process as well.

    hashtag
    Backup

    It is critical that you back up your website and database before upgrading. There are database changes made during installation and you cannot revert an Umbraco 7 database to an Umbraco 6 database.

    hashtag
    .Net 4.5

    Umbraco 7 is built on .Net 4.5 and your development environment will require this version installed in order to operate. Visual Studio users may require 2012 or higher.

    hashtag
    HTML 5 browser support

    Umbraco 7 requires browsers with proper HTML 5 support, these include Chrome, Firefox, IE10+

    hashtag
    Breaking changes

    Before you upgrade be sure to read the list of breaking changes. This is especially recommended if you have removed or modified code in the core or if one of these breaking changes directly affects your installation.

    for more details.

    hashtag
    Examine

    It is recommended to rebuild all Examine indexes after completing the upgrade.

    hashtag
    Xml Cache rebuild

    You should re-generate the XML cache. This can be done by following the prompts when visiting the following URL:

    your-domain.com/umbraco/dialogs/republish.aspx?xml=true

    hashtag
    Configuration changes

    It is recommended that you use a Diff tool to compare the configuration file changes with your own current configuration files.

    • /web.config updates

      • You will need to compare the new Umbraco 7 web.config with your current web.config. Here is a quick reference of what needs to change:

    hashtag
    Medium Trust

    Umbraco 7+ will no longer support medium trust environments. There are now some assemblies used in the core that do not support medium trust but are used extensively. Plugin scanning now also allows for scanning Umbraco's internal types which requires full trust.

    hashtag
    Events

    hashtag
    Tree events

    Content, Media, Members, and Data Type trees will no longer raise the legacy tree events (based on BaseTree). It is recommended to change all tree event handlers to use the new tree events that fire for every tree in Umbraco including legacy trees. The new tree events are static events and are found in the class Umbraco.Web.Trees.TreeControllerBase:

    • MenuRendering

    • RootNodeRendering

    • TreeNodesRendering

    hashtag
    Legacy business logic events

    The Content, Media, Member, and Data Type editors have been re-created and are solely using the new Umbraco Services data layer. This means that operations performed in the backoffice will no longer raise the legacy business logic events (for example, events based on umbraco.cms.businesslogic.web.Document). It is recommended to change your event handlers to subscribe to the new Services data layer events. These are static events and are found in the services. For example: Umbraco.Core.Services.ContentService.Saved.

    hashtag
    Property Editors

    Legacy property editors (pre-Umbraco 7) will not work with Umbraco 7. During the upgrade installation process, Umbraco will generate a report showing you which legacy property editors are installed. These will all be converted to a readonly Label property editor. No data loss will occur but you'll need to re-assign your existing data types to use a new compatible Umbraco 7 property editor.

    Most Umbraco core property editors shipped will be mapped to their equivalent Umbraco 7 editors. The Image cropper editor has not been completed for v7.0.

    hashtag
    The Related Links property editor and XSLT

    Since the Related Links property is an advanced property editor, the data format has changed from XML to JSON. This should not have any effect when retrieving the data from razor. If you are outputting Related Links data with XSLT you will need to update your XSLT snippet. Making use of the new library method umbraco.library:JsonToXml and taking into account that the xml structure has also slightly changed.

    hashtag
    GUID -> Alias mapping

    One of the database changes made in Umbraco 7 is the change of referencing a property editor from a GUID to a string alias. In order to map a legacy property editor to a new Umbraco 7 version you can add your custom "GUID -> Alias" map during application startup. To do this you would add your map using this method: Umbraco.Core.PropertyEditors.LegacyPropertyEditorIdToAliasConverter.CreateMap

    hashtag
    Parameter Editors

    Legacy parameter editors (pre-Umbraco 7) will not work with Umbraco 7. If Umbraco detects legacy parameter editor aliases that do not map to a Umbraco 7 parameter editor it will render a textbox in its place. You will need to update your macros to use a compatible Umbraco 7 parameter editor as those that aren't supported.

    Previously, parameter editors were registered in an Umbraco database table: cmsMacroPropertyType which no longer exists. Parameter editors in Umbraco 7 are plugins like property editors. During the Umbraco 7 upgrade installation process it will update the new cmsMacroProperty.editorAlias column with the previous parameter editor alias. During this process it will look into the Umbraco.Core.PropertyEditors.LegacyParameterEditorAliasConverter for a map between a legacy alias to a new Umbraco 7 alias.

    Custom legacy parameters can be mapped to new Umbraco 7 parameter editor aliases during installation. This can be done by modifying the mapping during application startup using this method: Umbraco.Core.PropertyEditors.LegacyParameterEditorAliasConverter.CreateMap.

    hashtag
    Database changes

    All database changes will be taken care of during the upgrade installation process.

    hashtag
    Tags

    See above for the database updates made for better tag support.

    • Tags can now be assigned to a nodes property and not only a node

    • Multiple tag controls can exist on one page with different data

      • The legacy API does not support this, the legacy API will effectively, add/update/remove tags for the first property found for the document that is assigned a tag property editor.

    hashtag
    Packages

    You should check with the package creator for all installed packages to ensure they are compatible with Umbraco 7.

    hashtag
    For package developers

    We see common errors that we cannot fix for you, but we do have recommendations you can follow to fix them:

    hashtag
    TypeFinder

    The TypeFinder has been deprecated since 4.10 and is now found under Umbraco.Core.TypeFinder.

    hashtag
    JavaScript in menu actions

    While you need to have JavaScript inside menu actions to trigger a response, it is highly recommended that you use the recommended UmbClientMgr methods. You should not try to override parent.right.document and similar tricks to get to the right-hand frame.

    hashtag
    Use the recommended Umbraco uicontrols

    If you have a webforms page, it is recommended to use the built-in ASP.NET controls to render panels, properties and so on. If you use the raw HTML or try to style it to match the backoffice, you will get out of sync. Follow the guidelines set by Umbraco's internal editors and use the ASP.NET custom controls for UI.

    Minor upgrades for Umbraco 8

    This article provides details on how to upgrade to the next minor version when using Umbraco 8.

    Sometimes there are exceptions to these guidelines, which are listed in the version-specific guide.

    hashtag
    Note

    It is necessary to run the upgrade installer on each environment of your Umbraco site. If you want to update your staging and live site you need to repeat the steps below. Make sure you click through the install screens so that your upgrade is complete.

    hashtag
    Contents

    In this article you will find instructions for 3 different ways of upgrading:

    hashtag
    Upgrade using NuGet

    1. Open up the Package Console and type: Update-Package UmbracoCms

    2. Choose "No to All" by pressing the "L" when prompted.

    Alternatively, you can use the Visual Studio NuGet Package Manager to upgrade:

    1. Open the NuGet Package Manager and select the Updates pane to get a list of available updates.

    2. Choose the package called UmbracoCms and select update.

    The upgrade will run through all the files and make sure you have the latest changes while leaving files you have updated.

    hashtag
    Upgrade manually from a zip file

    Download the .zip file for the new version you are upgrading to from

    Copy the following folders from inside the .zip file over the existing folders in your site:

    • /bin

    • /Umbraco

    circle-info

    There are hosting providers (we know of one: RackSpace Cloud) that require proper casing of file and folder names. Normally on Windows this is not a problem. If your hosting provider however forces proper casing, you will need to verify that the folder and file names are in the same casing as in the newest version you're upgrading to.

    hashtag
    Merge configuration files

    You can expect some changes to the following configuration files:

    • Any file in the /Config folder

    • The /Global.asax file

    • The web.config

    Use a tool like to check changes between all of the config files. Depending on when you last did this there may have been updates to few of them.

    There's also the possibility that some files in the /Config folder are new or some have been removed (we do make a note of this in the release notes). WinMerge (and other diff tools) can compare folders as well so you can spot these differences.

    hashtag
    Merge UI.xml and language files

    Some packages like Umbraco Forms add dialogs to the UI.xml. Make sure to merge those changes back in from your backup during the upgrade so that the packages continue to work. This file can be found in: /Umbraco/Config/Create/UI.xml.

    Packages like Umbraco Forms and Courier also make changes to the language files located in: /Umbraco/Config/Lang/*.xml (typically en.xml).

    hashtag
    Finalize

    After copying the files and making the config changes, you can open your site. You should see the installer which will guide you through the upgrade.

    The installer will do two things:

    • Update the version number in the web.config

    • Upgrade your database in case there are any changes

    We are aware that, currently, the installer is asking you for the database details of a blank database while upgrading. In the near future this will be pre-filled with your existing details and the wording will be updated. So no need to be scared. Enter the details of your existing database and Umbraco will upgrade it to the latest version when necessary.

    hashtag
    Run an unattended upgrade

    When upgrading your Umbraco project to Umbraco v8.12+ it is possible to enable the upgrade to run unattended. This means that you will not need to run through the installation wizard when upgrading.

    Below you will find the steps you need to take in order to upgrade your project unattended.

    circle-info

    Are you running a load balanced setup with multiple servers and environments?

    Check out the section about .

    hashtag
    Enable the feature

    1. Add the Umbraco.Core.RuntimeState.UpgradeUnattended key to appSettings in your web.config file.

    2. Set the value of the key to true.

    hashtag
    Check the ConfigurationStatus

    In order to trigger the actual upgrade, the correct version number needs to be set.

    It is important to use the version number of the version that you are upgrading to. If this is not set, the upgrade will not run even if the UpgradeUnattended key has been set to true.

    1. Locate the ConfigurationStatus key in the appSettings section in your web.config file.

    2. Update the value to match the Umbraco version that you are upgrading to.

    hashtag
    Run the upgrade

    With the correct configuration applied, the project will be upgraded on the next boot.

    circle-info

    While the upgrade processes are running, any requests made to the site will be "put on hold", meaning that no content will be returned before the upgrade is complete.

    hashtag
    Boot order

    The Runtime level will use Run instead of Upgrade in order to allow the website to continue to boot up directly after the migration is run, instead of initiating the otherwise required restart.

    circle-info

    The upgrade is run after Composers but before Components. This is because the migration requires services that are registered in Composers and Components requires that Umbraco and the database is ready.

    hashtag
    Unattended upgrades in a load balanced setup

    Follow the steps outlined below to use run unattended upgrades in a load balanced setup.

    1. Upgrade Umbraco via NuGet in Visual Studio. Make sure the Umbraco.Core.ConfigurationStatus key in appSetting in the web.config file is updated to match the target version.

    2. Deploy to all environments, including the updated appSetting for Umbraco.Core.ConfigurationStatus.

    hashtag
    Post installation

    One important recommendation is to always remove the install folder immediately after upgrading Umbraco and never to upload it to a live server.

    hashtag
    Potential issues and gotchas

    hashtag
    Browser cache

    Google Chrome has notoriously aggressive caching, so if something doesn't seem to work well in the backoffice, make sure to clear cache and cookies thoroughly (for other browsers as well). Normally the browser cache problem is automatically handled in an Umbraco upgrade by modifying the config/ClientDependency.config version number. If you however wish to re-force this update you can increment this version number which will ensure that any server-side cache of JavaScript and stylesheets gets cleared as well.

    One way to nudge the cache in Chrome is to open the developer tools (F12) and go to the settings (the cog icon). There will be a checkbox that says "Disable cache (while DevTools is open)". Once this checkbox is on you can refresh the page and the cache should be invalidated. To force it even more, the "reload" button next to your address bar now has extra options when you right-click it. It should have "Normal reload", "Hard reload" and "Empty cache and hard reload" now. The last option is the most thorough and you might want to try that.

    Settings And Styling

    A grid layout can also expose custom settings - such as data-attributes or styling options - on each cell or row. This allows editors to use a friendly UI to add configuration values to grid elements. When custom settings and styles are applied, they will by default be included in the grid html as either html attributes or inline styles.

    These settings and styles must be configured by developers when setting up the grid layout data type.

    hashtag
    Configuring a custom setting or style

    To add a setting, click the edit settings link. This will expand a dialog showing you the raw configuration data. This data is in the JSON format and will only save if it's valid JSON.

    The settings data could look like this, with an object for each setting:

    The different values are:

    • label : Field name displayed in the content editor UI

    • description : Descriptive text displayed in the content editor UI to guide the user

    • key

    label and description are straight-forward.

    key defines the alias the configuration is stored under and by default the alias of the attribute will also be the attribute on the rendered html element. In the example above any value entered in this settings editor will be rendered in the grid html as:

    By changing the key of the setting you can modify the <div> element's attributes like class, title, id or custom data-* attributes.

    view the view defines the editor used to enter a value. By default Umbraco comes with a collection of prevalue editors:

    • textstring

    • textarea

    • radiobuttonlist

    Alternatively you can also pass in a path to a custom view like "/App_Plugins/grid/editors/view.html"

    prevalues is for views that need predefined values, e.g. the radiobuttonlist view. Prevalues are defined as strings in an array:

    and will translate in to three different options where each string will become a radiobutton. The strings represent the value of the options.

    Prevalues can also be defined as an object of label/value allowing to have a displayed label instead of showing the actual underlying value. You can even mix and match these and use both label/value prevalues and string prevalues in the same configuration:

    modifier is a basic way to prepend, append or wrap the value from the editor in a string. This is especially useful when working with custom styles which often requires additional values to function. For instance if you want to set a background image you can get an image path from the image picker view. But in order for it to work with css it has to be wrapped in url(). In that case you set the modifier to url({0}) which means that {0} is replaced with the editor value.

    applyTo defines what this setting can be applied to. It should be either row or cell as a string.

    A JSON object can also be used if you need a more specific configuration. A JSON configuration could look like this:

    This would ensure the setting can only be used on rows named Article or Headline, or on cells sized: 4, 8 or 6. If it should only apply to cells you can remove the row property. If it should apply to all rows you can specify it by having the row property with null or an empty string as value.

    hashtag
    Sample settings

    There are many ways to combine these, here are some samples:

    hashtag
    Set a background image style

    hashtag
    Set a title setting

    hashtag
    Set a data-custom setting

    hashtag
    Multiple settings and styles

    You can add multiple settings and styles configurations on a data type. This is done by creating a new setting or style object. Remember to separate the objects with a comma.

    hashtag
    Adding multiple settings

    hashtag
    Full-width settings and styles

    It is possible to use settings and styles to add full-width background-images, background-colors and so forth. Make sure the surrounding section is full-width (12 columns by default) and the rows inside it will automatically become full-width.

    Log Viewer

    Information on using the Umbraco log viewer

    Umbraco ships with a built-in Log Viewer feature. This allows you to filter, view log entries, perform complex search queries, and analyze logs for debugging. You can find the Log viewer in the Settings section of the Umbraco backoffice.

    hashtag
    Benefits

    Ever needed to find all log entries containing the same request ID? Or locate all logs where a property called Duration exceeds 1000ms?

    With structured logging and a query language, you can efficiently search and identify log items for specific scenarios. This helps in debugging and finding patterns in your logs, making it easier to resolve issues.

    hashtag
    Example Queries

    Here are some example queries to help you get started. For more details on the syntax, see the https://github.com/serilog/serilog-filters-expressions project.

    Find all logs that are from the namespace 'Umbraco.Core'StartsWith(SourceContext, 'Umbraco.Core')

    Find all logs that have the property 'Duration' and the duration is greater than 1000msHas(Duration) and Duration > 1000

    Find all logs where the message has localhost in it with SQL like@Message like '%localhost%'

    hashtag
    Saved Searches

    If you frequently use a custom query, you can save it for quick access. Type your query in the search box and click the heart icon to save it with a friendly name. Saved queries are stored in the umbracoLogViewerQuery table in the database.

    hashtag
    Implementing Your Own Log Viewer

    Umbraco allows you to implement a customn ILogViewer to fetch logs from alternative sources, such as Azure Table Storage.

    hashtag
    Creating a Custom Log Viewer

    To fetch logs from Azure Table Storage, implement the SerilogLogViewerSourceBase class from Umbraco.Cms.Core.Logging.Viewer.

    circle-info

    This implementation requires the Azure.Data.Tables NuGet package.

    Azure Table Storage requires entities to implement the ITableEntity interface. Since Umbraco’s default log entity does not implement this, a custom entity (AzureTableLogEntity) must be created to ensure logs are correctly fetched and stored.

    hashtag
    Register implementation

    Umbraco needs to be made aware that there is a new implementation of an ILogViewer to register. We also need to replace the default JSON LogViewer that we ship in the core of Umbraco.

    hashtag
    Configuring Logging to Azure Table Storage

    With the above two classes, the setup is in place to view logs from an Azure Table. However, logs are not yet persisted into the Azure Table Storage account. To enable persistence, configure the Serilog logging pipeline to store logs in Azure Table Storage.

    • Install Serilog.Sinks.AzureTableStorage from NuGet.

    • Add a new sink to appsettings.json with credentials to persist logs to Azure.

    The following sink needs to be added to the array.

    For more in-depth information about logging and how to configure it, see the article.

    hashtag
    Compact Log Viewer - Desktop App

    . A desktop tool is available for viewing and querying JSON log files in the same way as the built-in Log Viewer in Umbraco.

    Runtime Modes

    This section describes how to use the runtime mode setting to optimize Umbraco for the best development experience or optimal production environment.

    hashtag
    Configuring the runtime mode

    You can configure the runtime mode to optimize Umbraco for different development experiences and environments by setting Umbraco:CMS:Runtime:Mode to one of the available modes:

    Configuring Block Editor Label Properties

    When configuring a block, the label property allows you to define a label for the appearance of the Block in the editor. The label can use AngularJS template string syntax to display values of properties. Example: My Block {{myPropertyAlias}} will be shown as: My Block FooBar.

    You can also use more advanced expressions using AngularJS filters. Example: {{myPropertyAlias | limitTo:100}} or for a property using the Richtext editor {{myPropertyAlias | ncRichText | truncate:true:100}}.

    It is also possible to use properties from the settings model by using {{$settings.propertyAlias}}.

    Media Picker

    Alias: Umbraco.MediaPicker3

    Returns: IEnumerable<MediaWithCrops> or MediaWithCrops

    This property editors returns one of the following:

    • A collection (IEnumerable<MediaWithCrops>

    Umbraco in Load Balanced Environments

    Information on how to deploy Umbraco in a Load Balanced scenario and other details to consider when setting up Umbraco for load balancing

    Information on how to deploy Umbraco in a Load Balanced scenario and other details to consider when setting up Umbraco for load balancing.

    hashtag
    Overview

    Configuring and setting up a load balanced server environment requires planning, design and testing. This document should assist you in setting up your servers, load balanced environment and Umbraco configuration.

    Installing Nightly Builds

    Instructions on installing nightly builds of Umbraco.

    In this article, we'll explain how you can get the latest builds of Umbraco. You can do this in three steps:

    Build a Custom View for a Block

    You can choose to customize your editing experience by implementing a custom view for each Block Type of a Block Editor.

    By picking a custom view you overwrite the backoffice UI for the given block with your own. This enables you to define how a block should be presented. It can, however, also include interactive elements and be a full custom solution to how data is manipulated. In the Block List Editor the Inline Editing Mode must be disabled for custom backoffice views to appear.

    hashtag
    Write your own HTML view

    Currently you can only pick HTML files for a custom view. These views are powered by AngularJS and you can write any AngularJS logic.

      "Umbraco": {
        "CMS": {
          "RichTextEditor": {
            "CustomConfig": {
              "external_plugins": "{\"myrteplugin\":\"/App_Plugins/MyRtePlugin/plugin.js\"}"
            },
            "Commands": [
              {
                "Alias": "myrtebutton",
                "Name": "My RTE Button",
                "Mode": "Insert"
              }
            ]
          }
        }
      }
    'use strict'
    ;(function () {
        /**
         * @param {import('tinymce').TinyMCE} tinymce
         */
        function plugin(tinymce) {
    
            // Register a new plugin on the PluginManager
            tinymce.PluginManager.add('myrteplugin', function (editor) {
    
                // Register a new button
                editor.ui.registry.addButton('myrtebutton', {
                    text: 'My RTE Button',
                    icon: 'code-sample',
    
                    // When the button is clicked, insert 'Hello World!' into the editor
                    onAction: function () {
                        editor.insertContent('Hello World!')
                    }
                })
            })
        }
    
        // Initialize the plugin only if the global `tinymce` object exists
        if (window && 'tinymce' in window) {
            plugin(window.tinymce)
        }
    })();
    appsettings.json
    {
      "Umbraco": {
        "CMS": {
          "RichTextEditor": {
            "Plugins": ["wordcount"],
            "CustomConfig": {
              "statusbar": true
            }
          }
        }
      }
    }
    {
      "Umbraco": {
        "CMS": {
          "RichTextEditor": {
            "CloudApiKey": "q8j4e5{...}w8c270p",
            "Plugins": ["powerpaste"],
            "CustomConfig": {
              "powerpaste_allow_local_images": "true",
              "powerpaste_word_import": "clean"
            }
          }
        }
      }
    }
    {
      "Umbraco": {
        "CMS": {
          "RichTextEditor": {
            "ValidElements": "+a[id|style|rel|data-id|data-udi|rev|charset|hreflang|dir|lang|tabindex|accesskey|type|name|href|target|title|class|onfocus|onblur|onclick|
            ondblclick|onmousedown|onmouseup|onmouseover|onmousemove|onmouseout|onkeypress|onkeydown|onkeyup],-strong/-b[class|style],-em/-i[class|style],-strike[class|
            style],-u[class|style],#p[id|style|dir|class|align],-ol[class|reversed|start|style|type],-ul[class|style],-li[class|style],br[class],img[id|dir|lang|longdesc|
            usemap|style|class|src|onmouseover|onmouseout|border|alt=|title|hspace|vspace|width|height|align|umbracoorgwidth|umbracoorgheight|onresize|onresizestart|
            onresizeend|rel|data-id],-sub[style|class],-sup[style|class],-blockquote[dir|style|class],-table[border=0|cellspacing|cellpadding|width|height|class|align|
            summary|style|dir|id|lang|bgcolor|background|bordercolor],-tr[id|lang|dir|class|rowspan|width|height|align|valign|style|bgcolor|background|bordercolor],
            tbody[id|class],thead[id|class],tfoot[id|class],#td[id|lang|dir|class|colspan|rowspan|width|height|align|valign|style|bgcolor|background|bordercolor|scope],
            -th[id|lang|dir|class|colspan|rowspan|width|height|align|valign|style|scope],caption[id|lang|dir|class|style],-div[id|dir|class|align|style],
            -span[class|align|style],-pre[class|align|style],address[class|align|style],-h1[id|dir|class|align|style],-h2[id|dir|class|align|style],
            -h3[id|dir|class|align|style],-h4[id|dir|class|align|style],-h5[id|dir|class|align|style],-h6[id|style|dir|class|align|style],hr[class|style],
            small[class|style],dd[id|class|title|style|dir|lang],dl[id|class|title|style|dir|lang],dt[id|class|title|style|dir|lang],
            object[class|id|width|height|codebase|*],param[name|value|_value|class],embed[type|width|height|src|class|*],map[name|class],
            area[shape|coords|href|alt|target|class],bdo[class],button[class],iframe[*],figure,figcaption,video[*],audio[*],picture[*],source[*],canvas[*],script[*]"
          }
    }
    @Model.MyMarkdownEditor
    @Model.Value("MyMarkdownEditor")
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Create markdown value
        var markdownValue = new HtmlString("#heading  \n**strong text**");
        
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'myMarkdownEditor'. 
        content.SetValue("myMarkdownEditor", markdownValue);
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'myMarkdownEditor'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.MyMarkdownEditor).Alias, markdownValue);
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IUserService UserService;
    @{
        
        if (Model.Value("userPicker") != null)
        {
            var us = UserService;
            var username = us.GetUserById(Model.Value<int>("userPicker")).Name;
    
            <p>This is the chosen person: @username</p>
            <p>This returns the id value of chosen person: @Model.Value("userPicker")</p>
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IUserService UserService;
    @{
        if (Model.UserPicker != null)
        {
    
            var us = UserService;
            var user = us.GetUserById((int)Model.UserPicker);
    
            <p>This is the chosen person: @user.Name</p>
            <p>This returns the id value of chosen person: @user.Id)</p>
        }
    }
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = new Guid("796a8d5c-b7bb-46d9-bc57-ab834d0d1248");
        
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'userPicker'. The value is the specific ID of the user
        content.SetValue("userPicker", -1);
                
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'userPicker'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.UserPicker).Alias, "Umbraco Demo");
    }
    {
        "Umbraco": {
            "CMS": {
                "Global": {
                    "MainDomLock" : "FileSystemMainDomLock"
                },
                "Hosting": {
                    "LocalTempStorageLocation": "EnvironmentTemp"
                },
                "Examine": {
                    "LuceneDirectoryFactory": "SyncedTempFileSystemDirectoryFactory"
                }
            }
        }
    }
    {
      "name": "UMBRACO__CMS__Global__MainDomLock",
      "value": "FileSystemMainDomLock",
      "slotSetting": false
    },
    {
      "name": "UMBRACO__CMS__Hosting__LocalTempStorageLocation",
      "value": "EnvironmentTemp",
      "slotSetting": false
    },
    {
      "name": "UMBRACO__CMS__Examine__LuceneDirectoryFactory",
      "value": "SyncedTempFileSystemDirectoryFactory",
      "slotSetting": false
    }
    Rich text editor showing a custom button
    Rich text editor configuration showing available options
    ValidElementsarrow-up-right
    InvalidElementsarrow-up-right

    toggle code block

    Ctrl + K

    insert image

    Ctrl + G

    This opens the Select Media interface.

    toggle ordered list

    Ctrl + O

    toggle unordered list

    Ctrl + U

    toggle heading

    Ctrl + H

    This toggles between h1, h2 and off.

    toggle a hr

    undo

    Ctrl + Z

    redo

    Ctrl + Y

    How to install Umbraco using NuGet and Visual Studio
    A video tutorial guiding you through the steps of upgrading from version 8 to the latest version on Umbraco Cloud.
    Learn how to use the Content Templates in Umbraco
    If there are any specific configuration changes required for the version you are upgrading to then they will be noted in the
    .
    file in the root of your site
    (Important: make sure to copy back the version number, and the connection string as they were.)
  • In rare cases, the web.config file in the /Views folder

  • Set the Umbraco.Core.RuntimeState.UpgradeUnattended key in appSetting in the web.config to true for the Main server only.

  • Request a page on the Main server and the upgrade will run automatically.

  • Wait for the upgrade to complete.

  • Browse the Read-Only servers and make sure they do not show the “upgrade required” screen.

  • Upgrade using NuGet
    Upgrade manually from a Zip file
    Run an unattended upgrade (v8.12+)
    https://our.umbraco.com/downloadarrow-up-right
    WinMergearrow-up-right
    Unattended upgrades in a load balanced setup
    version-specific guide
    : The key the entered setting value will be stored under.
  • view : The editor used to enter a setting value with.

  • prevalues : For views that need predefined values, e.g. the radiobuttonlist view.

  • modifier (optional) : A string formatter to modify the output of the editor to prepend or append extra values.

  • applyTo (optional) : States whether the setting can be used on a cell or a row. If either not present or empty, the setting will be shown both on Rows and Cells.

  • mediapicker

  • imagepicker

  • boolean

  • treepicker

  • treesource

  • number

  • multivalues

  • Your HTML can be anything. If you use it as a representation of the content you would also want the full view to be clickable. This would then open the default editor for editing of your content.

    The following example displays the property with the alias headline together with the description inside a button to edit your block.

    If you would like to display properties of settings, you can access these by using block.settingsData.myPropertyAlias.

    hashtag
    Make Block List Editor custom view draggable

    A custom view of Block List Editor needs to have the 'blockelement__draggable-element' class presented to define which part of the Block is draggable.

    Example:

    circle-info

    This is not relevant for the Block Grid Editor where all Blocks are draggable by default..

    hashtag
    Add the Areas for Block Grid Editor

    Blocks of the Block Grid Editor can have Areas. These Blocks require their Custom View to define where the Areas should be inserted.

    This enables you to wrap and place the Areas as you need.

    The Areas is inserted through Web Component Slotsarrow-up-right. A slot is a native HTML tag.

    These Area slots can be generated automatically via this AngularJS Directive:

    Example of a Custom View wrapping the Areas within a green border:

    You can also define where each Area should be inserted. This is relevant if you like the Areas to appear differently than the provided grid setup of Areas.

    As a reference here is an example of the HTML output of the umb-block-grid-render-area-slots AngularJS Directive:

    hashtag
    Adding custom implementation to your View

    To achieve this you need to add a custom AngularJS controller to your custom view, using the ng-controller attribute:

    Create a folder inside the App_Plugins folder called 'CustomBlockView'.

    Create two files within the CustomBlockView file: package.manifest and customBlock.controller.js.

    Add the following JSON to the package.manifest file:

    circle-info

    Umbraco will parse all package.manifest files and load any resources they reference into the backoffice during startup.

    The second file, customBlock.controller.js, will be used to register the 'customBlockController' defined using the ng-controller attribute in your custom view.

    To register the controller, add the following lines of code:

    hashtag
    Example: Displaying an image from a Media Picker

    Your block may enable you to 'pick' an image to use as the background for a particular block. If you try to display this image directly in the view using block.data.image, you will see the unique ID and not the image.

    There are two approaches to displaying the actual image in your custom block view. Either use a filter in your custom view or retrieve the image through the AngularJS controller.

    hashtag
    1. Retrieve the image using a filter directly in your custom view

    By using the AngularJS filter called mediaItemResolver, it is possible to retrieve the image directly from your custom view file. You will need to create a variable that then uses the mediaItemResolver filter on the Media Picker property. This variable is then used to retrieve the image URL in an <img> HTML tag.

    In the following example, a mediaItem variable is defined and used to set the ng-src value on the image tag. This will retrieve the image into your custom view.

    hashtag
    2. Retrieve the image using an AngularJS controller

    It is also possible to get the ImageUrl by using the unique ID in an AngularJS controller.

    Amend the customBlock.controller.js file, by injecting the mediaResource to retrieve the image from the ID:

    The Custom View should then be updated to use the imageUrl property to display the image:

    If you need to use a specific crop, you can inject the imageUrlGeneratorResource resource. This has a getCropUrl(mediaPath, width, height, imageCropMode, animationProcessMode) method:

        <add key="Umbraco.Core.RuntimeState.UpgradeUnattended" value="true" />
    <add key="Umbraco.Core.ConfigurationStatus" value="x.x.x"/>
    [
      {
        "label": "Class",
        "description": "Set a css class",
        "key": "class",
        "view": "textstring",
        "modifier": "col-sm-{0}",
        "applyTo": "row|cell"
      }
    ]
    <div **class**="VALUE-ENTERED"></div>
    "prevalues": [
        "value_1",
        "value_2",
        "value_3"
    ]
    "prevalues": [
        {
            "label": "Value one",
            "value": "value_1"
        },
        {
            "label": "Value two",
            "value": "value_2"
        },
        "value_3"
    ]
    "applyTo": {
        "row": "Headline,Article",
        "cell": "4,8,6"
    }
    {
        "label": "Background image",
        "description": "Choose an image",
        "key": "background-image",
        "view": "imagepicker",
        "modifier": "url('{0}')"
    }
    {
        "label": "Title",
        "description": "Set a title on this element",
        "key": "title",
        "view": "textstring"
    }
    {
        "label": "Custom data",
        "description": "Set the custom data on this element",
        "key": "data-custom",
        "view": "radiobuttonlist",
        "prevalues": [
            "value_1",
            "value_2",
            "value_3"
        ]
    }
    [
        {
            "label": "Class",
            "description": "Set a class on this element",
            "key": "class",
            "view": "textstring"
        },
        {
            "label": "Title",
            "description": "Set a title on this element",
            "key": "title",
            "view": "textstring"
        },
        {
            "label": "Custom data",
            "description": "Set the custom data on this element",
            "key": "data-custom",
            "view": "textstring"
        }
    ]
    <button type="button" ng-click="block.edit()">
      <h2 ng-bind="block.data.headline"></h2>
      <p ng-bind="block.data.description"></p>
    </button>
    <button type="button" class="blockelement__draggable-element" ng-click="block.edit()">
      <h2 ng-bind="block.data.headline"></h2>
      <p ng-bind="block.data.description"></p>
    </button>
    <umb-block-grid-render-area-slots></umb-block-grid-render-area-slots>
    <div style="border:green 1px solid; padding: 20px;">
        <slot name="area-container" part="area-container"></slot>
        <umb-block-grid-render-area-slots></umb-block-grid-render-area-slots>
    </div>
        <div part="area-container">
            <slot name="myAreasAlias1"></slot>
            <slot name="myAreasAlias2"></slot>
        </div>
    <div ng-controller="customBlockController">
        <button type="button" ng-click="block.edit()" >
            <h2 ng-bind="block.data.headline"></h2>
            <p ng-bind="block.data.description"></p>
        </button>
    </div>
    {
      "javascript": [
        "~/App_Plugins/CustomBlockView/customBlock.controller.js"    
      ]  
    }
    angular.module("umbraco").controller("customBlockController", function ($scope) {
        // you can do your custom functionality here!
    });
    <div ng-click="block.edit()">
        <h2 ng-bind="block.data.headline"></h2>
    
        <!-- Use the 'mediaItemResolver' on the block.data.image -->
        {{mediaItem = (block.data.image[0].mediaKey | mediaItemResolver); “”}}
    
        <!-- Use the variable defined above to retrieve the mediaLink representing the image -->
        <img ng-src=“{{mediaItem.mediaLink}}“/>
        <p ng-bind="block.data.description"></p>
    </div>
    angular.module("umbraco").controller("customBlockController", function ($scope, mediaResource) {
    
        //your property is called image so the following will contain the udi:
        var imageUdi = $scope.block.data.image[0].mediaKey;
        //the mediaResource has a getById method:
        mediaResource.getById(imageUdi).then(function (media) {
            console.log(media);
            //set a property on the 'scope' called imageUrl for the returned media object's mediaLink
            $scope.imageUrl = media.mediaLink;
        });
    });
    <div ng-controller="customBlockController" ng-click="block.edit()">
        <h2 ng-bind="block.data.headline"></h2>
        <img src="{{imageUrl}}" />
        <p ng-bind="block.data.description"></p>
    </div>
    angular.module("umbraco").controller("customBlockController", function ($scope, mediaResource,imageUrlGeneratorResource) {
    
        //your property is called image so the following will contain the udi:
        var imageUdi = $scope.block.data.image[0].mediaKey;
        //the mediaResource has a getById method:
        mediaResource.getById(imageUdi).then(function (media) {
            imageUrlGeneratorResource.getCropUrl(media.mediaLink, 150, 150).then(function (cropUrl) {
                console.log(cropUrl);
                $scope.imageUrl = cropUrl;
            });
        });    
    });

    Remove the section name="BaseRestExtensions" section

  • Remove the section name="FileSystemProviders" section

  • Remove the sectionGroup name="system.web.webPages.razor" section

  • Remove the <FileSystemProviders> element

  • Remove the BaseRestExtensions element

  • Remove the add key="umbracoUseMediumTrust" element

  • Remove the system.web.extensions element

  • Removes the xhtmlConformance element

  • Remove the system.codedom element

  • Remove the compilation assemblies, /compilation

  • Remove the system.web.webPages.razor element

  • New: sectionGroup name="umbracoConfiguration" section

  • New: umbracoConfiguration element

  • Ensure that the targetFramework="4.5" is added to the httpRuntime element

  • Add add key="ValidationSettings:UnobtrusiveValidationMode" value="None" to the appSettings element

  • /config/clientdependency.config changes

    • remove add name="CanvasProvider" element

  • /views/web.config updates

  • New macroscripts/web.config

  • config/umbracoSettings.config

    • Umbraco is now shipped with minimal settings but the full settingsarrow-up-right are still available

    • umbracoSettings is now a true ASP.NET configuration section

    • Remove the EnableCanvasEditing element

    • Remove the webservices element

  • Removed xsltExtensions.config

  • /config/applications.config and /config/trees.config have some icon paths and names updated. You need to merge the new changes into your existing config files.

  • /config/tinyMceConfig.config

    • The inlinepopups is compatible and supported in Umbraco 7. You need to remove these elements: plugin loadOnFrontend="true", inlinepopups/plugin;

    • The plugins element that is shipped with Umbraco 7 looks like this:

      • You need to merge the changes from the new tinyMceConfig file into yours. The command elements that have changed are: JustifyCenter, JustifyLeft, JustifyRight, JustifyFull, umbracomacro, umbracoembed

  • /config/dashboard.config

    • You need to merge the changes from the new dashboard.config into yours. Some of the original dashboard entries that were shipped with Umbraco 6 have been replaced or removed.

  • There is a new ITagService that can be used to query tags

    • Querying for tags in a view (front-end) can be done via the new TagQuery class which is exposed from the UmbracoHelper. For example: @Umbraco.TagQuery.GetTagsForProperty

    See the list of breaking changesarrow-up-right
    BackofficeDevelopment (default)
  • Development

  • Production

  • This can be done via the appsettings.json file, environment variables, or any other .NET configuration provider (like Azure Key Vault/App Configuration). Although this setting affects how Umbraco behaves at runtime, some modes have prerequisites on how the project is built/published. Make sure to read the descriptions of each mode before changing this setting from the default BackofficeDevelopment mode, as incorrect configuration can result in your application not starting (by throwing a BootFailedException).

    hashtag
    BackofficeDevelopment mode

    The BackofficeDevelopment mode is the default behavior for Umbraco: it does not optimize Umbraco for any specific environment and does not have any prerequisites. This mode allows for rapid development (without having to recompile/rebuild your project), including all development from within the backoffice.

    hashtag
    Development mode

    The Development mode can be used when you're developing from an IDE (like Visual Studio, VS Code, or Rider) or the dotnet CLI (e.g. using dotnet watch). It is a recommended prerequisite if you want to use the Production mode in your production environment.

    This mode disables in-memory ModelsBuilder generation and validates the following setting:

    • Umbraco:CMS:ModelsBuilder:ModelsMode is not set to InMemoryAuto.

    If you want to use the generated models, use SourceCodeAuto or SourceCodeManual, which requires manually recompiling the project after the models have changed (e.g. after updating Document Types, Media Types, Member Types, or Data Types). Razor views (cshtml files) will still be automatically compiled at runtime, allowing you to quickly iterate on the rendered output from templates, (macro) partial views, and view components.

    The recommended approach to enable Development mode is to update the appsettings.json file with the following settings:

    Ensure your models are generated by running Umbraco and navigating to Settings > Models Builder > Generate models. You can remove the following properties from your csproj project file to enable the compilation of Razor views (which also ensures your views do not contain compilation errors and is a prerequisite for enabling Production mode):

    Fix any compilation errors you might get after this, e.g. if you accidentally referenced deleted models or properties. Running the application will still show the rendered content and you're now ready to optionally enable Production mode on your production environment.

    circle-info

    Ensure you have the <CopyRazorGenerateFilesToPublishDirectory>true</CopyRazorGenerateFilesToPublishDirectory> property set in your csproj project file, so Razor views are always copied to the publish directory. This is required by the CMS to display the contents in the backoffice, for Forms to lookup custom theme views and for Deploy to be able to compare schemas (otherwise you'll get schema mismatches).

    hashtag
    Production mode

    Use Production mode to ensure your production environment is running optimally by disabling development features and validating whether specific settings are configured to their recommended production values.

    This mode disables both in-memory ModelsBuilder generation (see Development mode) and Razor (cshtml) runtime compilation. Production mode requires you to compile your views at build/publish time and enforces the following settings for optimal performance/security:

    • The application is built/published in Release mode (with JIT optimization enabled), e.g. using dotnet publish --configuration Release;

    • Umbraco:CMS:WebRouting:UmbracoApplicationUrl is set to a valid URL;

    • Umbraco:CMS:Global:UseHttps is enabled;

    • Umbraco:CMS:RuntimeMinification:CacheBuster is set to a fixed cache buster like Version or AppDomain;

    • Umbraco:CMS:ModelsBuilder:ModelsMode is set to Nothing.

    circle-info

    To compile your views at build/publish time, remove the <RazorCompileOnBuild> and <RazorCompileOnPublish> properties from your project file (see the Development mode section). If you don't, Umbraco can't find the templates and will return 404 (Page Not Found) errors.

    The recommended approach to enable Production mode is to update the appsettings.Production.json file (or create one) with the following settings:

    Although you can still edit document types and views (if not running from the published output), changes won't be picked up until you've rebuilt your project or republished the application.

    circle-info

    Models won't be generated by ModelsBuilder (because the mode is set to Nothing), requiring you to do all your changes while in Development mode. As Models Builder is set to Nothing, the Models Builder dashboard is disabled in the backoffice of live environment.

    Also, templates cannot be edited on live environment as runtime compilation is not enabled and is set to Production.

    Also ensure the UmbracoApplicationUrl is updated to the primary URL of your production environment, as this is used when sending emails (password reset, notifications, health check results, etc.) and the keep-alive task.

    circle-info

    Static web assets are disabled when using Production mode, following Microsoft guidancearrow-up-right. If you are running a non-Development environment using the Production runtime mode from source (non-published output), you will need to explicitly enable this. You can add the following line of code to your Program.cs file:

    This should not be used in a more typical production environment where you are hosting your application from published output.

    hashtag
    Customize/extend runtime mode validation

    Validation of the above-mentioned settings is done when determining the runtime level during startup using the new IRuntimeModeValidationService and when it fails, causes a BootFailedException to be thrown. The default implementation gets all registered IRuntimeModeValidators to do the validation, making it possible to remove default checks and/or add your own (inherit from RuntimeModeProductionValidatorBase, if you only want to validate against the production runtime mode). The following validators are added by default:

    • JITOptimizerValidator - Ensure the application is built/published in Release mode (with JIT optimization enabled) when in production runtime mode, e.g. using dotnet publish --configuration Release;

    • UmbracoApplicationUrlValidator - ensure Umbraco:CMS:WebRouting:UmbracoApplicationUrl is configured when in production runtime mode;

    • UseHttpsValidator - ensure Umbraco:CMS:Global:UseHttps is enabled when in production runtime mode;

    • RuntimeMinificationValidator - ensure Umbraco:CMS:RuntimeMinification:CacheBuster is set to a fixed cache buster like Version or AppDomain when in production runtime mode;

    • ModelsBuilderModeValidator - ensure Umbraco:CMS:ModelsBuilder:ModelsMode is not set to InMemoryAuto when in development runtime mode and set to Nothing when in production runtime mode.

    The following example removes the default UmbracoApplicationUrlValidator and adds a new custom DisableElectionForSingleServerValidator:

    In some cases, you might want to create a fallback label. This can be achieved using the following format: {{myProperty || $contentTypeName}}.

    This example will show the name of the ElementType when the value of myProperty is not defined.

    hashtag
    Useful Angular filters

    As well as the default AngularJS filtersarrow-up-right, Umbraco ships with additional filters which are useful for setting the Label field of Block editors.

    Filter
    Description
    Property type
    Parameters

    ncNodeName

    Gets the name of a node

    Umbraco node

    ncRichText

    Strips HTML

    Richtext editor

    mediaItemResolver

    Retrieves a Media Item object

    Media Picker

    hashtag
    Example: mediaItemResolver

    This is how you could use the filter for a Media Picker of the type Umbraco.MediaPicker3 with multiple images:

    The mediaKey is a Guid like c7a4526c-6b32-4665-a047-5b3e7256d973.

    For the Media Name, the same could be achieved using ncNodeName like shown below:

    The ncNodeName value expects a UDI like umb://media/c7a4526c6b324665a0475b3e7256d973.

    hashtag
    Custom filters

    If the filters do not suit your needs, you can create custom filters by creating a plugin in App_Plugins and adding a filter module. You can see an example below:

    circle-exclamation

    If you do not have an /App_Plugins folder, you can create it at the root of your project.

    1. Create a plugin by adding a folder inside App_Plugins called MyFilters

    2. Inside the MyFilters folder add a package.manifest file containing:

    1. Add a myFilter.filter.js file containing:

    1. Implement a block editor of your choice. When adding a label add {{ myFilter }} which is the property alias of the element type. The myFilter property has a textstring editor. When adding the content, the block editor will then display the data that you input.

    hashtag
    Special variables

    Variable
    Description

    $index

    The 1-based index of this block item in the current block list

    $contentTypeName

    The name of the Element Type used for the Block

    $settings

    Provides access to the settings model for the block (if configured)

    $layout

    Provides access to the layout model for the block (columnSpan and rowSpan)

    ) if the
    Pick multiple items
    setting is enabled.
  • A single MediaWithCrops item if the Pick multiple items setting is disabled.

  • hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    Media Picker Data Type Definition

    hashtag
    Accepted types

    Use setting to limit the picker to only select Media Items of these types.

    hashtag
    Pick multiple items

    Use this setting to enable the property to contain multiple items. When this is enabled the property editor returns an IEnumerable<MediaWithCrops>.

    You can still set the maximum amount to 1. Do so when you want to retrieve a collection but only allow the Content Editors to select one Media Item.

    hashtag
    Amount

    Use this setting to enforce a minimum and/or maximum amount of selected Media Items.

    circle-info

    It is not possible to set a maximum amount when the "Pick multiple items" feature is disabled.

    hashtag
    Start node

    This setting is used to limit the Media Picker to certain parts of the Media Tree.

    hashtag
    Ignorer user start nodes

    Use this setting to overrule user permissions, to enable any user of this property to pick any Media Item of the chosen Start node.

    When this setting is enabled, a user can access the media available under the selected "Start Node" (/Design in this case). This applies even if they normally lack access. The access is granted specifically when using this particular Media Picker.

    hashtag
    Enable Focal Point

    Enable the focal point setter, do only enable this if the focal point is used or if you have Image crops defined.

    hashtag
    Image Crops

    Define local image crops. Local image crop data is stored on the document in this property. This means it can differentiate between documents.

    This is different from Global crops as they are defined on the Media Item, making the crops shared between all usage of that Media Item.

    Global crops are configured on the Image Cropper property of the Image Media Type

    Read about the Image Cropper here

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Media Picker Content

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Multiple enabled without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Multiple enabled without Modelsbuilder to retrieve IEnumerable data

    circle-info

    While MediaWithCrops is the default return type, IPublishedContent may be used in backward-compatible implementations or when working directly with core APIs.

    hashtag
    Multiple enabled with Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Multiple disabled without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Multiple disabled with Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Using crops

    Both local and global crops are retrieved using the method GetCropUrl. If crops with identical aliases are defined both locally and globally, the locally defined crops are always prioritized by GetCropUrl.

    The following is an example of how to retrieve a crop from a MediaWithCrops entry:

    hashtag
    Explicitly retrieving global crops

    You can retrieve globally defined crops explicitly by using GetCropUrl on the UrlHelper:

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the Content Service.

    The following sample will update a single image in a Media Picker.

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    This document assumes that you have a fair amount of knowledge about:
    • Umbraco

    • IIS 10+

    • Networking & DNS

    • Windows Server

    • .NET5+

    circle-info

    It is highly recommended that you setup your staging environment to also be load balanced so that you can run all of your testing on a similar environment to your live environment.

    hashtag
    Design

    These instructions make the following assumptions:

    • All web servers can communicate with the database where Umbraco data is stored

    • You are running Umbraco 9.0.0 or above

    • You will designate a single server to be the backoffice server for which your editors will log into for editing content. Umbraco will not work correctly if the backoffice is behind the load balancer.

    There are three design alternatives you can use to effectively load balance servers:

    1. You use cloud based auto-scaling appliances like Microsoft's Azure Web Appsarrow-up-right

    2. Each server hosts copies of the load balanced website files and a file replication service is running to ensure that all files on all servers are up to date

    3. The load balanced website files are located on a centralized file share (SAN/NAS/Clustered File Server/Network Share)

    You will need a load balancer to do your load balancing.

    hashtag
    How Umbraco load balancing works

    In order to understand how to host your site it is best to understand how Umbraco's flexible load balancing works.

    The following diagram shows the data flow/communication between each item in the environment:

    Umbraco flexible load balancing diagram

    The process is as follows:

    • Administrators and editors create, update, delete data/content on the backoffice server

    • These events are converted into data structures called "instructions" and are stored in the database in a queue

    • Each front-end server checks to see if there are any outstanding instructions it hasn't processed yet

    • When a front-end server detects that there are pending instructions, it downloads them and processes them and in turn updates it's cache, cache files and indexes on its own file system

    • There can be a delay between content updates and a front-end server's refreshing, this is expected and normal behaviour.

    hashtag
    Scheduling and server role election

    Although there is a backoffice server designated for administration, by default this is not explicitly set as the "Scheduling server". In Umbraco there can only be a single scheduling server which performs the following 3 things:

    • Keep alive service - to ensure scheduled publishing occurs

    • Scheduled tasks - to initiate any configured scheduled tasks

    • Scheduled publishing - to initiate any scheduled publishing for documents

    hashtag
    Automatic Server Role Election

    Umbraco will automatically elect a "Scheduling server" to perform the above services. This means that all of the servers will need to be able to resolve the URL of either: itself, the Backoffice server, the internal load balancer, or the public address.

    There are two server roles:

    • SchedulingPublisher - Usually this is the backoffice instance.

    • Subscriber - These are the scalable front-end instances - not recommended to be used for backoffice access.

    circle-info

    These new terms replace 'Master and Replica', in Umbraco versions 7 and 8.

    Each instance will be allocated a role by the automatic server role election process, but they can also be set explicitly (recommended)

    For example, In the following diagram the node f02.mysite.local is the elected "Scheduling server". In order for scheduling to work it needs to be able to send requests to itself, the Backoffice server, the internal load balancer or the public address. The address used by the "Scheduling server" is called the "umbracoApplicationUrl".

    Umbraco flexible load balancing diagram

    By default, Umbraco will set the "umbracoApplicationUrl" to the address made by the first accepted request when the AppDomain starts. It is assumed that this address will be a DNS address that the server can resolve.

    For example, if a public request reached the load balancer on www.mysite.com, the load balancer may send the request on to the servers with the original address: www.mysite.com. By default the "umbracoApplicationUrl" will be www.mysite.com. However, load balancers may route the request internally under a different DNS name such as "f02.mysite.local" which by default would mean the "umbracoApplicationUrl" is "f02.mysite.local". In any case the elected "Scheduling server" must be able to resolve this address.

    In many scenarios this is fine, but in case this is not adequate there's a few of options you can use:

    • Recommended: set your front-end(s) (non-admin server) to be explicit subscriber servers by creating a custom IServerRegistrar, this means the front-end servers will never be used as the SchedulingPublisher server role.

    • Set the UmbracoApplicationUrl property in the WebRouting section of the CMS config

    hashtag
    Common load balancing setup information

    The below section applies to all ASP.NET load balancing configurations.

    hashtag
    Server Configuration

    This section describes the configuration options depending on your hosting setup:

    1. Azure Web Apps - You use cloud based auto-scaling appliances like Microsoft's Azure Web Appsarrow-up-right

    2. File Replication - Each server hosts copies of the load balanced website files and a file replication service is running to ensure that all files on all servers are up to date

    3. Centralized file share - The load balanced website files are located on a centralized file share (SAN/NAS/Clustered File Server/Network Share)

    Full documentation is available here

    hashtag
    Data Protection

    The replacement for Machine Keys in ASP.NET Core are called Data Protection. You will need to setup data protection to the same keys on all servers, without this you will end up with view state errors, validation errors and encryption/decryption errors since each server will have its own generated key.

    ASP.NET Core supports multiple ways to share keys. Use the official docsarrow-up-right to find a description that fits your setup the best.

    hashtag
    Session State and Distributed Cache

    It is required to setup a distributed cache, like DistributedSqlServerCache or an alternative provider (see https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/aspnet/core/performance/caching/distributedarrow-up-right for more details). The distributed cache is used by the session in your application, which is used by the default TempDataProvider in MVC.

    Because Umbraco in some cases uses TempData, your setup needs to be configured with a distributed cache.

    hashtag
    Logging

    There are some logging configurations to take into account no matter what type of load balancing environment you are using.

    Full documentation is available here

    hashtag
    Testing

    Your staging environment should also be load balanced so that you can see any issues relating to load balancing in that environment before going to production.

    You'll need to test this solution a lot before going to production. You need to ensure there are no windows security issues, etc... The best way to determine issues is have a lot of people testing this setup and ensuring all errors and warnings in your application/system logs in Windows are fixed.

    Ensure to analyze logs from all servers and check for any warnings and errors.

    hashtag
    Unattended upgrades

    When upgrading it is possible to run the upgrades unattended.

    Find steps on how to enable the feature for a load balanced setup in the General Upgrades article.

    hashtag
    FAQs

    Here's some common questions that are asked regarding Load Balancing with Umbraco:

    Question> Why do I need to have a single web instance for Umbraco admin?

    TL:DR You must not load balance the Umbraco backoffice, you will end up with data integrity or corruption issues.

    The reason you need a single server is because there is no way to guarantee transactional safety between servers. This is because we don't currently use database level locking, we only use application (c#) level locks to guarantee transactional data integrity which is only possible to work on one server. If you have multiple admins saving and publishing at once between servers then the order in which this data is read and written to the database absolutely must be consistent otherwise you will end up with data corruption.

    Additionally, the order in which cache instructions are written to the cache instructions table is important for LB, this order is guaranteed by having a single admin server.

    Question> Can my SchedulingPublisher backoffice admin server also serve front-end requests?

    Yes. There are no problems with having your SchedulingPublisher backoffice admin server also serve front-end request.

    However, if you wish to have different security policies for your front-end servers and your back office servers, you may choose to not do this.

    Installing the latest nightly version template

    hashtag
    Adding the nightly feed as a NuGet source

    The NuGet feed containing the nightly builds is https://www.myget.org/F/umbraconightly/api/v3/index.json.

    You can either add this feed through the command line or use an IDE of your choice. In this article, we'll provide steps for:

    • Using the command line

    • Using Visual Studio

    • Using Rider

    hashtag
    Option 1: Using the command line

    To add the nightly feed using the command line:

    1. Open a command prompt of your choice.

    2. Run the following command:

    Now the feed is added as a source named Umbraco Nightly.

    hashtag
    Option 2: Using Visual Studio

    To add the nightly feed using Visual Studio:

    1. Open Visual Studio.

    2. Go to Tools > NuGet Package Manager > Package Manager Settings.

    Package Manager Settings
    1. The Options window open.

    2. Select the Package Sources option in the NuGet Package Manager section.

    3. Click the + icon.

    4. A new Package source will be added automatically and highlighted.

    5. Enter the desired name for the feed in the Name field.

    6. Enter the link https://www.myget.org/F/umbraconightly/api/v3/index.json into the Source field.

    7. Click OK.

    Register the nightly feed

    Now the feed is added as a source named Umbraco Nightly.

    hashtag
    Option 3: Using Rider

    To add the nightly feed using Rider:

    1. Open Rider.

    2. Go to View > Tool Windows > NuGet.

    3. Go to Sources tab.

    4. Choose the C:\Users\Úmbraco\AppData\Roaming\NuGet\NuGet.Config to add the feed globally.

    5. Click the green + button in the New Feed field.

    Open the new feed menu
    1. The New feed dialog opens.

    2. Enter the desired name in the Name field.

    3. Enter https://www.myget.org/F/umbraconightly/api/v3/index.json in the URL field.

    circle-info

    Leave the User, Password fields empty, and the Enabled checkbox ticked.

    Adding the feed
    1. Click OK.

    Now the feed is added as a source named Umbraco Nightly.

    hashtag
    Finding the latest nightly version

    In the previous steps, we've added the feed and are now ready to install the nightly build.

    However, which version should we install? This is, in particular, an issue if we want to create a new site using the dotnet template. The dotnet command does not allow us to use wildcard characters to install the newest version.

    Using IDE, we can see a list of available versions in both Visual Studio and Rider. We can then use that version to install the template.

    Here we're going to assume that you want to create a brand new site with the dotnet template. The approach is the same if you're updating an existing site. You'll click the Update button for the Umbraco.Cms package instead of installing the template through the terminal.

    Let's look at how we can find the latest version of the nightly build:

    • Using Visual Studio

    • Using Rider

    hashtag
    Option 1: Using Visual Studio

    You can use the package manager in Visual Studio to browse the available template versions.

    1. Open Visual Studio.

    2. Go to Tools > NuGet Package Manager > Manage NuGet Packages For Solution...

    Opening the Nuget Package Manager
    1. Select Umbraco Nightly from the Package source dropdown in the NuGet - Solution window.

    Select the nightly NuGet feed
    1. Check the Include prerelease checkbox.

    2. Search for Umbraco.Templates in the Browse field.

    3. Choose that package.

    4. Click on the Version dropdown and see the available nightly builds.

    5. Choose the applicable version and note down the version number.

    Find the version

    hashtag
    Option 2: Using Rider

    You can use the NuGet window in Rider to browse the available template versions.

    1. Open Rider.

    2. Go to the Packages tab in the NuGet window..

    3. Select Umbraco Nightly from the All Feeds dropdown.

    Choose the feed
    1. Check the Prerelase checkbox.

    2. Search for Umbraco.Templates in the Search field.

    3. Choose that package.

    4. Click on the Version drop down and see the available nightly builds.

    5. Choose the applicable version and note down the version number

    Find the version

    hashtag
    Installing the latest nightly version template

    Now that our feed is added and we know the exact version we're ready to install our template.

    To install the latest nightly version template:

    1. Open your command prompt.

    2. Run the following command using the latest version:

    With that, we've successfully installed the latest nightly build of Umbraco.

    All we have to do now is to create a site using the dotnet new umbraco -n MyAwesomeNightlySite command.

    For more information about installing Umbraco, see the Installation article.

    Adding the nightly feed as a NuGet source
    Finding the latest nightly version
    Serilog:WriteToarrow-up-right
    Logging
    Compact Log Viewerarrow-up-right

    Grid Editors

    A grid editor is the component responsible for getting data into the grid - that could be a text field or a media picker. They're built in the same way as a property editor thus consists of 3 parts:

    • .html view file

    • .js controller

    • .cshtml server side renderer

    The view is what the editor sees, the controller handles how it acts and the cshtml determines how the entered data is rendered in the template.

    hashtag
    Default configuration

    Grid editors are specified in /config/grid.editors.config.js. By default this file doesn't exist, so before you attempt to extend the configuration, make sure to create it first.

    The default items in the config file are as follows below. It is recommended that you copy all of editors below before you add more, in case some of them are already in use.

    If you don't add the editors below to this config file then they won't be available in your grid editors, even if there are existing grid datatypes already using these editors.

    circle-info

    You will need to restart your site before any new customizations become available to use.

    hashtag
    Default Grid editors

    Grid editor are created in the JSON format and each editor is an object like so:

    hashtag
    Custom Grid editors

    You can customize the built-in editors to tailor the grid to your need.

    hashtag
    package.manifest

    It is recommended that you define custom editors in a package.manifest file (not in the config file described above) like so:

    While the root JSON element of /config/grid.editors.config.js is an array of grid editors, package.manifest files start with a JSON object with a number of different properties - one of them being gridEditors.

    The package manifest should be placed in a folder inside the /App_Plugins/ folder - for instance /App_Plugins/{YourPackageName}/package.manifest. You can define as many grid editors you want and it can be done over multiple manifests so you can use grid editors from packages etc. With the package.manifest file in place, Umbraco will automatically pick it up during startup.

    You can read more about package.manifest files in general at the page.

    Grid editor configuration

    For a grid editor, the required values are:

    • name: The name of the editor

    • alias: Unique alias of the editor

    • icon

    circle-info

    You can also add a name template for generating grid item labels using the syntax {{ value.propertyAlias }}.

    • If you would like to include the index position in the label, you can use {{$index}}.

    The built-in views you can use are:

    • textstring

    • rte

    • embed

    In most cases you will either use the textstring or media view, or built your own from scratch. The textstring and media editors come with some additional configuration to make it quick to customise these.

    Sample textstring config

    In this sample, the config.style value is applied to the editor so users can see an accurate preview in the backoffice. This will be applied as as inline styling to the textarea in the backoffice.

    The config.markup is the string rendered server side in your template. #value#will be replaced with the actual value

    Sample media config

    In this sample config.size will resize the image according to height and width. The above example will result in a rendered image that is 200x200 pixels no matter the size of the uploaded image. If the ratio of the size differs from the uploaded image it is possible to set a focal point that determines how the image should be cropped.

    Sample macro config

    In this sample a new option will appear in the Choose type of content with direct access to the macro.

    Upgrade your project

    This is the guide for upgrading existing installations in general.

    In this article, you will find everything you need to upgrade your Umbraco CMS project.

    You will find instructions on how to upgrade to a new minor or major version as well as how to run upgrades unattended.

    • Before you upgrade

    • Upgrade to a new Major

    hashtag
    Before you upgrade

    The following lists a few things to be aware of before initiating an upgrade of your Umbraco CMS project.

    • Sometimes there are exceptions to general upgrade guidelines. These are listed in the . Be sure to read this article before moving on.

    • Check if your setup meets the for the new versions you will be upgrading your project to.

    • Things may go wrong for different reasons. Be sure to ALWAYS keep a backup of both your site's files and the database. This way you can always return to a version that you know works.

    circle-info

    It is necessary to run the upgrade installer on each environment of your Umbraco site. This means that you need to repeat the steps below on each of your environments in order to complete the upgrade.

    hashtag
    Legacy Umbraco

    The steps outlined in this article apply to modern Umbraco from version 10 and later versions.

    Are you upgrading to a minor for Umbraco 6, 7, or 8 you can find the appropriate guide below:

    hashtag
    Upgrade to a new Major

    You can upgrade to a new major of Umbraco CMS directly by using NuGet.

    circle-exclamation

    Switching to a new major of Umbraco CMS also means switching to a new .NET version. You need to make sure that any packages used on your site are compatible with this version before upgrading.

    The package compatibility can be checked on the package's download page. Locate the Project compatibility area and select View details to check version-specific compatibility.

    hashtag
    Choose the correct .NET version

    Use the table below to determine which .NET version to upgrade to when going through the steps below.

    CMS version
    .NET version

    hashtag
    Upgrade your project using Visual Studio

    It's recommended that you upgrade the site offline and test the upgrade fully before deploying it to the production environment.

    1. Stop your site in IIS to prevent any changes from being made while you are upgrading.

    2. Open your Umbraco project in Visual Studio.

    3. Right-click on the project name in the Solution Explorer and select Properties.

    circle-info

    If you have other packages installed such as Umbraco Forms, then before upgrading Umbraco.CMS you will need to upgrade the packages first. Consult the if relevant.

    1. Make sure that your connection string has TrustServerCertificate=True in order to complete the upgrade successfully:

    1. Restart your site in IIS, then build and run your project to finish the installation.

    circle-info

    In Umbraco 13, we have moved to using the .

    If you have added custom code to the startup.cs file, we recommend moving the code into a Composer after upgrading.

    circle-exclamation

    If your database experiences timeout issues after an upgrade, it might be due to 'startupTimeLimit' configuration.

    To fix the issue, try increasing the in the web.config file. Additionally, you can set the value in the in the appsettings.json file.

    hashtag
    Upgrade to a new Minor

    NuGet installs the latest version of the package when you use the dotnet add package command unless you specify a package version:

    dotnet add package Umbraco.Cms --version <VERSION>

    Add a package reference to your project by executing the dotnet add package Umbraco.Cms command in the directory that contains your project file.

    Run dotnet restore to install the package.

    circle-exclamation

    For v9: If you are using SQL CE in your project you will need to run dotnet add package Umbraco.Cms.SqlCe --version <VERSION> before running the dotnet restore command. From v10, SQL CE has been replaced with SQLite so a dotnet restore should be sufficient. If this is not working then you will need to run dotnet add package Umbraco.Cms.Persistence.Sqlite --version <VERSION> and then dotnet restore.

    When the command completes, open the .csproj file to make sure the package reference was updated:

    hashtag
    Run an unattended upgrade

    When upgrading your Umbraco project, it is possible to enable the upgrade to run unattended. This means that you will not need to run through the installation wizard when upgrading.

    Below you will find the steps you need to take in order to upgrade your project unattended.

    circle-info

    Are you running a load balanced setup with multiple servers and environments?

    Check out the section about .

    hashtag
    Enable the unattended upgrade feature

    1. Add the Umbraco:Cms:Unattended:UpgradeUnattended configuration key.

    2. Set the value of the key to true.

    hashtag
    Run the upgrade

    With the correct configuration applied, the project will be upgraded on the next boot.

    hashtag
    Boot order

    The Runtime level will use Run instead of Upgrade to allow the website to continue to boot up directly after the migration is run. This happens instead of initiating the otherwise required restart.

    circle-info

    The upgrade is run after Composers but before Components and the UmbracoApplicationStartingNotification. This is because the migration requires services that are registered in Composers and Components require that Umbraco and the database are ready.

    hashtag
    Unattended upgrades in a load balanced setup

    Follow the steps outlined below to use unattended upgrades in a load balanced setup.

    1. Upgrade Umbraco via NuGet ()

    2. Deploy to all environments.

    3. Set the Umbraco:CMS:Unattended:UpgradeUnattended configuration key to true for the Main server only

    Image Cropper

    Returns: MediaWithCrops

    Returns a path to an image, along with information about focal point and available crops.

    When the Image Cropper is used on a Media Type the crops are shared between all usages of a Media Item. This is called global crops.

    If the Image Cropper is used on a Document Type, the file and crops will be local to the Document.

    Notice that it is possible make local crops on shared Media Items via the .

    Login

    In this article you can learn the various ways of customizing the Umbraco backoffice login screen and form.

    To access the backoffice, you will need to login. You can do this by adding /umbraco at the end of your website URL, for example http://mywebsite.com/umbraco.

    You will be presented with a login form similar to this:

    The login screen contains a Greeting, Email, Password field and optionally a Forgotten password link

    Below, you will find instructions on how to customize the login screen.

    Could not load type umbraco.BusinessLogic.Utils.TypeFinder from assembly businesslogic, Version=1.0.5031.21336, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=null.
    builder.WebHost.UseStaticWebAssets();
    {
        "Umbraco": {
            "CMS": {
                "Runtime": {
                    "Mode" : "Development"
                },
                "ModelsBuilder":{
                    "ModelsMode": "SourceCodeAuto"
                }
            }
        }
    }
    <RazorCompileOnBuild>false</RazorCompileOnBuild>
    <RazorCompileOnPublish>false</RazorCompileOnPublish>
    {
      "Umbraco": {
        "CMS": {
          "Runtime": {
            "Mode": "Production"
          },
          "Global": {
            "UseHttps": true
          },
          "ModelsBuilder": {
            "ModelsMode": "Nothing"
          },
          "WebRouting": {
            "UmbracoApplicationUrl": "https://<REPLACE_WITH_YOUR_PRIMARY_DOMAIN>/"
          }
        }
      }
    }
    using System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis;
    using Microsoft.Extensions.Options;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Composing;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.Models;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Runtime;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Runtime.RuntimeModeValidators;
    
    public class RuntimeModeValidatorComposer : IComposer
    {
        public void Compose(IUmbracoBuilder builder)
            => builder.RuntimeModeValidators()
                .Remove<UmbracoApplicationUrlValidator>()
                .Add<DisableElectionForSingleServerValidator>();
    }
    
    public class DisableElectionForSingleServerValidator : IRuntimeModeValidator
    {
        private readonly IOptionsMonitor<GlobalSettings> _globalSettings;
    
        public DisableElectionForSingleServerValidator(IOptionsMonitor<GlobalSettings> globalSettings) => _globalSettings = globalSettings;
    
        public bool Validate(RuntimeMode runtimeMode, [NotNullWhen(false)] out string? validationErrorMessage)
        {
            if (runtimeMode == RuntimeMode.Production && _globalSettings.CurrentValue.DisableElectionForSingleServer == false)
            {
                validationErrorMessage = "Disable primary server election (and support for load balancing) to improve startup performance.";
                return false;
            }
    
            validationErrorMessage = null;
            return true;
        }
    }
    {{(myPropertyAlias[0].mediaKey | mediaItemResolver).name}}
    {{myPropertyAlias[0].mediaKey ? ('umb://media/'+myPropertyAlias[0].mediaKey.split("-").join("") | ncNodeName) : 'No Image' }}
    {
        "name": "MyFilters",
        "version": "1.0.0",
        "allowPackageTelemetry": false,
        "javascript": [
            "/App_Plugins/MyFilters/myFilter.filter.js"
        ]
    }
    angular.module("umbraco.filters").filter("myFilter", function () {
      return function (input, parameter1, parameter2, etc) {
          // Apply any custom logic to modify the output value and return a string
          return `My filter says: "${input}"`;
      }
    });
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models
    @{
        var typedMultiMediaPicker = Model.Value<IEnumerable<MediaWithCrops>>("medias");
        foreach (var entry in typedMultiMediaPicker)
        {
            <img src="@entry.MediaUrl()" style="width:200px" />
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models
    @{
        var listOfImages = Model.Value<IEnumerable<IPublishedContent>>("medias");
        foreach (var image in listOfImages)
        {
            <img src="@image.Url()" alt="@image.Name" />
        }
    }
    @{
        var typedMultiMediaPicker = Model.Medias;
        foreach (var entry in typedMultiMediaPicker)
        {
            <img src="@entry.MediaUrl()" style="width:200px" />
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models
    @{
        var typedMediaPickerSingle = Model.Value<MediaWithCrops>("media");
        if (typedMediaPickerSingle != null)
        {
            <img src="@typedMediaPickerSingle.MediaUrl()" style="width:200px" alt="@typedMediaPickerSingle.Value("alt")" />
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models
    @{
        var typedMediaPickerSingle = Model.Media;
        if (typedMediaPickerSingle is MediaWithCrops mediaEntry)
        {
            <img src="@mediaEntry.MediaUrl()" style="width:200px"/>
        }
    }
    @{
        foreach (var entry in Model.Medias)
        {
            <img src="@entry.GetCropUrl("cropAlias")"/>
        }
    }
    @{
        foreach (var entry in Model.Medias)
        {
            <img src="@Url.GetCropUrl(entry, "cropAlias")"/>
        }
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Get the media you want to assign to the media picker 
        var media = Umbraco.Media("bca8d5fa-de0a-4f2b-9520-02118d8329a8");
    
        // Create an Udi of the media
        var udi = Udi.Create(Constants.UdiEntityType.Media, media.Key);
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'featuredBanner'. 
        content.SetValue("featuredBanner", udi.ToString());
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234); 
    }
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'featuredBanner'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor, x => x.FeaturedBanner).Alias, udi.ToString());
    }
    dotnet nuget add source "https://www.myget.org/F/umbraconightly/api/v3/index.json" -n "Umbraco Nightly"
    dotnet new install Umbraco.Templates
    using Azure;
    using Azure.Data.Tables;
    using Serilog.Events;
    using Serilog.Formatting.Compact.Reader;
    using Serilog.Sinks.AzureTableStorage;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Logging.Viewer;
    using ITableEntity = Azure.Data.Tables.ITableEntity;
    
    namespace My.Website;
    
    public class AzureTableLogViewer : SerilogLogViewerSourceBase
    {
        public AzureTableLogViewer(ILogViewerConfig logViewerConfig, Serilog.ILogger serilogLog, ILogLevelLoader logLevelLoader)
            : base(logViewerConfig, logLevelLoader, serilogLog)
        {
        }
    
        public override bool CanHandleLargeLogs => true;
    
        // This method will not be called - as we have indicated that this 'CanHandleLargeLogs'
        public override bool CheckCanOpenLogs(LogTimePeriod logTimePeriod) => throw new NotImplementedException();
    
        protected override IReadOnlyList<LogEvent> GetLogs(LogTimePeriod logTimePeriod, ILogFilter filter, int skip, int take)
        {
            //Replace ACCOUNT_NAME and KEY with your actual Azure Storage Account details. The "Logs" parameter refers to the table name where logs will be stored and retrieved from.
            var client =
                new TableClient(
                    "DefaultEndpointsProtocol=https;AccountName=ACCOUNT_NAME;AccountKey=KEY;EndpointSuffix=core.windows.net",
                    "Logs");
    
            // Table storage does not support skip, only take, so the best we can do is to not fetch more entities than we need in total.
            // See: https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/rest/api/storageservices/writing-linq-queries-against-the-table-service#returning-the-top-n-entities for more info.
            var requiredEntities = skip + take;
            IEnumerable<AzureTableLogEntity> results = client.Query<AzureTableLogEntity>().Take(requiredEntities);
    
    		return results
    			.Skip(skip)
    			.Take(take)
    			.Select(x => LogEventReader.ReadFromString(x.Data))
                // Filter by timestamp to avoid retrieving all logs from the table, preventing memory and performance issues
    			.Where(evt => evt.Timestamp >= logTimePeriod.StartTime.Date &&
    				evt.Timestamp <= logTimePeriod.EndTime.Date.AddDays(1).AddSeconds(-1))
    			.Where(filter.TakeLogEvent)
    			.ToList();
        }
    
        public override IReadOnlyList<SavedLogSearch>? GetSavedSearches()
        {
            //This method is optional. If you store saved searches in Azure Table Storage, implement fetching logic here.
            return base.GetSavedSearches();
        }
    
        public override IReadOnlyList<SavedLogSearch>? AddSavedSearch(string? name, string? query)
        {
            //This method is optional. If you store saved searches in Azure Table Storage, implement adding logic here.
            return base.AddSavedSearch(name, query);
        }
    
        public override IReadOnlyList<SavedLogSearch>? DeleteSavedSearch(string? name, string? query)
        {
            //This method is optional. If you store saved searches in Azure Table Storage, implement deleting logic here.
            return base.DeleteSavedSearch(name, query);
        }
    }
    
    public class AzureTableLogEntity : LogEventEntity, ITableEntity
    {
        public DateTimeOffset? Timestamp { get; set; }
    
        public ETag ETag { get; set; }
    }
    using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Composing;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.DependencyInjection;
    
    namespace My.Website;
    
    public class LogViewerSavedSearches : IComposer
    {
        public void Compose(IUmbracoBuilder builder) => builder.SetLogViewer<AzureTableLogViewer>();
    }
    {
    "Name": "AzureTableStorage",
    "Args": {
      "storageTableName": "LogEventEntity",
      "formatter": "Serilog.Formatting.Compact.CompactJsonFormatter, Serilog.Formatting.Compact",
      "connectionString": "DefaultEndpointsProtocol=https;AccountName=ACCOUNT_NAME;AccountKey=KEY;EndpointSuffix=core.windows.net"}
    }

    limitToarrow-up-right

    AngularJS native truncate

    String

    n: maximum length of the string

    truncatearrow-up-right

    Umbraco's richer truncate function

    String

    wordwise: boolean to indicate whether to truncate a string mid-word or not max: maximum length of the string tail (optional): string to indicate a truncated string, "…" by default

    umbWordLimitarrow-up-right

    Truncates to a number of words (rather than characters)

    String

    n: maximum number of words in string

    umbCmsTitleCasearrow-up-right

    Converts a string to title case

    String

    umbCmsJoinArrayarrow-up-right

    Joins an array into one string

    Array (of string or object)

    separator: string used to join values together, e.g. ", " prop (optional): string key indicating which property to join when used on an array of objects

    How to use Language Variants in Umbraco
    Learn how to use the Log Viewer to read and understand logs for your Umbraco CMS website.
    ,
    mceImage
    ,
    subscript
    ,
    superscript
    ,
    styleselect
  • Remove the command: mceSpellCheck

  • : Icon shown to the editor, uses same icon classes as the rest of
  • view the view defines the editor used to enter a value. By default Umbraco will look in /umbraco/views/propertyeditors/grid/editors for a html view to use - but you can pass in your own path

  • If your editor links to a content, media or member node, you can use the Angular filter {{ value.udi | ncNodeName }} to show the node name rather than the node ID.

  • If your editor is a rich text editor, you can use the Angular filter {{ value | ncRichText }} to show the unformatted text.

  • macro

  • media

  • Package Manifest

    Before upgrading to a new major version, check if the packages you're using are compatible with the version you're upgrading to. On the package's download page, in the Project compatibility area, click View details to check version-specific compatibility.

    Select the .NET version from the Target Framework drop-down.

  • Go to Tools > NuGet Package Manager > Manage NuGet Packages for Solution...

  • Go to the Installed tab in the NuGet Package manager.

  • Upgrade Umbraco.Cms.

    a. Select the correct version from the Version drop-down.

    b. Click Install to upgrade your project.

  • .
  • Boot the Main server and the upgrade will run automatically.

  • Wait for the upgrade to complete.

  • Boot the Read-Only servers and make sure they do not show the “upgrade required” screen.

  • 13

    8.0

    12

    7.0

    11

    7.0

    10

    6.0.5

    Upgrade to a new Minor
    Run an unattended upgrade
    version-specific guide
    requirements
    Minor upgrades for Umbraco 8chevron-right
    Minor upgrades for Umbraco 7chevron-right
    version specific upgrade notes for Umbraco Formsarrow-up-right
    Minimal Hosting Modelarrow-up-right
    ASP.NET Core Module'sarrow-up-right
    startupTimeLimitarrow-up-right
    Connection Timeoutarrow-up-right
    ConnectionStringarrow-up-right
    Unattended upgrades in a load balanced setup
    see instructions above
    <plugins>
        <plugin loadOnFrontend="true">code</plugin>
        <plugin loadOnFrontend="true">paste</plugin>
        <plugin loadOnFrontend="true">umbracolink</plugin>
        <plugin loadOnFrontend="true">anchor</plugin>
        <plugin loadOnFrontend="true">charmap</plugin>
        <plugin loadOnFrontend="true">table</plugin>
        <plugin loadOnFrontend="true">lists</plugin>
    </plugins>
    [
        {
            "name": "Rich text editor",
            "alias": "rte",
            "view": "rte",
            "icon": "icon-article"
        },
        {
            "name": "Image",
            "nameTemplate": "{{ value && value.udi ? (value.udi | ncNodeName) : '' }}",
            "alias": "media",
            "view": "media",
            "icon": "icon-picture"
        },
        {
            "name": "Macro",
            "nameTemplate": "{{ value && value.macroAlias ? value.macroAlias : '' }}",
            "alias": "macro",
            "view": "macro",
            "icon": "icon-settings-alt"
        },
        {
            "name": "Embed",
            "alias": "embed",
            "view": "embed",
            "icon": "icon-movie-alt"
        },
        {
            "name": "Headline",
            "nameTemplate": "{{ value }}",
            "alias": "headline",
            "view": "textstring",
            "icon": "icon-coin",
            "config": {
                "style": "font-size: 36px; line-height: 45px; font-weight: bold",
                "markup": "<h1>#value#</h1>"
            }
        },
        {
            "name": "Quote",
            "nameTemplate": "{{ value ? value.substring(0,32) + (value.length > 32 ? '...' : '') : '' }}",
            "alias": "quote",
            "view": "textstring",
            "icon": "icon-quote",
            "config": {
                "style": "border-left: 3px solid #ccc; padding: 10px; color: #ccc; font-family: serif; font-style: italic; font-size: 18px",
                "markup": "<blockquote>#value#</blockquote>"
            }
        }
    ]
    {
        "name": "Rich text editor",
        "alias": "rte",
        "view": "rte",
        "icon": "icon-article"
    }
    {
        "gridEditors":
        [
            {
                "name": "Rich text editor",
                "alias": "rte",
                "view": "rte",
                "icon": "icon-article"
            }
        ]
    }
    {
        "name": "Headline",
        "alias": "headline",
        "view": "textstring",
        "icon": "icon-coin",
        "config": {
            "style": "font-size: 36px; line-height: 45px; font-weight: bold",
            "markup": "<h1>#value#</h1>"
        }
    }
    {
        "name": "Square Image",
        "alias": "squareImage",
        "view": "media",
        "icon": "icon-picture",
        "config": {
            "size": {
                "height": 200,
                "width": 200
            }
        }
    }
    {
        "name": "Your Custom Macro",
        "alias": "yourCustomMacroGridEditor",
        "view": "macro",
        "icon": "icon-smiley",
        "config": {
            "macroAlias": "AliasOfYourMacro"
        }
    }
    "ConnectionStrings": {
        "umbracoDbDSN": "Server=YourLocalSQLServerHere;Database=NameOfYourDatabaseHere;User Id=NameOfYourUserHere;Password=YourPasswordHere;TrustServerCertificate=True"
    }
    .csproj
    <ItemGroup>
      <PackageReference Include="Umbraco.Cms" Version="x.x.x" />
    </ItemGroup>
    appsettings.json
    {
        "Umbraco": {
            "CMS": {
                "Unattended": {
                    "UpgradeUnattended": true
                }
            }
        }
    }
    hashtag
    Settings

    hashtag
    Prevalues

    You can add, edit & delete crop presets the cropper UI can use.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    Image Cropper Data Type Definition

    hashtag
    Content Example

    The Image Cropper provides a UI to upload an image, set a focal point on the image, and use predefined crops.

    By default, images in the Image Cropper will be shown based on a set focal point and only use specific crops if they are available.

    The Image Cropper comes with 3 modes:

    • Uploading an image

    • Setting a focal point

    • Cropping the image to predefined crops

    hashtag
    Uploading images

    The editor exposes a drop area for files. Select it to upload an image.

    Image Cropper Upload

    hashtag
    Set focal point

    By default, the Image Cropper allows the editor to set a focal point on the uploaded image.

    All the preset crops are shown to give the editor a preview of what the image will look like on the frontend.

    Image Cropper Focal point

    hashtag
    Crop and resize

    The editor can fit the crop to the image to ensure that the image is presented as intended.

    Image Cropper Crop

    hashtag
    Powered by ImageSharp.Web

    ImageSharp.Webarrow-up-right is image processing middleware for ASP.NET.

    We bundle this package with Umbraco and you can therefore take full advantage of all its features for resizing and format changing. Learn more about the built in processing commands in the official ImageSharp documentationarrow-up-right.

    hashtag
    Sample code

    The Image Cropper comes with an API to generate crop URLs. You can also access the raw data directly as a dynamic object.

    For rendering a cropped media item, the .GetCropUrl is used:

    The third parameter is HtmlEncode and is by default set to true. This means you only need to define the parameter if you want to disable HTML encoding.

    hashtag
    Example to output a "banner" crop from a cropper property with the property alias "customCropper"

    Or, alternatively using the MediaWithCrops extension method:

    hashtag
    Example to dynamically create a crop using the focal point - in this case 300 x 400px image

    hashtag
    CSS background example to output a "banner" crop

    Set the htmlEncode to false so that the URL is not HTML encoded

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    To update a content property value you need the Content Service.

    The following sample demonstrates how to add or change the value of an Image Cropper property programmatically. The sample creates an API controller with an action, which must be invoked via a POST request to the URL written above the action.

    If you use Models Builder to generate source code (modes SourceCodeAuto or SourceCodeManual), you can use nameof([generated property name]) to access the desired property without using a magic string:

    hashtag
    Get all the crop urls for a specific image

    Crop URLs are not limited to usage within a view. IPublishedContent has a GetCropUrl extension method, which can be used to access crop URLs anywhere.

    The following sample demonstrates how to use GetCropUrl to retrieve URLs for all crops defined on a specific image:

    hashtag
    Sample on how to change the format of the image

    Below the example to output a PNG using ImageSharp.Web formatarrow-up-right command.

    Media Picker Property Editor
    hashtag
    Greeting

    The login screen features a greeting which you can personalize by overriding the existing language translation keys. To do this, create a 'user' translation file for the default language of your Umbraco site, (usually en-US) to override the greetings. For en-US, you'd create a file called: en_us.user.xml in the directory ~/config/lang/. Then take the relevant keys (listed below) and add them to your ~/config/lang/en_us.user.xml file, and update the greetings as necessary.

    Note: the config directory needs to be in the root of your project (not the wwwroot).

    • Before the changes takes place you will need to restart the site.

    You can customize other text on the login screen as well. First, grab the default values and keys from the en_us.xmlarrow-up-right in the Umbraco CMS GitHub repository. Thereafter, copy the ones you want to translate into the ~/config/lang/en_us.user.xml file.

    hashtag
    Password reset

    The Forgotten password? link allows your backoffice users to reset their password. To use this feature, you will need to add the following key to the Umbraco.Cms.Security section in the appsettings.json file:

    Set it to true to enable the password reset feature, and false to disable the feature.

    You will also need to configure a Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server in your appsettings.json file. When you get a successful result on the SMTP configuration when running a health check in the backoffice, you are good to go!

    An example:

    hashtag
    Custom background image and logo

    It is possible to customize the background image and the logo for the backoffice login screen by adding the "Content" section in the appsettings.json file:

    The LoginBackgroundImage, LoginLogoImage, and LoginLogoImageAlternative are referenced from the /wwwroot/umbraco/ folder.

    The LoginLogoImage is displayed on top of the LoginBackgroundImage and the LoginLogoImageAlternative is displayed when the LoginLogoImage is not available, for example on small resolutions.

    hashtag
    Custom CSS

    You can also customize the login screen by adding a custom CSS file. To do this, you will need to add a new file inside the ~/App_Plugins folder, for example ~/App_Plugins/MyCustomLoginScreen/my-custom-login-screen.css.

    You can then add your custom CSS to the file:

    This will change the color of the SVG graphics (curves) shown on the login screen. You can also hide the curves by adding the following CSS:

    hashtag
    Load the custom CSS file

    To tell Umbraco about your custom CSS file, you will need to add a package.manifest file. The package.manifest file should look like this:

    hashtag
    Custom CSS properties reference

    The following CSS properties are available for customization:

    CSS Property
    Description
    Default Value

    --umb-login-background

    The background of the layout

    #f4f4f4

    --umb-login-primary-color

    The color of the headline

    #283a97

    --umb-login-text-color

    The color of the text

    #000

    --umb-login-header-font-size

    The font-size of the headline

    The CSS custom properties may change in future versions of Umbraco. You can always find the latest values in the login layout elementarrow-up-right in the Umbraco CMS GitHub repository.

    Login screen

    Multinode Treepicker

    Alias: Umbraco.MultiNodeTreePicker

    Returns: IEnumerable<IPublishedContent>

    hashtag
    Settings

    The Multinode Treepicker allows you to configure the type of tree to render and what part of the tree that should be rendered. For content it allows you to select a dynamic root node based on the current document using the multinode tree picker.

    hashtag
    Node type

    Set the type of node, the root node of the tree, or query for the root node.

    For querying content you can specify a dynamic root:

    When you specify the dynamic root, you are able to navigate the tree relative to a node.

    First you have to specify a origin, from where the query will start.

    You have the following options:

    • Root

      • The root is the first level item of the current nodes subtree.

    • Parent

    Often an origin is a good dynamic root. It is also possible to execute multiple steps from the origin to navigate the tree to find another root.

    You have the following options:

    • Nearest Ancestor or Self

      • Finds the nearest ancestor or the item itself, that fits with one of the configured document types.

    • Furthest Ancestor or Self

    Each query step takes the output from the last step (or the origin) as input.

    hashtag
    Adding a custom query step

    Custom query steps can be used to solve some specific use cases.

    To add a custom query step you need to append it to the existing query steps. This can be done from a composer:

    The implementation of a query step takes in a collection of origins and information about the query step. The collection is taken from where the name specified in the UI can be found.

    The code required to create a custom query step is like in the below example.

    You can inject dependencies into the constructor. Some interesting dependencies could be custom repositories, or the IVariationContextAccessor, if you wanna use the current culture.

    The ExecuteAsync method gets a collection of content keys from the last executed query step or the origin. It has to return a new collection of content keys.

    hashtag
    Filter out items with type

    Allow or disallow tree nodes with a certain content type alias.

    Enter typeAlias,altTypeAlias to only allow selecting nodes with those alias'. Enter !typeAlias,altTypeAlias to only allow selecting nodes not with those alias'.

    hashtag
    Minimum/maximum number of items

    Set a limit on the number of items allowed to be selected.

    hashtag
    Data Type Definition Example

    hashtag
    Content Example

    Consider the following tree structure where Document Type alias is presented in square brackets.

    • Codegarden

      • 2023 [year]

        • Talks [talks]

    Consider configuring a picker on the talk Document Type to choose a stage of the talk. Here you only want to present the stages for the actual year. To do this, you need to choose the parent as origin.

    Imagine being on the Umbraco anno MMXXIII node. This means the collection of content keys passed into the first query step will only contain the Talks content node.

    • First you can then query for the nearest ancestors of type year. This means the 2023 will be returned.

    • Next, you can query for the nearest descendants of type stages.

    When opening the picker on the Umbraco anno MMXXIII node, it will now show the children of the node on path Codegarden => 2023 => Stages.

    hashtag
    MVC View Example

    hashtag
    Without Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    With Modelsbuilder

    hashtag
    Add values programmatically

    See the example below to see how a value can be added or changed programmatically. To update a value of a property editor you need the .

    circle-info

    The example below demonstrates how to add values programmatically using a Razor view. However, this is used for illustrative purposes only and is not the recommended method for production environments.

    Although the use of a GUID is preferable, you can also use the numeric ID to get the page:

    If Modelsbuilder is enabled you can get the alias of the desired property without using a magic string:

    Block List

    Alias: Umbraco.BlockList

    Returns: IEnumerable<BlockListItem>

    Block List is a list editing property editor, using Element Types to define the list item schema.

    circle-info

    The Block List replaces the obsolete Nested Content editor.

    hashtag
    Configure Block List

    The Block List property editor is configured in the same way as any standard property editor, via the Data Types admin interface.

    To set up your Block List Editor property, create a new Data Type and select Block List from the list of available property editors.

    Then you will see the configuration options for a Block List as shown below.

    The Data Type editor allows you to configure the following properties:

    • Available Blocks - Here you will define the Block Types to be available for use in the property. Read more on how to set up Block Types below.

    • Amount - Sets the minimum and/or maximum number of blocks that should be allowed in the list.

    • Single block mode - When in Single block mode, the output will be BlockListItem<>

    hashtag
    Setup Block Types

    Block Types are Element Types which need to be created before you can start configuring them as Block Types. This can be done either directly from the property editor setup process, or you can set them up beforehand and add them to the block list after.

    Once you have added an element type as a Block Type on your Block List Data Type you will have the option to configure it further.

    Each Block has a set of properties that are optional to configure. They are described below.

    hashtag
    Editor Appearance

    By configuring the properties in the group you can customize the user experience for your content editors when they work with the blocks in the Content section.

    • Label - Define a label for the appearance of the Block in the editor. The label can use AngularJS template string syntax to display values of properties.

    • Custom view - Overwrite the AngularJS view for the block presentation in the Content editor. Use this to make a more visual presentation of the block or even make your own editing experience by adding your own AngularJS controller to the view.

    • Custom stylesheet - Pick your own stylesheet to be used for this block in the Content editor. By adding a stylesheet the styling of this block will become scoped. Meaning that backoffice styles are no longer present for the view of this block.

    hashtag
    Data Models

    It is possible to use two separate Element Types for your Block Types. Its required to have one for Content and optional to add one for Settings.

    • Content model - This presents the Element Type used as model for the content section of this Block. This cannot be changed, but you can open the Element Type to perform edits or view the properties available. Useful when writing your Label.

    • Settings model - Add a Settings section to your Block based on a given Element Type. When picked you can open the Element Type or choose to remove the settings section again.

    hashtag
    Catalogue appearance

    These properties refer to how the Block is presented in the Block catalogue, when editors choose which Blocks to use for their content.

    • Background color - Define a background color to be displayed beneath the icon or thumbnail. Eg. #424242.

    • Icon color - Change the color of the Element Type icon. Eg. #242424.

    The thumbnails for the catalogue are presented in the format of 16:10, and we recommend a resolution of 400px width and 250px height.

    hashtag
    Advanced

    These properties are relevant when you work with custom views.

    • Force hide content editor - If you made a custom view that enables you to edit the content part of a block and you are using default editing mode (not inline) you might want to hide the content-editor from the block editor overlay.

    hashtag
    Editing Blocks

    When viewing a Block List editor in the Content section for the first time, you will be presented with the option to Add content.

    Clicking the Add content button brings up the Block Catalogue.

    The Block Catalogue looks different depending on the amount of available Blocks and their catalogue appearance.

    Click the Block Type you wish to create and a new Block will appear in the list.

    Depending on whether your Block List Editor is setup to use default or inline editing mode you will see one of the following things happening:

    In default mode you will enter the editing overlay of that Block:

    In inline editing mode the new Blocks will expand to show its inline editor:

    More Blocks can be added to the list by clicking the Add content button or using the inline Add content button that appears on hover between or above existing Blocks.

    To reorder the Blocks, click and drag a Block up or down to place in the desired order.

    To delete a Block click the trash-bin icon appearing on hover.

    hashtag
    Rendering Block List Content

    Rendering the stored value of your Block List property can be done in two ways.

    hashtag
    1. Default rendering

    You can choose to use the built-in rendering mechanism for rendering blocks via a Partial View for each block.

    The default rendering method is named GetBlockListHtml() and comes with a few options to go with it. The typical use could be:

    "MyBlocks" above is the alias for the Block List editor.

    If using ModelsBuilder the example can be simplified:

    Example:

    To make this work you will need to create a Partial View for each block, named by the alias of the Element Type that is being used as Content Model.

    These partial views must be placed in this folder: Views/Partials/BlockList/Components/. Example: Views/Partials/BlockList/Components/MyElementTypeAliasOfContent.cshtml.

    A Partial View will receive the model of Umbraco.Core.Models.Blocks.BlockListItem. This gives you the option to access properties of the Content and Settings section of your Block.

    In the following example of a Partial view for a Block Type, the MyElementTypeAliasOfContentand MyElementTypeAliasOfSettings should correspond with the selected Element Type Alias for the given model in your case.

    Example:

    With ModelsBuilder:

    hashtag
    2. Build your own rendering

    A built-in value converter is available to use the data as you like. Call the Value<T> method with a generic type of IEnumerable<BlockListItem> and the stored value will be returned as a list of BlockListItem entities.

    Example:

    Each item is a BlockListItem entity that contains two main properties Content and Settings. Each of these is a IPublishedElement which means you can use all the value converters you are used to using.

    Example:

    hashtag
    Extract Block List Content data

    In some cases, you might want to use the Block List Editor to hold some data and not necessarily render a view since the data should be presented in different areas on a page. An example could be a product page with variants stored in a Block List Editor.

    In this case, you can extract the variant's data using the following, which returns IEnumerable<IPublishedElement>.

    Example:

    If using ModelsBuilder the example can be simplified:

    Example:

    If you know the Block List Editor only uses a single block, you can cast the collection to a specific type T using .OfType<T>() otherwise the return value will be IEnumerable<IPublishedElement>.

    hashtag
    Build a Custom Backoffice View

    Building Custom Views for Block representations in Backoffice is the same for all Block Editors.

    Migrate content to Umbraco 8

    This guide will show you how to migrate the content from your Umbraco 7 site to a site running Umbraco 8.

    Umbraco 8 contains a lot of breaking changes and a lot of code has been cleaned up compared to Umbraco 7. Due to this, it will not be possible to do a direct upgrade from Umbraco 7 to Umbraco 8. You need to migrate your content from your Umbraco 7 site into your Umbraco 8 site and then recreate the rest in the new version.

    A content migration tool has been implemented in Umbraco 8.1.0, to help you with the transition.

    In this guide you can read more about the tool, its limitations, and how to use it in practice.

    circle-info

    <img src="@Url.GetCropUrl(Model.Photo,"square", true)" />
    <img src="@Url.GetCropUrl(Model.SecondaryPhoto, "customCropper", "banner")" />
    <img src="@Model.SecondaryPhoto.GetCropUrl("customCropper", "banner")" />
    @if (Model.Photo is not null)
    {
        <img src="@Url.GetCropUrl(Model.Photo, height: 300, width: 400)" alt="@Model.Photo.Name" />
    }
    @if (Model.Photo is not null)
    {
        var cropUrl = Url.GetCropUrl(Model.Photo, "square", false);
        <style>
            .myCssClass {
                background-image: url("@cropUrl");
                height: 400px;
                width: 400px;
            }
        </style>
        <div class="product-image-container myCssClass"></div>
    }
    using Microsoft.AspNetCore.Mvc;
    using Newtonsoft.Json;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PropertyEditors;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PropertyEditors.ValueConverters;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Controllers;
    using Umbraco.Extensions;
    
    namespace Umbraco.Docs.Samples.Web.Property_Editors_Add_Values;
    
    public class CreateImageCropperValuesController : UmbracoApiController
    {
        private readonly IContentService _contentService;
        private readonly IMediaService _mediaService;
        private readonly MediaUrlGeneratorCollection _mediaUrlGeneratorCollection;
    
    
        public CreateImageCropperValuesController(
            IContentService contentService,
            IMediaService mediaService,
            MediaUrlGeneratorCollection mediaUrlGeneratorCollection)
        {
            _contentService = contentService;
            _mediaService = mediaService;
            _mediaUrlGeneratorCollection = mediaUrlGeneratorCollection;
        }
    
        // /Umbraco/Api/CreateImageCropperValues/CreateImageCropperValues
        [HttpPost]
        public ActionResult<bool> CreateImageCropperValues()
        {
            // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
            var contentKey = Guid.Parse("89974f8b-e213-4c32-9f7a-40522d87aa2f");
    
            // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
            IContent? content = _contentService.GetById(contentKey);
            if (content == null)
            {
                return false;
            }
    
            // Create a variable for the GUID of the media item you want to use
            var mediaKey = Guid.Parse("b6d4e98a-07c0-45f9-bfcc-52994f2806b6");
    
            // Get the desired media file
            IMedia? media = _mediaService.GetById(mediaKey);
            if (media == null)
            {
                return false;
            }
    
            // Create a variable for the image cropper and set the source
            var imageCropperValue = new ImageCropperValue
            {
                Src = media.GetUrl("umbracoFile", _mediaUrlGeneratorCollection)
            };
    
            // Serialize the image cropper value
            var propertyValue = JsonConvert.SerializeObject(imageCropperValue);
    
            // Set the value of the property with alias "cropper"
            // - remember to add the "culture" parameter if "cropper" is set to vary by culture
            content.SetValue("cropper", propertyValue);
    
            return _contentService.Save(content).Success;
        }
    }
    // Set the value of the "Cropper" property on content of type MyContentType
    // - remember to add the "culture" parameter if "cropper" is set to vary by culture
    content.SetValue(nameof(MyContentType.Cropper).ToFirstLowerInvariant(), propertyValue);
    public Dictionary<string, string> GetCropUrls(IPublishedContent image)
    {
        // Get the Image Cropper property value for property with alias "umbracoFile"
        ImageCropperValue? imageCropperValue = image.Value<ImageCropperValue>("umbracoFile");
        if (imageCropperValue?.Crops == null)
        {
            return new Dictionary<string, string>();
        }
    
        // Return all crop aliases and their corresponding crop URLs as a dictionary
        var cropUrls = new Dictionary<string, string>();
        foreach (ImageCropperValue.ImageCropperCrop crop in imageCropperValue.Crops)
        {
            // Get the cropped URL and add it to the dictionary that I will return
            var cropUrl = crop.Alias != null
                ? image.GetCropUrl(crop.Alias)
                : null;
            if (cropUrl != null)
            {
                cropUrls.Add(crop.Alias!, cropUrl);
            }
        }
    
        return cropUrls;
    }
    <img src="@Url.GetCropUrl(Model.Photo, 500, 300, furtherOptions: "&format=png")" />
    <?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8" standalone="yes" ?>
    <language culture="en-US">
    	<area alias="login">
    		<key alias="greeting0">Happy super Sunday</key>
    		<key alias="greeting1">Happy manic Monday</key>
    		<key alias="greeting2">Happy tubular Tuesday</key>
    		<key alias="greeting3">Happy wonderful Wednesday</key>
    		<key alias="greeting4">Happy thunderous Thursday</key>
    		<key alias="greeting5">Happy funky Friday</key>
    		<key alias="greeting6">Happy Caturday</key>
    	</area>
    </language>
    "Umbraco": {
        "CMS": {
          "Security": {
            "AllowPasswordReset": true
          }
       }
    }
    "Umbraco": {
        "CMS": {
          "Global": {
            "Id": "xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx",
            "Smtp": {
              "From": "[email protected]",
              "Host": "127.0.0.1",
              "Username": "username",
              "Password": "password"
            }
          }
        }
    }
    "Umbraco": {
        "CMS": {
          "Content": {
            "LoginBackgroundImage": "../myImagesFolder/myLogin.jpg",
            "LoginLogoImage": "../myImagesFolder/myLogo.svg",
            "LoginLogoImageAlternative": "../myImagesFolder/myLogo.svg"
          }
       }
    }
    :root {
        --umb-login-curves-color: rgba(0, 0, 0, 0.1);
    }
    :root {
        --umb-login-curves-display: none;
    }
    {
      "css": [
        "~/App_Plugins/MyCustomLoginScreen/my-custom-login-screen.css"
      ],
      "bundleOptions": "None"
    }

    3rem

    --umb-login-header-font-size-large

    The font-size of the headline on large screens

    4rem

    --umb-login-header-secondary-font-size

    The font-size of the secondary headline

    2.4rem

    --umb-login-image

    The background of the image wrapper

    The value of the LoginBackgroundImage setting

    --umb-login-image-display

    The display of the image wrapper

    flex

    --umb-login-image-border-radius

    The border-radius of the image wrapper

    38px

    --umb-login-content-background

    The background of the content wrapper

    none

    --umb-login-content-display

    The display of the content wrapper

    flex

    --umb-login-content-width

    The width of the content wrapper

    100%

    --umb-login-content-height

    The height of the content wrapper

    100%

    --umb-login-content-border-radius

    The border-radius of the content wrapper

    0

    --umb-login-align-items

    The align-items of the main wrapper

    unset

    --umb-login-button-border-radius

    The border-radius of the buttons

    45px

    --umb-login-curves-color

    The color of the curves

    #f5c1bc

    --umb-login-curves-display

    The display of the curves

    inline

    instead of
    BlockListModel
  • Live editing mode - Enabling this will make editing of a block happening directly to the document model, making changes appear as you type.

  • Inline editing mode - Enabling this will change editing experience to inline, meaning that editing the data of blocks happens at sight as accordions.

  • Property editor width - Overwrite the width of the property editor. This field takes any valid css value for "max-width".

  • Overlay editor size - Set the size for the Content editor overlay for editing this block.

  • Thumbnail - Pick an image or SVG file to replace the icon of this Block in the catalogue.
    Examples and more details about labels and AngularJS templates.
    Read about building a Custom View for Blocks here
    Block List - Data Type Definition
    Block List - Data Type Block Configuration
    Block List - Add Content
    Block List - Setup
    Block List - example setup from Umbraco.com
    Block List - Overlay editing
    Block List - Inline editing
    Block List - Add Content
    @Html.GetBlockListHtml(Model, "MyBlocks")
    @Html.GetBlockListHtml(Model.MyBlocks)
    @inherits Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Views.UmbracoViewPage<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Blocks.BlockListItem>;
    @using ContentModels = Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.PublishedModels;
    @{
        var content = (ContentModels.MyElementTypeAliasOfContent)Model.Content;
        var settings = (ContentModels.MyElementTypeAliasOfSettings)Model.Settings;
    }
    
    // Output the value of field with alias 'heading' from the Element Type selected as Content section
    <h1>@content.Value("heading")</h1>
    // Output the value of field with alias 'heading' from the Element Type selected as Content section
    <h1>@content.Heading</h1>
    @inherits Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Views.UmbracoViewPage;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Blocks;
    @{
        var blocks = Model.Value<IEnumerable<BlockListItem>>("myBlocksProperty");
        foreach (var block in blocks)
        {
            var content = block.Content;
    
            @Html.Partial("MyFolderOfBlocks/" + content.ContentType.Alias, block)
        }
    }
    @inherits Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Views.UmbracoViewPage;
    @using ContentModels = Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.PublishedModels;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Blocks;
    @{
        var blocks = Model.Value<IEnumerable<BlockListItem>>("myBlocksProperty");
        foreach (var block in blocks)
        {
            var content = (ContentModels.MyAliasOfContentElementType)block.Content;
            var settings = (ContentModels.MyAliasOfSettingsElementType)block.Settings;
    
            <h1>@content.MyExampleHeadlinePropertyAlias</h1>
        }
    }
    @inherits Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Views.UmbracoViewPage;
    @using ContentModels = Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.PublishedModels;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Blocks;
    @{
        var variants = Model.Value<IEnumerable<BlockListItem>>("variants").Select(x => x.Content);
        foreach (var variant in variants)
        {
            <h4>@variant.Value("variantName")</h4>
            <p>@variant.Value("description")</p>
        }
    }
    @inherits Umbraco.Web.Mvc.UmbracoViewPage
    @using ContentModels = Umbraco.Web.PublishedModels;
    @{
        var variants = Model.Variants.Select(x => x.Content).OfType<ProductVariant>();
        foreach (var variant in variants)
        {
            <h4>@variant.VariantName</h4>
            <p>@variant.Description</h4>
        }
    }

    The parent is the nearest ancestor of the current node.

  • Current

    • The current node. Be aware a picker that uses the current node, cannot pick anything when the current node is created, because it do not have any children.

  • Site

    • The nearest ancestor of the current node that has a domain assigned.

  • Specific node

    • A specific node that you have to choose in the tree

  • Finds the furthest ancestor or the item itself, that fits with one of the configured document types.

  • Nearest Descendant or Self

    • Finds the nearest descendant or the item itself, that fits with one of the configured document types.

  • Furthest Descendant or Self

    • Finds the furthest descendant or the item itself, that fits with one of the configured document types.

  • Custom

    • Execute a custom query step by specifying the name. This requires custom code to add the new query step.

  • ...

  • Umbraco anno MMXXIII [talk]

  • Stages [stages]

    • Social Space [stage]

    • No 10 [stage]

    • No 16 [stage]

    • The Theatre [stage]

  • 2022 [year]

    • Talks [talks]

      • ...

    • Stages [stages]

      • Main Stage [stage]

      • The Barn [stage]

  • Content Service
    Multinode Treepicker Data Type Definition
    Multinode Treepicker Data Type Definition
    Multinode Treepicker Data Type Definition
    Multinode Treepicker Data Type Definition
    Migrating Umbraco Cloud sites

    Follow the steps outlined in the Umbraco Cloud documentationarrow-up-right to upgrade your Umbraco 7 site on Cloud.

    hashtag
    What are the limitations?

    In the following section, you can learn more about the limitations of migrating content from Umbraco 7 to Umbraco 8.

    hashtag
    Versions supported

    The content migration tool is a database migration, which is made for the database schema of Umbraco 7.14+. This means that in order to do the migration you need to ensure your Umbraco 7 site is running at least Umbraco 7.14.

    hashtag
    Database types supported

    Umbraco 8 does not support MySQL databases. This means that the migration will not work when moving from an Umbraco 7 site using MySQL to Umbraco 8 on SQL Server

    The database types that are supported are SQL Server and SQL CE.

    hashtag
    Known issues

    Feedback from user testing has shown that some databases are harder to migrate than others.

    We are collecting a list of these known issues on our GitHub Issue Trackerarrow-up-right. There is a community package: Pre-migration health checksarrow-up-right that you can install on your Umbraco 7 site before migration. This will help identify and resolve some of these common issues before triggering the migration steps detailed below.

    circle-info

    A migration was introduced in Umbraco 8.6 which can break the migration process. See Issue #7914arrow-up-right for more details.

    There are two ways to work around this issue:

    • Migrate to version 8.5 as a first step and then post-migration, carry out a normal Umbraco upgrade to the latest version of Umbraco 8, or

    • Install the following community Nuget Package: into your Umbraco 8 project before running the migration (no configuration required). This package was created by Umbraco Gold Partner and patches the migration process so you can migrate directly from the latest Umbraco 7 to Umbraco 8.6+ without encountering the above issue. .

    hashtag
    Third party property editors

    The migration will transform the data stored in third party editors as well. However, it will be stored as it was in Umbraco 7. If the structure has changed or the property editor doesn't exist, you will still be able to find the data in the database. It will, however, not be available in the backoffice.

    chevron-rightLearn more about that in the Data Types Migrationshashtag

    Migrating data types

    When migrating content from Umbraco 7 to Umbraco 8, the Data Type 'pre-value' structure has changed. In Umbraco 8, the term 'pre-values' no longer exists and is instead referred to as property editor configuration.

    In Umbraco 8, property editor configuration is a strongly typed object. There are plenty of examples in the Umbraco-CMS codebasearrow-up-right.

    This configuration is stored differently in Umbraco 8 than it was in Umbraco 7. In Umbraco 7, each pre-value property was stored as a different row in a different database table. In Umbraco 8 this is simplified and property editor configuration is stored as the JSON serialized version of the strongly typed configuration object.

    When upgrading from Umbraco 7 to Umbraco 8, Umbraco has no way of knowing how custom property editors have intended to structure their configuration data. During the upgrade, Umbraco will convert the key/value pairs from the old pre-value database table into a serialized JSON version of those values. There is a reasonable chance that the end result of this data conversion is not compatible with the custom property editor.

    There are 3 options that a developer can choose to do to work around this automatic data conversion:

    1: Implement a custom IPreValueMigrator

    This option requires you to create a custom C# migrator for each of your custom property editors that store custom configuration data. It will also require that you implement these migrators before you run the Umbraco 8 content migration.

    To do this, you will create an implementation of IPreValueMigrator or inherit from the base class .

    There are plenty of examples of this in the .

    You will then need to register them in a composer:

    When running the migrations and encountering a custom configuration, Umbraco will utilize the PreValueMigrator when converting the old pre-values into the new JSON format.

    2: Update your Angular configuration (pre-value) and property editor

    This option means that you will choose to use the automatically converted JSON data format. In this case, it will mean updating your pre-value and property editors to use the new JSON configuration data. The converted data won't be much different than the original/intended data format so this might not be too much work.

    3: Update the Angular configuration (pre-value) editor

    With this option the configuration/pre-value editor needs to be updated to transform the JSON converted data into the data structure you want. When this is done and when the Data Type is saved again, the JSON data structure will be saved back to the database. Your property editor will then continue to work.

    This will require you to update and save all custom pre-value editors to transform the converted structures back to your intended data structure.

    hashtag
    What will happen

    When the migrations are running, Umbraco will go through your entire Umbraco 7 database and update it to the format required for Umbraco 8. The schema will be remodeled and transformed into the correct format and your existing compatible data will be transformed to fit with Umbraco 8.

    These migrations will be running directly on your database. They are transforming schema and data - not transferring. Therefore always ensure that you have a backup before attempting to do this. In case something goes wrong, you will be able to rollback and try again.

    It is highly recommended to clean up your site before running this as it will be quicker.

    • Empty Content recycle bin

    • Empty Media recycle bin

    • Clean up the database version history (can be done with a script or a package like Unversionarrow-up-right)

    hashtag
    How it works

    In the following guide we will migrate the content of an Umbraco 7.13.1 site to Umbraco 8.1.0.

    hashtag
    Step 1: Upgrading to 7.14+

    Before the content migration can start the site has to run Umbraco 7.14+. Make sure to always take a backup of the database before doing an upgrade, and then check the version specific upgrade instructions.

    The site in this example is an Umbraco 7.13.1 site, and we will use Nuget to update it.

    v7 site with content

    Following the general upgrade instructions we will now upgrade via Nuget until we get to this point:

    Upgrading to v7.14
    circle-exclamation

    When upgrading an old website, check if you are using obsolete properties in your Data Types. These should be changed to their updated counterparts. The migration will fail if you are still using obsolete properties.

    The updated properties are:

    • Content Picker

    • Media Picker

    • Member Picker

    • Multinode Treepicker

    • Folder Browser

    • Related Links

    You can see if your site is using the obsolete properties from the (Obsolete) prefix in their name.

    Install the Pre-migration health checks pluginarrow-up-right, and run it health check from the Developer section of the backoffice. This is done to identify and resolve some common database schema issues before migration.

    Once it is upgraded and you have verified everything is working, move on to the next step.

    hashtag
    Step 2: Migrating content to Umbraco 8

    The first thing to do is to spin up a fresh new Umbraco 8.1+ site. Make sure everything works and that no content is there.

    Fresh 8.1 site
    circle-exclamation

    If you have customized the UsersMembershipProvider on your Umbraco 7 site you need to copy that over to the 8.1 web.config as well. Additionally you need to update the type attribute to be type="Umbraco.Web.Security.Providers.UsersMembershipProvider, Umbraco.Web".

    This also includes the attribute useLegacyEncoding value. Make sure that this setting is copied into your new Umbraco 8 site, as it is needed in order to log in.

    Take a backup of your database from the Umbraco 7.14 site. Take the information for the backup database and add that to the connectionstring for the Umbraco 8.1 site. If you are running SQL CE, you will have to copy the database over to the new site as well.

    Once the connectionstring is set, the final step is to change the Umbraco version number in the web.config on the Umbraco 8.1 site. Chang it to 7.14.0. This will indicate that there is an upgrade pending and it needs to run the migration.

    Set Umbraco version in the web.config

    The version will be set to 8.1.0, and you need to change it to the version you are currently migrating from.

    When you start the site it will ask you to login and then show you this screen:

    Upgrade database to 8.1

    From here, the automatic migration will take over, and after a little bit you can log in and see your content:

    Content is on 8.1
    circle-info

    Please be aware that this is a content migration. If you go to the frontend after following these steps, it will throw errors.

    At this point you will have the content but nothing else.

    hashtag
    Step 3: Files migration

    Before moving on to this step, make sure that the Umbraco 8 project is no longer running.

    The following files/folders need to be copied into the Umbraco 8 project:

    • ~/Views - do not overwrite the default Macro and Partial View Macro files, unless changes have been made to these.

    • ~/Media

    • Any files/folders related to Stylesheets and JavaScripts.

    • Any custom files/folders the Umbraco 7 project uses, that aren't in the ~/Config or ~/bin.

    • ~/App_Data/UmbracoForms - in the case Umbraco Forms was used on the Umbraco 7 site.

    Merge the configuration files carefully to ensure any custom settings are migrated while none of the default configurations for Umbraco 8 is overwritten.

    You'll have to revisit all templates and custom implementations to get the site up and running, as all markup is still Umbraco 7-specific.

    circle-info

    Are you planning on continuing the migration to the latest version on Umbraco CMS?

    Then you can skip the step to revisit the template files and custom implementation. We highly recommend waiting with this step until you've reached the latest version.

    If you're stopping at Umbraco 8, you can learn more about rendering content on the Legacy Docs sitearrow-up-right.

    hashtag
    Step 4: Post-migration checks

    As you are updating your template files and custom implementation, you should also verify your configuration files and settings.

    Umbraco 8 contains a few changes regarding the Sections in the Umbraco Backoffice. Because of this, you should also check your User Groups and make sure they have access to the appropriate sections.

    Learn more about the Section in the Sections article

    Creating Media

    Learn how to work with different types of Media content on your Umbraco website.

    Media in Umbraco CMS is handled the same way as content. You define Media Types that act as a base for media items. The following default Media Types are available:

    • Article - used for uploading and storing documents.

    • Audio - used for uploading and storing digital audio files.

    public class CustomQueryStepComposer : IComposer
    {
        public void Compose(IUmbracoBuilder builder)
        {
            builder.DynamicRootSteps().Append<MyCustomDynamicRootQueryStep>();
        }
    }
    public class CustomQueryStepComposer : IComposer
    {
        public void Compose(IUmbracoBuilder builder)
        {
            builder.DynamicRootSteps().Append<MyCustomDynamicRootQueryStep>();
        }
    }
    public class MyCustomDynamicRootQueryStep : IDynamicRootQueryStep
    {
        private readonly IMyCustomRepository _myCustomRepository;
    
        public MyCustomDynamicRootQueryStep(IMyCustomRepository myCustomRepository)
        {
            _myCustomRepository = myCustomRepository;
        }
    
        public async Task<Attempt<ICollection<Guid>>> ExecuteAsync(ICollection<Guid> origins, DynamicRootQueryStep filter)
        {
            if (filter.Alias != "MyCustom") // This is the string you will have to write in the UI
            {
                return Attempt<ICollection<Guid>>.Fail();
            }
    
            if (origins.Any() is false)
            {
                return Attempt<ICollection<Guid>>.Succeed(Array.Empty<Guid>());
            }
    
            // TODO replace with your own logic
            var result = await _myCustomRepository.GetWhateverIWantAsync(origins);
    
            return Attempt<ICollection<Guid>>.Succeed(result);
        }
    }
    @{
        var typedMultiNodeTreePicker = Model.Value<IEnumerable<IPublishedContent>>("featuredArticles");
        if (typedMultiNodeTreePicker != null) {
            foreach (var item in typedMultiNodeTreePicker)
            {
                <p>@item.Name</p>
            }
    }
    @{
        var typedMultiNodeTreePicker = Model.FeaturedArticles;
        foreach (var item in typedMultiNodeTreePicker)
        {
            <p>@item.Name</p>
        }
    }
    @inject IContentService Services;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services
    
    @{
        // Get access to ContentService
        var contentService = Services;
    
        // Create a variable for the GUID of the page you want to update
        var guid = Guid.Parse("32e60db4-1283-4caa-9645-f2153f9888ef");
    
        // Get the page using the GUID you've defined
        var content = contentService.GetById(guid); // ID of your page
    
        // Get the pages you want to assign to the Multinode Treepicker
        var page = Umbraco.Content("665d7368-e43e-4a83-b1d4-43853860dc45");
        var anotherPage = Umbraco.Content("1f8cabd5-2b06-4ca1-9ed5-fbf14d300d59");
    
        // Create Udi's of the pages
        var pageUdi = Udi.Create(Constants.UdiEntityType.Document, page.Key);
        var anotherPageUdi = Udi.Create(Constants.UdiEntityType.Document, anotherPage.Key);
    
        // Create a list of the page udi's
        var udis = new List<string>{pageUdi.ToString(), anotherPageUdi.ToString()};
    
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'featuredArticles'.
        content.SetValue("featuredArticles", string.Join(",", udis));
    
        // Save the change
        contentService.Save(content);
    }
    @{
        // Get the page using it's id
        var content = contentService.GetById(1234);
    }
    @inject IPublishedSnapshotAccessor _publishedSnapshotAccessor;
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache;
    
    @{
        // Set the value of the property with alias 'featuredArticles'
        content.SetValue(Home.GetModelPropertyType(_publishedSnapshotAccessor ,x => x.FeaturedArticles).Alias, string.Join(",", udis));
    }
    The Theatre [stage]
    ProWorks Umbraco 8 Migrationsarrow-up-right
    ProWorksarrow-up-right
    Learn more about the package and the migration process on Prowork's blogarrow-up-right
    DefaultPreValueMigratorarrow-up-right
    Umbraco-CMS codebasearrow-up-right
    [RuntimeLevel(MinLevel = RuntimeLevel.Upgrade, MaxLevel = RuntimeLevel.Upgrade)] // only on upgrades
    public class PreValueMigratorComposer : IUserComposer
    {
        public void Compose(Composition composition)
        {
            composition.WithCollectionBuilder<PreValueMigratorCollectionBuilder>()
                // Append all of the migrators required
                .Append<MyCustomPreValueMigrator>()
                .Append<AnotherPreValueMigrator>();
        }
    }

    File - used for uploading and storing different types of files in the Media section.

  • Folder - a container for organizing media items in the Media section tree.

  • Image - used for uploading and storing images.

  • Vector Graphics (SVG) - used for uploading and storing Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) files which are text files containing source code to draw the desired image.

  • Video - used for uploading and storing video files.

  • The default Media Types aim to cover most needs for media on a website. You do not need to define your Media Types to start using the Media section. The tools for organizing and uploading the media are already in place.

    circle-info

    If you have upgraded from an older version than 8.14 the Media Types listed above are not added automatically. You can add those types manually yourselves by following the steps below 'Creating a new Media Type'. On the default media types page, you will find a detailed overview of all Media Types.

    hashtag
    Uploading Media

    You can upload media in two different ways:

    • Through the Media section and

    • Through the Content section

    hashtag
    Add media through the Media section

    From the Media section in the Umbraco backoffice, you can add new media items by following either of the approaches defined below:

    • Use the Create dialog to create a new Media item in the Media section

      • The Media item will be created based on the type you choose.

      • Upload the image or file, give the Media item a name, and click Save.

    Upload Media - Create Button
    • Use the Drag and drop feature to add your files to the Media section.

      • Umbraco will automatically detect the Media Type and create the Media item.

      • You can drop entire folder structures to recreate that same structure in the Media section.

    Upload Media - Media section

    hashtag
    Add media through the Content section

    New media items can be added to your site without interrupting the content creation flow. This can be done following either of the two approaches outlined below.

    • Drag and drop the image(s) from your file explorer directly into the Media Picker property on the Content page.

      • Images added this way is automatically added to the user's start node in the Media section of the Umbraco backoffice.

    Drag and drop images directly into the content
    • Select the "+" icon to open the "Select media" dialog where you can add images from your file explorer directly or using drag and drop.

    Add images from the "Select media" dialog

    hashtag
    Creating a folder

    It is always a good idea to start by creating a folder for your media items. It can be a good idea to align these folders with the content on your website. This will give the editors a better overview of the files and enable them to upload media items in the correct place.

    Follow these steps to create a folder in the Media section:

    1. Go to the Media section.

    2. Select ... next to Media.

      • Alternatively, you can right-click the Media node and select Create.

    3. Select Folder.

    4. Enter a name for the folder and select Save in the bottom-right corner.

    hashtag
    Media Type properties

    The Image Media Type has 5 properties: Upload Image, Width, Height, Size, and Type. These are populated once the image is uploaded. The properties can be viewed in the Media section and accessed in your Templates.

    Except for the Folder Media Type, the other Media Types have 3 properties: Upload Image, Type, and Size.

    Learn more about each Media Type in the article about default Media Types.

    hashtag
    Organizing and editing media items

    The default view for the Media section is a card view that lets you preview the different files that have been uploaded.

    Media Section - Cardview

    By selecting multiple media items it is possible to perform bulk operations like moving or deleting the items.

    To edit properties on a single media item, click the name of the item, which you will see once you hover over the item.

    Edit media item

    From the top-right corner of the Media section, you can toggle between list and grid view. There is also an option to search for the items in the Media section.

    You can switch to a list view by selecting the view toggle next to the search field and selecting the list view.

    Media Section - List view

    hashtag
    Using media items in the Content section

    By adding a Media Picker property to a Document Type the editor will have the ability to select media items when creating content.

    hashtag
    Creating a Media Type

    You can create custom Media Types and control the structure of the Media tree as you would with Document Types. This means you can store information that is specific to the media on the item itself.

    hashtag
    Video tutorial

    A Media Type is created in the Settings section using the Media Type editor.

    1. Go to the Settings section.

    2. Click ... next to Media Types (or right-click the Media Types node).

    3. Choose New Media Type.

    4. Name the new Media Type Employee Image.

    5. Choose an icon by selecting the icon left of the name field.

    You will now see the Media Type editor. It is similar to the editor used for creating Document Types.

    Creating a Media Type
    circle-info

    Having different folders for different Media Types makes it possible to restrict where media items can be created and added. Only allowing PDF uploads in a certain folder and employee images in another make it easier to keep the Media section organized.

    hashtag
    Adding groups

    Before we start adding properties to the Media Type we need to add a group to put these in.

    1. Click on Add group.

    2. Call the group Image.

    hashtag
    Adding properties

    We need to add the same properties as on the default Image Media Type. These are:

    • umbracoFile

    • umbracoWidth

    • umbracoHeight

    • umbracoBytes

    • umbracoExtension

    Follow the steps outlined below to add the properties to the Media Type:

    1. Click Add property.

    2. Name it Upload image.

    3. Change the alias to umbracoFile.

    4. Click Add editor.

    5. Search for cropper and choose Image cropper under Create new.

    6. Rename the editor Employee Image Cropper.

    7. Add two new crops called Thumbnail (200px x 350px) and wideThumbnail (350px x 200px).

    Defining crops

    Name the remaining four properties Width, Height, Size, and Type, and give them the aliases as mentioned above. They should all use the Label editor.

    As mentioned before these properties will automatically be populated once an image has been uploaded.

    Adding properties

    hashtag
    Defining a Media Type folder

    Next up, we will create a folder to hold the employee images. We could use the existing Folder Media Type but that would mean editors can upload employee images to any folder of that type. If we create a folder specifically for employee images there is only one place to put them.

    1. Go back to the Settings section and create a new Media Type.

    2. Name it Employee Images.

    3. Select the folder icon by clicking the icon to the left of the name.

    4. Navigate to the List view tab.

    5. Toggle the Enable list view option.

    Enable List View

    The new folder should be allowed to be created in the root of the Media tree. We also need to allow only the Employee Image Media Type in our new folder. Both of these configurations can be set on the Permissions tab.

    1. Go to the Permissions tab.

    2. Toggle the Allow as root.

    3. Click Add child under Employee Images.

    4. Select Employee Image.

    Permissions

    hashtag
    Creating the folder and media items

    1. Go to the Media section.

    2. Select ... next to Media and select the Employee images folder.

    3. Name it Employee Images and select Save.

    There are four options to add new media items to the folder, as you can see here:

    Uploading Media
    circle-info

    Uncheck the Allow at root option on the Employee Images Media Type to prevent the creation of multiple folders of this type. This will only disable the creation of new ones and not affect existing folders.

    hashtag
    Cropping the images

    If you select an image that has been uploaded to the folder you will see the full image and the two defined crops.

    Moving the focal point circle on the image will update the crops to focus accordingly. You can also edit the individual crops by selecting them and moving the image or adjusting the slider to zoom.

    Cropping images

    hashtag
    More information

    • Rendering Media

    • Customizing Data Types

    hashtag
    Related Services

    • MediaService

    Defining Content

    Here you'll find an explanation of how content is defined in Umbraco

    Before a piece of content can be created in the Umbraco backoffice, first it needs to be defined. That is why, when opening a blank installation of Umbraco, it is not possible to create content in the Content section.

    All content needs a blueprint that holds information about what kind of data can be stored on the content node or which editors are used.

    Additionally, it also needs information on how it is organized, where in the structure it is allowed, and so forth. This blueprint or definition is called a Document Type.

    hashtag
    What is a Document Type?

    Document Types define what kind of content can be created in the Content section and what an end-user sees and can interact with.

    It can define entire pages or more limited content that can be reused on other nodes ie. a Search Engine Optimization (SEO) group. This means that you are in complete control of what type of content can be created and where.

    Another example is if there is a "Blog post" Document Type that has some properties containing a thumbnail, a name, and an author image. Then all blog posts using the "Blog post" Document Type, will allow the end user to fill in a thumbnail, author name, and an author image.

    A Document Type contains fieldsets (or groups) where you can apply rules about where the content can be created, allowed template(s), backoffice icons, etc.

    hashtag
    1. Creating a Document Type

    A Document Type is created using the Document Type editor in the Settings section.

    • Go to the Settings section in the backoffice.

    • On the Document Types node click the menu icon (•••) to bring up the context menu.

    • Here choose Document Type with Template. This will create a new Document Type with a template. The Template can be found under Templates in the Settings section which will be assigned as the default template for the Document Type.

    You can also choose to create a Document Type without a template and create Folders to organize your Document Types. Other options are to create Compositions and Element types, which you can read more about in the section.

    hashtag
    2. Defining the root node

    hashtag
    Name the Document Type

    First, we're prompted to give the Document Type a name. This first Document Type will be the root node for our content, name it "Home".

    circle-info

    The alias of the Document Type is automatically generated based on the property name. If you want to change the auto-generated alias, click the "lock" icon. The alias must be in camel case. For example: homePage.

    Having a root node lets you quickly query content as you know everything will be under the root node.

    hashtag
    Adding Icons to the Document Type

    Choosing appropriate icons for your content nodes is a good way to give editors a better overview of the content tree.

    To set an icon for the Document Type click the document icon in the top left corner. This will open the icon select dialog. Search for "Home"and select the icon. This icon will be used in the content tree.

    hashtag
    Setting Permissions

    This will allow this Document Type to be created as the first content in the Content section.

    • Go to the Permissions tab

    • Tick the Allow as root toggle

    • Save the Document Type by clicking save in the bottom right corner.

    hashtag
    3. Creating the content

    Now that we have the Document Type in place, we can create the content.

    • Go to the Content section

    • Click on the menu icon next to Content

    • Select the "Home" Document Type. We'll name it "Home

    As we haven't created our properties, all we can see on the "Home" node is the Properties tab. This tab contains the default properties that are available on all content nodes in Umbraco.

    Let's add some properties of our own.

    hashtag
    4. Groups and properties

    In order to add the option to create different content on the same Document Type, some groups and properties need to be added.

    Groups

    Groups are a way to organize and structure the properties within the content, making it more manageable. It also makes it more user-friendly for content editors when creating or editing content on a website.

    A name can be added to the group and after properties can be added.

    Properties

    Each field on a Document Type is called a property. The property is given a name, an alias (used to output the properties contained in a template), and an editor.

    The editor determines what type of data the property will store and the input method. There is a wide range of default available and you can .

    Some editors require configuration where a configured editor is saved as a Data Type and can be reused for multiple properties and document types. These can be seen in the Settings section under Data Types.

    • Go to the Settings section

    • Expand Document Types by clicking the arrow to the left

    • Select the "Home" Document Type.

    circle-info

    Keyboard Shortcuts

    Keyboard shortcuts are available when you are working with the Document Type editor. To see which shortcuts are available, click ALT + SHIFT + K.

    hashtag
    Adding groups

    Before we start adding properties to the Document Type we need to create a group to hold the property.

    • Click Add group and name the group "Content".

    circle-info

    If you have multiple groups and/or properties you can order them with drag and drop or by entering a numeric sort order value. This is done by clicking Reorder.

    To convert a group to a tab, see the section in the article.

    hashtag
    Adding properties

    Now that we have created a group we can start adding properties. Let's add a Rich Text editor to the Content group.

    • Click the Add property link in the Content group. This opens the property settings dialog. Here you can set the metadata for each property (name, alias, description)

    • Choose which Data Type/property editor to use, and add validation if needed.

    • Give the property a name. The name will be shown to the editor to make it relevant and understandable. Notice the alias is automatically generated based on the name. We'll name this "

    hashtag
    Property Editors

    • Clicking Select editor will open the Select editor dialog. Here, you can choose between all the available editors on the Create a new configuration tab. This will create a new configuration or already configured editors in the Available configurations tab.

    • To make it easier to find what you need use the search field to filter by typing "Rich". Filtering will display configured properties first (under Available configurations) and all available editors under that.

    circle-info

    The name of the Data Type is based on the name of the Document Type, the name of the property, and the property editor. Flor example: Home - Body Text - Rich Text editor.

    • Let's rename it to "Basic Rich Text editor" and only select the most necessary options.

      • bold

    circle-info

    Selecting the Mandatory toggle makes the property mandatory and the content cannot be saved if no value is entered (in this case, the Richtext editor).

    You have the option to add additional validation by selecting a predefined validation method under the Custom validation dropdown (such as email, number, or URL). Or by selecting a custom validation and adding a regular expression.

    • Save the Document Type.

    • If you go to the Content section and click on the Home node you will now see the Contentgroup with the Body Text property.

    hashtag
    Property descriptions

    The description of the property is not necessary, but it´s a best practice as it guides the editor to use the property correctly. The property description supports some markdown and one custom collapse syntax:

    chevron-rightBoldhashtag

    You can make text in the description bold by wrapping it with **

    chevron-rightItalichashtag

    You can make text in the description italic by wrapping it with *

    chevron-rightLinkshashtag

    You can make links by using the syntax:

    Note: Links will always have thetarget="_blank" set. This is currently not configurable.

    chevron-rightImageshashtag

    You can embed images by using this syntax:

    chevron-rightCollapsible descriptionhashtag

    You can make the description collapsible by adding -- on its own line:

    Now if we put it all together we get something like this:

    hashtag
    5. Defining child nodes

    Next up we'll create a text page Document Type that will be used for subpages on the site.

    • Go back to the Settings section

    • Create a new Document Type

    • Name it "Text Page".

    hashtag
    Creating child nodes

    Before creating a Text Page in Content section, allow the Text Page Document Type to be created as a child node to the Home node.

    • Select the "Home" Document Type

    • Go to the Permissions group.

    • Click Add child

    • Go to the Content section

    • Click the menu icon (•••) next to the "Home" node

    • Select the "Text page

    Document Types are flexible and can be used for defining pieces of reusable content or an entire page, to act as a container or repository.

    hashtag
    6. Exporting/Importing the Document Type

    You can also export document types from an already existing project/installation and import them into another project/installation.

    • Go to the Settings section

    • Right-click the Document type

    • Select Export. When you click on the Export button, the Document Type is saved as a *.udt file.

    To import a Document Type:

    • Go to the Settings section

    • Right-click the Document type

    • Select Import Document Type

    circle-info
    1. If your Document Type contains compositions or inherits from another Document Type, then you need to export/import the Composition/Document Type too.

    2. You cannot export/import document types on Umbraco Cloud.

    hashtag
    More information

    hashtag
    Related Services

    hashtag
    Tutorials

    "
  • Then click the Save and Publish button.

  • Body Text
    ".
    Select the Rich Text editor under Create new. This will let you configure the editor settings - the Rich Text editor for this property.
    italic
  • alignLeft

  • alignCenter

  • link

  • umbMediaPicker

  • When you are happy with the settings click Submit.

  • Add a group called "Content"

  • This time we'll add two properties:

    • First, make a property called "Summary" using the Textarea editor

    • Secondly, create a property called "Body Text" and reuse the Rich Text Editor Data Type.

  • Select "Text Page".

    " Document Type. We'll name the page "
    About us
    ". We now have a basic content structure.

    Click on the Import button and browse to the Document Type you exported. The Name and Alias of the Document Type are displayed.

  • Click Import to complete the process.

  • Default Document Types
    property editors
    customize additional editors
    Convert a group to a tab
    Using Tabs
    Rendering Content
    Customizing Data Types
    ContentService
    ContentTypeService
    Creating a basic website with Umbraco
    Creating groups
    Adding a property
    Choosing the Rich Text editor
    Makrdown description example
    Exporting a Document Type
    Importing a Document Type
    This is **bold**
    This is *italic*
    [This is an absolute link](https://google.com)
    [This is a relative link](/umbraco#/media)
    ![Image alt text](https://media.giphy.com/media/bezxCUK2D2TuBCJ7r5/giphy.gif)
    This is initially shown
    --
    This is initially hidden
    This is **bold**
    This is *italic*
    [This is an absolute link](https://google.com)
    [This is a relative link](/umbraco#/media)
    --
    ![Image alt text](https://media.giphy.com/media/bezxCUK2D2TuBCJ7r5/giphy.gif)

    Block Grid

    Alias: Umbraco.BlockGrid

    Returns: BlockGridModel

    The Block Grid property editor enables editors to layout their content in the Umbraco backoffice. The content is made of Blocks that can contain different types of data.

    hashtag
    Sample configuration

    When testing out the property editor, you can use a set of predefined Blocks. The option will only be possible when there are no other Data Types using the Block Grid property editor.

    • Create a new Data Type.

    • Select the Block Grid as the Property editor.

    • Install the "Sample Configuration".

    4 Blocks will be added to the property, ready for testing.

    hashtag
    Configuring the Block Grid

    The Block Grid property editor is configured via the Data Types backoffice interface.

    To set up the Block Grid property editor, follow these steps:

    1. Navigate to the Settings section in the Umbraco backoffice.

    2. Right-click the Data Types folder.

    3. Select Create -> New Data Type.

    You will see the configuration options for a Block Grid property editor as shown below:

    The Data Type editor allows you to configure the following properties:

    • Blocks - Defines the Block Types available for use in the property. For more information, see .

    • Amount - Sets the minimum and/or the maximum number of Blocks that should be allowed at the root of the layout.

    • Live editing mode - Enabling this option will allow you to see the changes as you are editing them.

    hashtag
    Setup Block Types

    Block Types are based on . These can be created beforehand or while setting up your Block Types.

    Once you have added an Element Type as a Block Type on your Block Grid Data Type you have the option to configure it.

    hashtag
    Groups

    Blocks can also be grouped. This is visible in the Block Catalogue and can also be used to allow a group of Blocks in an Area.

    hashtag
    Block Configuration Settings

    Each Block has a set of properties that are optional to configure. These are described below.

    hashtag
    General

    Customize the user experience for your content editors when they work with the Blocks in the Content section.

    • Label - Defines a label for the appearance of the Block in the editor. The label can use AngularJS template-string-syntax to display values of properties.

    circle-info

    Label example: "My Block {{myPropertyAlias}}" will be shown as: "My Block FooBar".

    You can also use more advanced expression using AngularJS filters, like {{myPropertyAlias | limitTo:100}} or for a property using Richtext editor {{myPropertyAlias | ncRichText | truncate:true:100}}. It is also possible to use properties from the Settings model by using {{$settings.propertyAlias}}.

    Get more tips on how to use AngularJS filters in Umbraco CMS from this community-made

    • Content model - Presents the Element Type used as model for the Content section of this Block. This cannot be changed but you can open the Element Type to perform edits or view the properties available. Useful when writing your Label.

    • Settings model - Adds a Settings section to your Block based on a given Element Type. When selected you can open the Element Type or choose to remove the Settings section again.

    hashtag
    Size options

    Customize the Blocks size in the Grid. If you define multiple options, the Block becomes scalable.

    By default, a Block takes up the available width.

    A Block can be resized in two ways:

    1. When a Block is placed in an Area, it will fit to the Areas width. Learn more about .

    2. A Block can have one or more Column Span options defined.

    A Column Span option is used to define the width of a Block. With multiple Column Span options defined, the Content Editor can scale the Block to fit specific needs.

    Additionally, Blocks can be configured to span rows, this enables one Block to be placed next to a few rows containing other Blocks.

    • Available column spans - Defines one or more columns, the Block spans across. For example: in a 12 columns grid, 6 columns is equivalent to half width. By enabling 6 columns and 12 columns, the Block can be scaled to either half width or full width.

    • Available row spans - Defines the amount of rows the Block spans across.

    See the section of this article for an example of how scaling works.

    hashtag
    Catalogue appearance

    These properties refer to how the Block is presented in the Block catalogue when editors choose which Blocks to use for their content.

    • Background color - Defines a background color to be displayed beneath the icon or thumbnail. Example: #424242.

    • Icon color - Changes the color of the Element Type icon. Example: #242424.

    The thumbnails for the catalogue are presented in the format of 16:10. We recommend a resolution of 400px width and 250px height.

    hashtag
    Permissions

    • Allow in root - Determines whether the Block can be created at the root of your layout. Turn this off if you only want a Block to appear within Block Areas.

    • Allow in areas - Determines whether the Block can be created inside Areas of other Blocks. If this is turned off it can still be allowed in Block Areas by defining specific allowed Blocks.

    hashtag
    Areas

    Blocks can nest other Blocks to support specific compositions. These compositions can be used as a layout for other Blocks.

    To achieve nesting, a Block must have one or more Areas defined. Each Area can contain one or more Blocks.

    Each Area has a size, defined by column and rows spans. The grid for the Areas are based on the same amount of columns as your root grid, unless you choose to change it.

    To scale an Area, click and drag the scale-button in the bottom-right corner of an Area.

    • Grid Columns for Areas - Overwrites the amount of columns used for the Area grid.

    • Areas - Determines whether the Block can be created inside Areas of other Blocks.

    hashtag
    Area configuration

    • Alias - The alias is used to identify this Area. It is being printed by GetBlockGridHTML() and used as name for the Area slot in Custom Views. The alias is also available for CSS Selectors to target the HTML-Element representing an Area.

    • Create Button Label - Overwrites the Create Button Label of the Area.

    • Number of blocks

    When allowing a Group of Blocks, you might want to require a specific amount for a certain Block of that Group. This can be done by adding that Block Type to the list as well and set the requirements.

    hashtag
    Advanced

    These properties are relevant when working with custom views or complex projects.

    • Custom view - Overwrites the AngularJS view for the block presentation in the Content editor. Use this view to make a more visual presentation of the Block or make your own editing experience by adding your own AngularJS controller to the view.

    circle-info

    Notice that any styling of a Block is scoped. This means that the default backoffice styles are not present for the view of this Block.

    • Custom stylesheet - Pick your own stylesheet to be used by the Block in the Content editor.

    • Overlay editor size - Sets the size for the Content editor overlay for editing this block.

    • Hide content editor - Hides the UI for editing the content in a Block Editor. This is only relevant if you made a custom view that provides the UI for editing of content.

    hashtag
    Editing Blocks

    When viewing a Block Grid property editor in the Content section for the first time, you will be presented with the option to Add content.

    Clicking the Add content button opens up the Block Catalogue.

    The Block Catalogue looks different depending on the amount of available Blocks and their catalogue appearance.

    Click the Block Type you wish to create and a new Block will appear in the layout.

    More Blocks can be added to the layout by clicking the Add content button. Alternatively, use the Add content button that appears on hover to add new Blocks between, besides, or above the existing Blocks.

    To delete a Block, click the trash icon which appears on the mouse hover.

    hashtag
    Sorting Blocks

    Blocks can be rearranged using the click and drag feature. Move them up or down to place them in the desired order.

    Moving a Block from one Area to another is done in the same way. If a Block is not allowed in the given position, the area will display a red color and not allow the new position.

    hashtag
    Scaling Blocks

    If a Block has multiple size options it can be scaled via the UI. This appears in the bottom left corner of the Block.

    The Block is resized using a click-and-drag feature. Moving the mouse will change the size to the size options closest to the mouse pointer.

    hashtag
    Rendering Block Grid Content

    Rendering the stored value of your Block Grid property editor can be done in two ways:

    hashtag
    1. Default rendering

    You can choose to use the built-in rendering mechanism for rendering Blocks using a Partial View for each block.

    The default rendering method is named GetBlockGridHtmlAsync() and comes with a few options - for example:

    In the sample above "myGrid" is the alias of the Block Grid editor.

    If you are using ModelsBuilder, the example will look like this:

    To use the GetBlockGridHtmlAsync() method, you will need to create a Partial View for each Block Type. The Partial View must be named using the alias of the Element Type that is being used as Content Model for the Block Type.

    These Partial View files need to go into the Views/Partials/blockgrid/Components/ folder.

    Example: Views/Partials/blockgrid/Components/MyElementTypeAliasOfContent.cshtml.

    The Partial Views will receive a model of type Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Blocks.BlockGridItem. This model contains Content and Settings from your block, as well as the configured RowSpan, ColumnSpan, and Areas of the Block.

    hashtag
    Rendering the Block Areas

    The Partial View for the Block is responsible for rendering its own Block Areas. This is done using another built-in rendering mechanism:

    Here you will need to create a Partial View for each Block Type within the Block Area. For the name, use the alias of the Element Type that is being used as Content Model for the Block Type.

    These Partial Views must be placed in the same folder as before, (Views/Partials/blockgrid/Components/), and will receive a model of type Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Blocks.BlockGridItem.

    hashtag
    Putting it all together

    The following is an example of a Partial View for a Block Type of type MyElementTypeAliasOfContent.

    If you are using ModelsBuilder, you can make the property rendering strongly typed by letting your view accept a model of type BlockGridItem<T>. For example:

    hashtag
    Stylesheet

    Using the default rendering together with your layout stylesheet will provide what you need for rendering the layout.

    If you like to use the Default Layout Stylesheet, you must copy the stylesheet to your frontend. You can download the default layout stylesheet from the link within the DataType, we recommend putting the file in the css folder, example: wwwroot/css/umbraco-blockgridlayout.css.

    circle-info

    A set of built-in Partial Views are responsible for rendering the Blocks and Areas in a grid layout. If you want to tweak or change the way the grid layout is rendered, you can use the built-in Partial Views as a template:

    1. Clone the views from <a href="https://github.com/umbraco/Umbraco-CMS/">GitHub</a>. They can be found in /src/Umbraco.Cms.StaticAssets/Views/Partials/blockgrid/

    hashtag
    2. Build your own rendering

    The built-in value converter for the Block Grid property editor lets you use the block data as you like. Call the Value<T> method with a type of BlockGridModel to have the stored value returned as a BlockGridModel instance.

    BlockGridModel contains the Block Grid configuration (like the number of columns as GridColumns) whilst also being an implementation of IEnumerable<BlockGridItem> (see details for BlockGridItem above).

    The following example mimics the built-in rendering mechanism for rendering Blocks using Partial Views:

    If you do not want to use Partial Views, you can access the block item data directly within your rendering:

    hashtag
    Write a Custom Layout Stylesheet

    The default layout stylesheet is using CSS Grid. This can be modified to fit your implementation and your project.

    hashtag
    Adjusting the Default Layout Stylesheet

    To make additions or overwrite parts of the default layout stylesheet, import the default stylesheet at the top of your own file.

    You need to copy the Default Layout Stylesheet to your frontend. You can download the default layout stylesheet from the link within the DataType, we recommend putting the file in the css folder, example: wwwroot/css/umbraco-blockgridlayout.css.

    hashtag
    Write a new Layout Stylesheet

    In this case, you would have to write the layout from scratch.

    You are free to pick any style, meaning there is no requirement to use CSS Grid. It is, however, recommended to use CSS Grid to ensure complete compatibility with the Umbraco backoffice.

    hashtag
    CSS Class structure and available data

    When extending or writing your own layout, you need to know the structure and what data is available.

    For example: You can use the below HTML structure:

    hashtag
    Build a Custom Backoffice View

    Building Custom Views for Block representations in Backoffice is based on the same API for all Block Editors.

    hashtag
    Creating a Block Grid programmatically

    In this example, we will be creating content programmatically for a "spot" Blocks in a Block Grid.

    1. On a document type add a property called blockGrid.

    2. Then add as editor Block Grid.

    3. In the Block Grid add a new block and click to Create new Element Type

    • a property called title with the editor of Textstring

    • a property called text with the editor of Textstring

    1. Then on the Settings model click to add a new Setting.

    2. Then click to Create new Element Type.

    3. Name this element type spotSettings with the following properties:

    • a property called featured with the editor of True/false.

    The raw input data for the spots looks like this:

    The resulting JSON object stored for the Block Grid will look like this:

    For each item in the raw data, we need to create:

    • One contentData entry with the title and text.

    • One settingsData entry with the featured value (the checkbox expects "0" or "1" as data value).

    All contentData and layoutData entries need their own unique Udi as well as the ID (key) of their corresponding Element Types. In this sample, we only have one Element Type for content (spotElement) and one for settings (spotSettings). In a real life scenario, there could be any number of Element Type combinations.

    1. First and foremost, we need models to transform the raw data into Block Grid compatible JSON. Create a class called Model.cs containing the following:

    1. By injecting and into an API controller, we can transform the raw data into Block Grid JSON. It can then be saved to the target content item. Create a class called BlockGridTestController.cs containing the following:

    For the above code IContent? content = _contentService.GetById(1203); change the id with your content node that is using the Block Grid.

    1. In order to test this implementation, run the project and add /umbraco/api/blockgridtest/create after your domain name. If the result shows as Saved then check your content node and you will see the 2 spotElement contents.

    This can also be tested via Postman as well if preffered.

    Select Block Grid from the list of available property editors.

    Editor width - Overwrites the width of the property editor. This field takes any valid CSS value for "max-width". For example: 100% or 800px.

  • Grid Columns - Define the number of columns in your grid layout. The default is 12 columns.

  • Layout Stylesheet - Replaces the built-in Layout Stylesheet. Additionally, you can retrieve the default layout stylesheet to use as a base for your own inspiration or for writing your own stylesheet.

  • Create Button Label - Overwrites the label on the Create button.

  • .
    Thumbnail - Pick an image or Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) file to replace the icon of the Block in the catalogue.
    - Determines the total number of Blocks in an Area.
  • Allowed block types - When this is empty, all Blocks with Permissions for creation in Areas, will be available. This can be overwritten by specifying the allowed Blocks. Define the types of Blocks or Groups of Blocks that are allowed. Additionally, you can also set how many Blocks of each type/group should be present.

  • Copy the cloned views to the local folder Views/Partials/blockgrid/

  • Make changes to your copied views. The entry point for GetBlockGridHtmlAsync() is the view default.cshtml

  • Name this element type spotElement with the following properties:

    One layout entry with the desired column and row spans.

    Setup Block Types
    Element Types
    Examples and more details about configuring the Label property
    Areas
    scaling blocks
    Default rendering
    Build your own rendering
    Read about building a Custom View for Blocks here
    ContentService
    ContentTypeService
    Block Grid - Data Type Configuration
    Block Grid - Data Type Block Configuration
    Block Grid - Areas
    Block Grid - Area Configuration
    Block Grid - Add Content
    Block Grid - Setup
    Block Grid - example setup
    Block Grid - Add Content Inline
    Block Grid - Delete Content
    Block Grid - Sorting Blocks
    Scale blocks in the grid by dragging from the bottom-right corner.
    Block Grid - Block Configuration
    Block Grid - Result
    @await Html.GetBlockGridHtmlAsync(Model, "myGrid")
    @await Html.GetBlockGridHtmlAsync(Model.MyGrid)
    @await Html.GetBlockGridItemAreasHtmlAsync(Model)
    MyElementTypeAliasOfContent.cshtml
    @inherits Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Views.UmbracoViewPage<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Blocks.BlockGridItem>;
    
    @* Render the value of field with alias 'heading' from the Element Type selected as Content section *@
    <h1>@Model.Content.Value("heading")</h1>
    
    @* Render the block areas *@
    @await Html.GetBlockGridItemAreasHtmlAsync(Model)
    MyElementTypeAliasOfContent.cshtml
    @inherits Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Views.UmbracoViewPage<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Blocks.BlockGridItem<ContentModels.MyElementTypeAliasOfContent>>;
    @using ContentModels = Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.PublishedModels;
    
    @* Render the Heading property from the Element Type selected as Content section *@
    <h1>@Model.Content.Heading</h1>
    
    @* Render the block areas *@
    @await Html.GetBlockGridItemAreasHtmlAsync(Model)
    <link rel="stylesheet" href="@Url.Content("~/css/blockgridlayout.css")" />
    View.cshtml
    @inherits Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Views.UmbracoViewPage
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Blocks
    @{
        var grid = Model.Value<BlockGridModel>("myGrid");
    
        // get the number of columns defined for the grid
        var gridColumns = grid.GridColumns;
    
        // iterate the block items
        foreach (var item in grid)
        {
            var content = item.Content;
    
            @await Html.PartialAsync("PathToMyFolderOfPartialViews/" + content.ContentType.Alias, item);
        }
    }
    View.cshtml
    @inherits Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Views.UmbracoViewPage
    @using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Blocks
    @{
        var grid = Model.Value<BlockGridModel>("myGrid");
    
        // get the number of columns defined for the grid
        var gridColumns = grid.GridColumns;
    
        // iterate the block items
        foreach (var item in grid)
        {
            // get the content and settings of the block
            var content = item.Content;
            var settings = item.Settings;
            // get the areas of the block
            var areas = item.Areas;
            // get the dimensions of the block
            var rowSpan = item.RowSpan;
            var columnSpan = item.ColumnSpan;
    
            // render the block data
            <div style="background-color: #@(settings.Value<string>("color"))">
                <h2>@(content.Value<string>("title"))</h2>
                <span>This block is supposed to span <b>@rowSpan rows</b> and <b>@columnSpan columns</b></span>
            </div>
        }
    }
    @import 'css/umbblockgridlayout.css';
    <div class="umb-block-grid"
         style="--umb-block-grid--grid-columns: 12;"
    >
    
        <!-- Notice this is the same markup used every time we will be printing a list of blocks: -->
        <div class="umb-block-grid__layout-container">
    
            <!-- repeated for each layout entry -->
            <div
                class="umb-block-grid__layout-item"
                data-content-element-type-alias="MyElementTypeAlias"
                data-content-element-type-key="00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000"
                data-element-udi="00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000"
                data-col-span="6"
                data-row-span="1"
                style="
                --umb-block-grid--item-column-span: 6;
                --umb-block-grid--item-row-span: 1;
                "
            >
    
                <!-- Here the Razor View or Custom View for this block will be rendered. -->
    
                <!-- Each razor view must render the 'area-container' them self.
                This can be done by the Razor helper method:
    
                @await Html.GetBlockGridItemAreasHtmlAsync(Model)
    
                The structure will be as printed below,
                Do notice targeting the 'area-container' needs a double selector as markup will be different in Backoffice.
                Here is an example of the CSS selector:
                    .umb-block-grid__area-container, .umb-block-grid__block--view::part(area-container) {
                        position: relative;
                    }
                -->
                <div
                    class="umb-block-grid__area-container"
                    style="--umb-block-grid--area-grid-columns: 9;"
                >
    
                    <!-- repeated for each area for this block type. -->
                    <div
                        class="umb-block-grid__area"
                        data-area-col-span="3"
                        data-area-row-span="1"
                        data-area-alias="MyAreaAlias"
                        style="
                        --umb-block-grid--grid-columns: 3;
                        --umb-block-grid--area-column-span: 3;
                        --umb-block-grid--area-row-span: 1;
                        ">
    
                            <!-- Notice here we print the same markup as when we print a list of blocks(same as the one in the root of this structure..):
                            <div class="umb-block-grid__layout-container">
                                ...
                            </div>
                            End of notice.  -->
                    </div>
                    <!-- end of repeat -->
    
                </div>
    
    
            </div>
            <!-- end of repeat -->
    
        </div>
    
    </div>
    new[]
    {
        new { Title = "Item one", Text = "This is item one", Featured = false, ColumnSpan = 12, RowSpan = 1 },
        new { Title = "Item two", Text = "This is item two", Featured = true, ColumnSpan = 6, RowSpan = 2 }
    }
    {
        "layout": {
            "Umbraco.BlockGrid": [{
                    "contentUdi": "umb://element/bb23fe28160941efa506da7aa314172d",
                    "settingsUdi": "umb://element/9b832ee528464456a8e9a658b47a9801",
                    "areas": [],
                    "columnSpan": 12,
                    "rowSpan": 1
                }, {
                    "contentUdi": "umb://element/a11e06ca155d40b78189be0bdaf11c6d",
                    "settingsUdi": "umb://element/d182a0d807fc4518b741b77c18aa73a1",
                    "areas": [],
                    "columnSpan": 6,
                    "rowSpan": 2
                }
            ]
        },
        "contentData": [{
                "contentTypeKey": "0e9f8609-1904-4fd1-9801-ad1880825ff3",
                "udi": "umb://element/bb23fe28160941efa506da7aa314172d",
                "title": "Item one",
                "text": "This is item one"
            }, {
                "contentTypeKey": "0e9f8609-1904-4fd1-9801-ad1880825ff3",
                "udi": "umb://element/a11e06ca155d40b78189be0bdaf11c6d",
                "title": "Item two",
                "text": "This is item two"
            }
        ],
        "settingsData": [{
                "contentTypeKey": "22be457c-8249-42b8-8685-d33262f7ce2a",
                "udi": "umb://element/9b832ee528464456a8e9a658b47a9801",
                "featured": "0"
            }, {
                "contentTypeKey": "22be457c-8249-42b8-8685-d33262f7ce2a",
                "udi": "umb://element/d182a0d807fc4518b741b77c18aa73a1",
                "featured": "1"
            }
        ]
    }
    Models.cs
    using Newtonsoft.Json;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Core;
    
    namespace My.Site.Models;
    
    // this is the "root" of the block grid data
    public class BlockGridData
    {
        public BlockGridData(BlockGridLayout layout, BlockGridElementData[] contentData, BlockGridElementData[] settingsData)
        {
            Layout = layout;
            ContentData = contentData;
            SettingsData = settingsData;
        }
    
        [JsonProperty("layout")]
        public BlockGridLayout Layout { get; }
    
        [JsonProperty("contentData")]
        public BlockGridElementData[] ContentData { get; }
    
        [JsonProperty("settingsData")]
        public BlockGridElementData[] SettingsData { get; }
    }
    
    // this is a wrapper for the block grid layout, purely required for correct serialization
    public class BlockGridLayout
    {
        public BlockGridLayout(BlockGridLayoutItem[] layoutItems) => LayoutItems = layoutItems;
    
        [JsonProperty("Umbraco.BlockGrid")]
        public BlockGridLayoutItem[] LayoutItems { get; }
    }
    
    // this represents an item in the block grid layout collection
    public class BlockGridLayoutItem
    {
        public BlockGridLayoutItem(Udi contentUdi, Udi settingsUdi, int columnSpan, int rowSpan)
        {
            ContentUdi = contentUdi;
            SettingsUdi = settingsUdi;
            ColumnSpan = columnSpan;
            RowSpan = rowSpan;
        }
    
        [JsonProperty("contentUdi")]
        public Udi ContentUdi { get; }
    
        [JsonProperty("settingsUdi")]
        public Udi SettingsUdi { get; }
    
        [JsonProperty("areas")]
        // areas are omitted from this sample for abbreviation
        public object[] Areas { get; } = { };
    
        [JsonProperty("columnSpan")]
        public int ColumnSpan { get; }
    
        [JsonProperty("rowSpan")]
        public int RowSpan { get; }
    
    }
    
    // this represents an item in the block grid content or settings data collection
    public class BlockGridElementData
    {
        public BlockGridElementData(Guid contentTypeKey, Udi udi, Dictionary<string, object> data)
        {
            ContentTypeKey = contentTypeKey;
            Udi = udi;
            Data = data;
        }
    
        [JsonProperty("contentTypeKey")]
        public Guid ContentTypeKey { get; }
    
        [JsonProperty("udi")]
        public Udi Udi { get; }
    
        [JsonExtensionData]
        public Dictionary<string, object> Data { get; }
    }
    BlockGridTestController.cs
    using Microsoft.AspNetCore.Mvc;
    using My.Site.Models;
    using Newtonsoft.Json;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Core;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services;
    using Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Controllers;
    
    namespace My.Site.Controllers;
    
    public class BlockGridTestController : UmbracoApiController
    {
        private readonly IContentService _contentService;
        private readonly IContentTypeService _contentTypeService;
    
        public BlockGridTestController(IContentService contentService, IContentTypeService contentTypeService)
        {
            _contentService = contentService;
            _contentTypeService = contentTypeService;
        }
    
        // POST: /umbraco/api/blockgridtest/create
        [HttpPost]
        public ActionResult Create()
        {
            // get the item content to modify
            IContent? content = _contentService.GetById(1203);
            if (content == null)
            {
                return NotFound("Could not find the content item to modify");
            }
    
            // get the element types for spot blocks (content and settings)
            IContentType? spotContentType = _contentTypeService.Get("spotElement");
            IContentType? spotSettingsType = _contentTypeService.Get("spotSettings");
            if (spotContentType == null || spotSettingsType == null)
            {
                return NotFound("Could not find one or more content types for block data");
            }
    
            // this is the raw data to insert into the block grid
            var rawData = new[]
            {
                new { Title = "Item one", Text = "This is item one", Featured = false, ColumnSpan = 12, RowSpan = 1 },
                new { Title = "Item two", Text = "This is item two", Featured = true, ColumnSpan = 6, RowSpan = 2 }
            };
    
            // build the individual parts of the block grid data from the raw data
            var layoutItems = new List<BlockGridLayoutItem>();
            var spotContentData = new List<BlockGridElementData>();
            var spotSettingsData = new List<BlockGridElementData>();
            foreach (var data in rawData)
            {
                // generate new UDIs for block content and settings
                var contentUdi = Udi.Create(Constants.UdiEntityType.Element, Guid.NewGuid());
                var settingsUdi = Udi.Create(Constants.UdiEntityType.Element, Guid.NewGuid());
    
                // create a new layout item
                layoutItems.Add(new BlockGridLayoutItem(contentUdi, settingsUdi, data.ColumnSpan, data.RowSpan));
    
                // create new content data
                spotContentData.Add(new BlockGridElementData(spotContentType.Key, contentUdi, new Dictionary<string, object>
                {
                    { "title", data.Title },
                    { "text", data.Text },
                }));
    
                // create new settings data
                spotSettingsData.Add(new BlockGridElementData(spotSettingsType.Key, settingsUdi, new Dictionary<string, object>
                {
                    { "featured", data.Featured ? "1" : "0" },
                }));
            }
    
            // construct the block grid data from layout, content and settings
            var blockGridData = new BlockGridData(
                new BlockGridLayout(layoutItems.ToArray()),
                spotContentData.ToArray(),
                spotSettingsData.ToArray());
    
            // serialize the block grid data as JSON and save it to the "blockGrid" property on the content item
            var propertyValue = JsonConvert.SerializeObject(blockGridData);
            content.SetValue("blockGrid", propertyValue);
            _contentService.Save(content);
    
            return Ok("Saved");
        }
    }
    Umbraco AngularJS filter cheat sheetarrow-up-right

    Version Specific Upgrades

    This document covers specific upgrade steps if a version requires them. Most versions do not require specific upgrade steps and you will be able to upgrade directly from your current version.

    Use the information below to learn about any potential breaking changes and common pitfalls when upgrading your Umbraco CMS project.

    If any specific steps are involved with upgrading to a specific version they will be listed below.

    Use the general upgrade guide to complete the upgrade of your project.

    hashtag
    Breaking changes

    chevron-rightUmbraco 13hashtag

    Below you can find the list of breaking changes introduced in Umbraco 13.

    chevron-rightUmbraco 12hashtag

    Umbraco 12 does not include many binary breaking changes, but there are some.

    Most notable is a functional breaking change in Migrations, that from Umbraco 12. Each translation will be executed in its own transactions instead of all migrations in one big transaction. This change has been made to ease the support for Sqlite.

    A type, enum, record, or struct visible outside the assembly is missing in the compared assembly when required to be present.

    chevron-rightUmbraco 11hashtag

    Most breaking changes are introduced due to updated dependencies. The breaking changes in .NET 7 and ASP.NET Core 7 are documented by .

    Besides the documented changes, we have also seen a few method signatures that are changed to support Nullable-Reference-Types.

    If you are using TinyMCE plugins or custom TinyMCE configuration you need to migrate to the latest version. Learn more about this in the .

    The breaking changes in TinyMCE are also documented in the official migration guides for and from .

    chevron-rightUmbraco 10hashtag

    The diff library used in the Backoffice client has been updated and introduces a breaking change since the exposed global object has been renamed from JsDiff to Diff.

    Removes mutable ContentSchedule property from

    hashtag
    Release notes

    You can find a list of all the released Umbraco versions on website. When you visit Our Umbraco website, click on the version number to view the changes made in that specific version.

    hashtag
    Find your upgrade path

    Are you looking to upgrade an Umbraco Cloud project from 9 to 10? Follow the guide instead, as it requires a few steps specific to Umbraco Cloud.

    chevron-right10.latest to the latest Umbraco versionhashtag

    It might be necessary to delete all of the bin and obj directories in each of the projects of your solution. It has been observed that Visual Studio's "Clean Solution" option is sometimes not enough.

    You can upgrade from Umbraco 10 to the latest version directly. If you choose to skip upgrading to versions 11 and 12, you will no longer receive warning messages for obsolete features. However, if you do skip these versions, any breaking changes will no longer compile.

    It is recommended to upgrade to the closest version before upgrading to the latest version. For Umbraco 10, the closest long-term support version is Umbraco 13 so a direct upgrade is possible.

    chevron-right9.latest to 10hashtag

    Important: .NET version 6.0.5 is the minimum required version for Umbraco 10 to be able to run. You can check with dotnet --list-sdks what your latest installed Software Development Kit (SDK) version is. The latest SDK version 6.0.301 includes .NET 6.0.6, while SDK version 6.0.300 includes .NET 6.0.5.

    Watch the for a complete walk-through of all the steps.

    The upgrade path between Umbraco 9 and Umbraco 10 can be done directly by upgrading your project using NuGet. You will need to ensure the packages you are using are available in Umbraco 10.

    SQL CE is no longer a supported database engine

    chevron-right8.latest to 9hashtag

    There is no direct upgrade path from Umbraco 8 to Umbraco 9. It is however possible to migrate from Umbraco 8 sites to Umbraco 9 sites.

    You can reuse your content by restoring your Umbraco 8 database into a new database used for an Umbraco 9 site.

    You need to ensure the packages you are using are available in Umbraco 9, and you will need to reimplement your custom code and templates.

    The direct upgrade path is not possible because the codebase has been fundamentally updated in Umbraco 9. The underlying web framework has been updated from ASP.NET to ASP.NET Core.

    It is not possible to take this step while maintaining full compatibility with Umbraco 8.

    chevron-right8.0.0 to 8.1.0hashtag

    There are a few breaking changes from 8.0.x to 8.1.0. Make sure to check the .

    IPublishedContent breaking changes in 8.1.0

    Due to the there are a few steps you will need to take, to make sure that your site works.

    The IPublishedContent interface is central to Umbraco, as it represents published content and media items at the rendering layer level. This could be in controllers or views. In other words, it is the interface that is used everywhere when building sites.

    chevron-right7.latest to 8.0.0hashtag

    There is no direct upgrade path from Umbraco 7 to Umbraco 8. It is however possible to migrate content from Umbraco 7 sites to Umbraco 8 sites. We have added content migrations in Umbraco 8.1.0 enabling you to migrate your content from Umbraco 7 to Umbraco 8.

    It is not possible to upgrade an Umbraco 7 site to Umbraco 8 because the codebase has been fundamentally updated in Umbraco 8. A lot of outdated code and technology has been removed and instead new, faster, and more secure technology has been implemented.

    In Umbraco 8 we have added improvements and updated dependencies. We have also done a thorough clean-up to make it simpler for you to work with and extend your Umbraco project.

    chevron-right7.6.3 to 7.7.0hashtag

    Version 7.7.0 introduces User Groups, better user management, and security facilities. This means that anything to do with "User Types" no longer exists including APIs that work with User Types. If your code or any package's code refers to "User Type" APIs, you need to make changes to your code. In many cases, we've added backward compatibility for these scenarios and obsoleted APIs that should no longer be used.

    We are now by default using the e-mail address and not the username for the credentials. When trying to login to the backoffice you need to use the e-mail address as opposed to the username. If you do an upgrade from an older version and would like to keep using the username, change the <usernameIsEmail>true</usernameIsEmail> setting to false.

    Version 7.7.2 no longer ships with the CookComputing.XmlRpcV2

    chevron-right7.6.0 to 7.6.3hashtag

    In short:

    In Umbraco version 7.6.2 we made a mistake in the Property Value Converts (PVCs). This was corrected 2 days later in version 7.6.3. If you were having problems with querying the following Data Types on the frontend, make sure to upgrade to 7.6.3:

    • Multi Node Tree Picker

    chevron-right7.4.0 to 7.6.0hashtag

    The three most important things to note are:

    1. In web.config do not change useLegacyEncoding to false if it is currently set to true - changing the password encoding will cause you not being able to log in any more.

    chevron-right7.3.0 to 7.4.0hashtag

    For manual upgrades:

    • Copy the new folder ~/App_Plugins/ModelsBuilder into the site

    chevron-right7.2.0 to 7.3.0hashtag

    Make sure to manually clear your cookies after updating all the files, otherwise you might an error relating to Umbraco.Core.Security.UmbracoBackOfficeIdentity.AddUserDataClaims(). The error looks like: Value cannot be null. Parameter name: value.

    NuGet will do the following for you. If you're upgrading manually make sure to also:

    chevron-right7.1.0 to 7.2.0hashtag
    • Copy in the /Views/Partials/Grid (contains Grid rendering views).

    Follow the to complete the upgrade.

    chevron-right7.0.2 to 7.1.0hashtag
    • Remove the /Install folder.

    Follow the to complete the upgrade.

    chevron-right7.0.1 to 7.0.2hashtag
    • There was an update to the /umbraco/config/create/ui.xml which needs to be manually updated. The original element had this text:

    • The usercontrol

    chevron-right7.0.0 to 7.0.1hashtag
    • Remove all uGoLive dlls from /bin

      • These are not compatible with V7

    chevron-right6.latest to 7hashtag

    Read and follow

    chevron-right4.latest to 6hashtag
    • If your site was ever a version between 4.10.0 and 4.11.4 and you have upgraded to 6.0.0 install the and run it after the upgrade process is finished.

    • The DocType Mixins package is not compatible with v6+ and will cause problems in your Document Types.

    chevron-rightVersion 4hashtag

    Version 4.10.x to 4.11.x

    • If your site was ever a version between 4.10.0 and 4.11.4 install the and run it after the upgrade process is finished.

    Version 4.8.0 to 4.10.0

    Watch this tutorial and learn how to create your own Media Types in Umbraco CMS.

    V13: New login screenarrow-up-right

  • Updated NuGet Dependenciesarrow-up-right

  • Fix `JsonNetSerializer` settings leaking into derived implementationsarrow-up-right

  • Add default property value converters for all value typesarrow-up-right

  • V13: Add config to limit concurrent loginsarrow-up-right

  • Updates and support for re-use of CMS logic in Deployarrow-up-right

  • Don't explicitly index nested property by defaultarrow-up-right

  • Blocks in the Rich Text Editorarrow-up-right

  • Fix FurthestAncestorOrSelfDynamicRootQueryStep and FurthestDescendantOrSelfDynamicRootQuerySteparrow-up-right

  • Remove parameter value/return nullability in `IImageSourceParser`, `ILocalLinkParser` and `IMacroParser`arrow-up-right

  • Update PackageMigrationsPlans collection to be Weighted and not Lazyarrow-up-right

  • Move IContextCache parameter to base Deploy interfaces and add checksum to artifact dependencyarrow-up-right

  • V13: Update IWebHookService to proper casingarrow-up-right

  • V13: Implement webhook as i entityarrow-up-right

  • Change `WebhookEventCollectionBuilder` to set collectionarrow-up-right

  • V13: Log webhook firing exceptions when they happenarrow-up-right

  • Remove date header from webhook request and use constantsarrow-up-right

  • You can find more information about all breaking changes for v13.0.0 on Our Umbracoarrow-up-right website.

    Note: You need to be aware of some things if you are using EF Core, and have installed the Microsoft.EntityFrameworkCore.Design 8.0.0 package:

    • This package has a transient dependency to Microsoft.CodeAnalysis.Common which clashes with the same transient dependency from Umbraco.Cms 13.0.0. This happens because Microsoft.EntityFrameworkCore.Design 8.0.0 requires Microsoft.CodeAnalysis.CSharp.Workspaces in v4.5.0 or higher.

    • If there are no other dependencies that need that package then it installs it in the lowest allowed version (4.5.0). That package then has a strict dependency on Microsoft.CodeAnalysis.Common version 4.5.0. The problem is Umbraco.Cms through its own transient dependencies that require the version of Microsoft.CodeAnalysis.Common to be >= 4.8.0.

    • This can be fixed by installing Microsoft.CodeAnalysis.CSharp.Workspaces version 4.8.0 as a specific package instead of leaving it as a transient dependency. This is because it will then have a strict transient dependency on Microsoft.CodeAnalysis.Common version 4.8.0, which is the same that Umbraco has.

    PagedModel has moved namespace from Umbraco.New.Cms.Core.Models to Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models
  • Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Migrations.PostMigrations.ClearCsrfCookies is removed. The functionality can be archived by implementing a notification handler for the new UmbracoPlanExecutedNotification.

  • Umbraco.Cms.Core.Cache.DistributedCacheBinder is now divided into separate files for each notification handler

  • Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Migrations.PostMigrations.DeleteLogViewerQueryFile was a no-op method removed.

  • Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Migrations.PostMigrations.RebuildPublishedSnapshot replaced with a RebuildCache flag on the MigrationBase

  • A member that is visible outside of the assembly is missing in the compared assembly when required to be present.

    • Umbraco.Cms.Core.Migrations.IMigrationPlanExecutor.Execute(Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Migrations.MigrationPlan,System.String) replaced with Umbraco.Cms.Core.Migrations.IMigrationPlanExecutor.ExecutePlan(Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.* * Migrations.MigrationPlan,System.String) that returns an rich object instead of a string

    • Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Migrations.IMigrationContext.AddPostMigration``1 Removed and replaced with notification

    • Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Migrations.MigrationPlan.AddPostMigration``1

    • Removed and replaced with notification

    • Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Migrations.MigrationPlan.get_PostMigrationTypes removed.

    • Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Migrations.Upgrade.Upgrader.Execute(Umbraco.Cms.Core.Migrations.IMigrationPlanExecutor,Umbraco.Cms.Core.Scoping.IScopeProvider,Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IKeyValueService) was obsolete and is replaced by method taking a ICoreScopeProvider instead of a IScopeProvider

    An abstract member was added to the right side of the comparison to an unsealed type.

    • PublishedPropertyBase now requires inheritors to implement GetDeliveryApiValue(System.Boolean,System.String,System.String)

    A member was added to an interface without a default implementation.

    • Umbraco.Cms.Core.Events.IEventAggregator.Publish2(System.Collections.Generic.IEnumerable{0})

    • Umbraco.Cms.Core.Events.IEventAggregator.PublishAsync2(System.Collections.Generic.IEnumerable{0},System.Threading.CancellationToken)

    • Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.PublishedContent.IPublishedProperty.GetDeliveryApiValue(System.Boolean,System.String,System.String)

    • Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.PublishedContent.IPublishedPropertyType.ConvertInterToDeliveryApiObject(Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.PublishedContent.IPublishedElement,Umbraco.Cms.Core.PropertyEditors.PropertyCacheLevel,System.Object,System.Boolean,System.Boolean)

    • Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.PublishedContent.IPublishedPropertyType.ConvertInterToDeliveryApiObject(Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.PublishedContent.IPublishedElement,Umbraco.Cms.Core.PropertyEditors.PropertyCacheLevel,System.Object,System.Boolean)

    • Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.PublishedContent.IPublishedPropertyType.DeliveryApiCacheLevel

    • Umbraco.Cms.Core.Scoping.ICoreScope.Locks

    • Umbraco.Cms.Core.Migrations.IMigrationPlanExecutor.ExecutePlan(Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Migrations.MigrationPlan,System.String)

    • Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Search.IUmbracoIndexingHandler.RemoveProtectedContent

    • Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Examine.IUmbracoIndex.SupportProtectedContent

    The breaking changes in Umbraco 11 are mainly the removal of classes, methods, and so on, marked as obsolete in Umbraco 9.

    A few methods and classes have also been moved and changed namespace. Decoupled dependencies are documented on the Umbraco Announcements repositoryarrow-up-right.

    The full list of API-breaking changes can be found below.

    Obsolete code removed

    The following have been removed after having been obsoleted since Umbraco 9.

    Umbraco.Extensions

    Umbraco.Cms.Core

    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure

    Umbraco.Cms.Web

    Umbraco.Cms.Tests

    Code moved to new assemblies and namespaces

    The following have been moved to new assemblies and their namespaces have been updated accordingly.

    Umbraco.Extensions

    Umbraco.Cms.Web

    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure

    New interface methods

    A few interfaces have been merged, adding new members to the original interfaces.

    Umbraco.Cms.Core

    No-Operation methods removed

    A method not doing anything for the last couple of major releases have been removed.

    Umbraco.Cms.Core

    Changes due to models made immutable

    A single model have been made immutable, so the default constructor and the setters are not available anymore.

    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure

    Classes that does not inherit from base type anymore

    The following classes now directly inherit from OEmbedProviderBase instead of EmbedProviderBase.

    Umbraco.Cms.Core

    IContent/Content
    to
    read/write
    content schedules.

    Use IContentService.GetContentScheduleByContentId && IContentService.PersistContentSchedule or the optional contentSchedule parameter on IContentService.Save instead.

    Removed redundant event handling codearrow-up-right

    • Removed public methods: PublishedSnapshotServiceEventHandler.Dispose, PublishedSnapshotServiceEventHandler.Dispose(bool), and .PublishedSnapshotServiceEventHandler.Initialize.

    • Removed public ctor.

    Scope provider cleanuparrow-up-right

    • Some public classes in the Cms.Core.Services namespace have moved assembly from Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure to Umbraco.Cms.Core.

    • These same public classes have changed namespace from Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.Implement to Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.

    Update to NPoco5arrow-up-right

    NPoco types and interfaces are part of our public interface which means that this upgrade imposes breaking changes.

    SQLite supportarrow-up-right

    • Removed support for Microsoft SQL Server Compact (SQL CE).

    • Removed ReadLock and WriteLock methods from ISqlSyntaxProvider interface. Use IDistributedLockingMechanism (or IScope which delegates to IDistributedLockingMechanism) instead.

    • Constants for SQL Server provider name moved+consolidated from Core.Constants.DatabaseProviders and Core.Constants.-DbProviderNames to Umbraco.Cms.Persistence.SqlServer.Constants

    • Some SQL Server related services moved from the Umbraco.Infrastructure project to the new Umbraco.Cms.Persistence.

    • SqlServer project with altered namespaces e.g. SqlServerSyntaxProvider, SqlServerBulkSqlInsertProvider, SqlServerDatabaseCreator.

    Added the following methods/properties to ISqlSyntaxProvider. These must be implemented in any downstream implementation e.g:

    • ISqlSyntaxProvider.HandleCreateTable(IDatabase,TableDefinition,Boolean)

    • ISqlSyntaxProvider.GetFieldNameForUpdate()

    • ISqlSyntaxProvider.GetColumn(DatabaseType,String,String,String,String,Boolean)

    • ISqlSyntaxProvider.InsertForUpdateHint(Sql)

    • ISqlSyntaxProvider.AppendForUpdateHint(Sql)

    • ISqlSyntaxProvider.LeftJoinWithNestedJoin(Sql,Func<Sql,Sql>,String)

    Update to ImageSharp v2arrow-up-right

    Update dependency versions:

    • SixLabors.ImageSharp from 1.0.4 to 2.1.1

    • SixLabors.ImageSharp.Web from 1.0.5 to 2.0.0

    Renamed the CachedNameLength property to CacheHashLength on ImagingCacheSettings.

    Moved ImageSharpImageUrlGenerator from project Umbraco.Infrastructure to Umbraco.Web.Common and updated the corresponding namespace and DI registration (from AddCoreInitialServices() to AddUmbracoImageSharp());

    Moved ImageSharp configuration from the AddUmbracoImageSharp() extension method into separate IConfigureOptions<> implementations:

    • The middleware is configured in ConfigureImageSharpMiddlewareOptions (which also replaces ImageSharpConfigurationOptions that previously only set the default ImageSharp configuration);

    • The default physical cache is configured in ConfigurePhysicalFileSystemCacheOptions.

    Migrate Member properties to columns on the Member tablearrow-up-right

    This is breaking because it is no longer possible to access the properties listed below through the IMember.Properties collection. You must now access them through their specific properties that is IMember.IsLockedOut.

    • umbracoMemberFailedPasswordAttempts

    • umbracoMemberApproved

    • umbracoMemberLockedOut

    • umbracoMemberLastLockoutDate

    • umbracoMemberLastLogin

    • umbracoMemberLastPasswordChangeDate

    Additionally, when previously you resolved a Member as published content, all the default properties would be there twice. For instance, IsLockedOut would be there both as a property with the alias umbracoMemberLockedOut and with the alias IsLockedOut. Now it'll only be there once, with the alias being the name of the property, so IsLockedOut in this instance.

    Lastly the nullable dates on a user, i.e. LastLoginLate will now be null instead of DateTime.MinValue when getting a user with the UserService.

    Update examine to version 3arrow-up-right

    Examine 3 breaking changes:

    • ValueSet immutable.

    • ValueSetValidationResult is renamed to ValueSetValidationStatus and ValueSetValidationResult is now a type.

    Async support for content findersarrow-up-right

    Has changed to:

    Improve redirect Content finder scalabilityarrow-up-right

    • Added more methods to IRedirectUrlRepository and IRedirectUrlService.cs.

    Fix Block List settings exception and optimize PVCsarrow-up-right

    • Added a new method on IPublishedModelFactory: Type GetModelType(string? alias);

    • The generic types of a BlockListItem<TContent, TSettings>instance in theBlockListModelreturned byBlockListPropertyValueConverteris now determined by calling this new method, which can be different and cause aModelBindingException` in your views.

    Async tree searcharrow-up-right

    Has changed to:

    Moved StackQueue to correct namespacearrow-up-right

    StackQueue has been moved from Umbraco.Core.Collections to the Umbraco.Cms.Core.Collections namespace.

    Globalsetting SqlWriteLockTimeOut has been removed

    This setting has been superseded by DistributedLockingWriteLockDefaultTimeout.

    GlobalSetting UmbracoPath cannot be configured

    It is no longer possible to rename the /Umbraco folder path using configuration. The property still exists but is hardcoded to /Umbraco and will be removed in Umbraco 12, planned for release in June 2023.

    There is no official migration path from SQL CE to another database engine.

    The following options may suit your needs:

    • Follow a community guide to migrate from a SQL CE database to SQL Server, like the article by Jan Reilinkarrow-up-right

    • Setup a new database for v10 and use uSyncarrow-up-right to transfer document types and content across.

    • Setup a new database for v10 and use a premium tool such as redgate SQL Data Comparearrow-up-right to copy database contents across.

    • Setup a new database for v10 and use a premium tool such as to transfer document types and content across.

    Steps to upgrade using Visual Studio

    It's recommended that you upgrade the site offline, and test the upgrade fully before deploying it to the production environment.

    1. Stop your site in IIS to prevent any changes being made to the database or filesystem while you are upgrading.

    2. Open your Umbraco 9 project in Visual Studio.

    3. Right-click on the project name in the Solution Explorer and select Properties.

    4. Select .NET 6.0 from the Target Framework drop-down.

    5. Go to Tools > NuGet Package Manager > Manage NuGet Packages for Solution...

    6. Go to the Installed tab in the NuGet Package manager.

    7. Choose Umbraco.Cms.

    8. Select 10.0.0 from the Version drop-down and click Install to upgrade your project to version 10.

    9. Update Program.cs to the following:

    1. Remove the following files and folders:

      • /wwwroot/umbraco

      • /umbraco/PartialViewMacros

      • /umbraco/UmbracoBackOffice

      • /umbraco/UmbracoInstall

      • /umbraco/UmbracoWebsite

      • /umbraco/config/lang

      • /umbraco/config/appsettings-schema.json

    2. If using Umbraco Forms, update your files and folders according to the for version 10 article.

    3. Restart your site in IIS, build and run your project to finish the installation of Umbraco 10.

    To re-enable the appsettings IntelliSense, you must update your schema reference in the appsettings.json file and any other appsettings.{Environment}.json files from:

    To:

    To upgrade to Umbraco 10, your database needs to be at least on Umbraco 8.18.

    Upgrade of any publicly hosted environment

    When the upgrade is completed and tested, and prior to deploying to any publicly accessible environment, you should consider the following:

    1. Ensure you have backups for both the database and the file system.

    2. Stop the site so it is not accessible during the upgrade process.

    3. Delete the relevant folders from the filesystem prior to deploying:

      • /wwwroot/umbraco

      • /umbraco/PartialViewMacros

      • /umbraco/UmbracoBackOffice

      • /umbraco/UmbracoInstall

      • /umbraco/UmbracoWebsite

      • /umbraco/config/lang

      • /umbraco/config/appsettings-schema.json

    4. If you are using Umbraco Forms, update your files and folders according to the for version 10 article.

    5. Deploy the site how you normally would to your public facing environment.

    6. Start the site. At this point it will launch and upgrade the database, after which the site should become accessible and your upgrade is complete.

    7. Check the logs for any errors which may have occurred during the upgrade process.

    The introduction of multilingual support in version 8 required changes to the interface. For instance, a property value could be obtained with GetPropertyValue(alias) in version 7. Version 8 requires a new parameter for culture, and the call thus became Value(alias, culture).

    In the excitement of the version 8 release, we assumed that IPublishedContent was "done". By our tests, everything was looking good. However, feedback from early testers showed that the interface was in some places odd or inconsistent or had issues.

    Fixing the bugs is a requirement. Some of the required bug fixes could not be achieved without introducing some breaking changes.

    At that point, we decided to give IPublishedContent some love. We fixed the bugs and made it clean, friendly, discoverable, and predictable for the entire life of version 8.

    Breaking changes to such a central interface is not something we take lightly. Even though they do not impact the "concepts" nor require heavy refactoring, they may demand an amount of small fixes here and there.

    The general idea underlying these changes is that:

    • The proper way to retrieve "something" from an IPublishedContent instance is always through a method, for example: Children(). And, when that method can be multilingual, the method accepts a culture parameter, which can be left null to get the "current" culture value.

    • To reduce the amount of breaking changes, and to simplify things for non-multilingual sites, existing properties such as document.Name and document.Children (and others) still exist, and return the value for the current culture. In other words, these properties are now implemented as document.Name => document.Name() or document.Children => document.Children().

    The rest of this document presents each change in details.

    More interfaces

    It was possible to mock and test the IPublishedContent interface in version 7. It has been improved in version 8, but it still relies on concrete PublishedContentType and PublishedPropertyType classes to represent the content types, which complicates things.

    In version 8.1, these two classes are abstracted as IPublishedContentType and IPublishedPropertyType, thus making IPublishedContent easier to mock and test.

    CHANGE: This impacts every method accepting or returning a content type. For instance, the signature of most IPropertyValueConverter methods changes. References to PublishedContentType must be replaced with references to IPublishedContentType.

    The following IPublishedContent members change:

    Name

    The document.Name property is complemented by the document.Name(string culture = null) extension method. The property returns the name for the current culture. The document.GetCulture(...).Name syntax is removed.

    CHANGE: Calls to document.GetCulture(culture).Name must be replaced with document.Name(culture).

    UrlSegment

    The document.UrlSegment property is complemented by the document.UrlSegment(string culture = null) extension method. The property returns the Url segment for the current culture. The document.GetCulture(...).UrlSegment syntax is removed.

    CHANGE: Calls to document.GetCulture(culture).UrlSegment must be replaced with document.UrlSegment(culture).

    Culture

    The document.GetCulture() method is removed. The proper way to get a culture date is document.CultureDate(string culture = null). The document.Cultures property now returns the invariant culture, for invariant documents.

    CHANGE: Calls to document.GetCulture(culture).Date must be replaced with document.CultureDate(culture). Calls to document.Cultures must take into account the invariant culture.

    Children

    The document.Children property is complemented by the document.Children(string culture = null) extension method which, when a culture is specified always return children available for the specified culture. The property returns the children available for the current culture.

    A new document.ChildrenForAllCultures property is introduced, which returns all children, regardless of whether they are available for a culture or not.

    CHANGE: Calls to document.Children may have to be replaced by document.ChildrenForAllCultures depending on if the 8.0.x usage of this was relying on it returning unfiltered/all children regardless of the current routed culture.

    Url

    The document.Url property is complemented by the document.Url(string culture = null, UrlMode mode = UrlMode.Auto) extension method. The document.GetUrl(...) and document.UrlAbsolute() methods are removed. The UrlProviderMode enumeration is renamed UrlMode.

    CHANGE: Calls to document.GetUrl(...) must be replaced with document.Url(...). Calls to document.UrlAbsolute() must be replaced with document.Url(mode: UrlMode.Absolute).

    UmbracoContext

    Due to the UrlProviderMode enumeration being renamed UrlMode, the signature of some overloads of the Url(...) method has changed. Methods that do not have a mode parameter remain unchanged.

    CHANGE: Code such as context.Url(1234, UrlProviderMode.Absolute) must become context.Url(1234, UrlMode.Absolute).

    The UmbracoContext class gives access to the rendering layer, which is more than a "cache". To reflect this, its ContentCache and MediaCache properties are renamed Content and Media. However, the old properties remain as obsolete properties.

    CHANGE: None required in 8.1, but code such as context.ContentCache.GetById(1234) should eventually be converted to context.Content.GetById(1234) as the obsolete properties may be removed in a further release.

    GetCulture

    Version 7 had a document.GetCulture() method that was deriving a culture from domains configured in the tree. Somehow, that method was lost during version 8 development (issue #5269arrow-up-right).

    Because that method is useful, especially when building traditional, non-multilingual sites, it has been re-introduced in version 8.1 as document.GetCultureFromDomains().

    CHANGE: None.

    DomainHelper

    DomainHelper has been replaced with a static DomainUtilities class.

    CHANGE: It is rare that DomainHelper is used in code since it only contains one public method but if developers are using this, it can no longer be injected since it's now a static class called DomainUtilities.

    Models Builder

    If you're using ModelsBuilder in dll mode you need to delete the dlls before upgrading. Otherwise, they're going to be wrong and cause your whole site to throw errors.

    If you're using ModelsBuilder in AppData mode and you have your generated models in your solution you need to update them after upgrading. PublishedContentType will need to be replaced with IPublishedContentType. If you have an implementation of the PropertyValueConverter class, you need to replace all references to PublishedPropertyType with IPublishedPropertyType within that class. Only after you do that will your solution build again.

    AutoMapper

    Umbraco 8.1 replaces AutoMapper with UmbracoMapper. This in itself will not break anything on your site. If you have used AutoMapper in your own code you will have to either include the package yourself or switch your implementation to use UmbracoMapper.

    Follow the upgrade guide for Umbraco 8 to complete the upgrade

    assembly. If you reference this assembly or have a package that requires this assembly, you need to copy it back into your website.

    This version also ships with far fewer client files that were only relevant for older versions of Umbraco (i.e. < 7.0.0). There might be some packages that were referencing these old client files. If you see missing image references you may need to contact the vendor of the package in question to update their references.

    Follow the upgrade guide for Umbraco 7 to complete the upgrade.

    Related Links

  • Member Picker

  • Depending on whether you tried to fix the problem with those, you will need to fix them after you upgrade to 7.6.3.

    Property Value Converters (PVC)

    Umbraco stores data for Data Types in different ways. For a lot of pickers it will store 1072 or 1083,1283. These numbers refer to the identifier of the item in Umbraco. In the past, when building your templates, you would manually have to take that value and find the content item it belongs to. Then you would be able to get the data you wanted from there. An example of that is shown below:

    In Umbraco 7.6.0, this is what you would do instead:

    This is possible using Models Builder and through the inclusion of core property value convertersarrow-up-right, a package by community member Jeavon Leopold.

    To not break everybody's sites (the results of queries are different when PVCs are enabled), we disabled these PVCs by default.

    Umbraco 7.6.0 also came with new pickers that store their data as a UDI (Umbraco Identifier)arrow-up-right. We wanted to simplify the use of these new pickers and by default we wanted PVC's to always be enabled for those pickers.

    We noticed that some new pickers also got their PVC's disabled when the configuration setting was set to false (<EnablePropertyValueConverters>false</EnablePropertyValueConverters>).

    To make everything consistent, we made sure that the UDI pickers would always use PVC's in 7.6.2, this however reversed the behavior. So when PVC's were enabled, the property would not be converted and when PVC's were disabled, the property would be converted after all. This is the exact opposite behavior of 7.6.2.

    So we have fixed this now in 7.6.3.

    This issue only affects:

    • Multi Node Tree Picker

    • Related Links

    • Member Picker

    Have you already upgraded to 7.6.2 and fixed queries for those three Data Types? Then you have to do that again in version 7.6.3.

    Follow the upgrade guide for Umbraco 7 to complete the upgrade.

    In umbracoSettings.config leave EnablePropertyValueConverters set to false - this will help your existing content queries to still work.

  • In tinyMceConfig.config make sure to remove <plugin loadOnFrontend="true">umbracolink</plugin> so that the rich text editor works as it should.

  • Breaking Changes

    Dependencies

    UrlRewriting.Net

    UrlRewriting was old, leaking memory, and slowing down website startup when dealing with more than a few rules. It's entirely replaced by the IIS Url Rewritearrow-up-right extension.

    Json.Net

    Json.Net has been updated to version 10.0.0 to benefit from improvements in features, fixes, and performances (see release notesarrow-up-right). This might be a breaking change for people relying on one of the changed functionality.

    Log4net

    Umbraco has used a custom build of an old (1.2.11) version of log4net that supported Medium Trust. However, Umbraco itself does not support Medium Trust anymore, and therefore log4net has been upgraded to the standard, latest build of log4net 2.0.8.

    ImageProcessor

    An optional parameter has been added to the GetCropUrl method in order to support the background color parameter. This breaks the method signature and therefore might require a recompile of user's code.

    HtmlAgilityPack

    The HtmlAgilityPack has been upgraded to version 1.4.9.5. The Umbraco upgrade process should take care of setting up the binding redirects appropriately.

    Core

    Membership Provider Encoding

    The Membership Provider useLegacyEncoding setting is now false by default, as the legacy password encoding has weaknesses.

    This change only impacts new installs (no change for upgrades).

    Property Value Converters

    A large amount of property value converters contributed by the community have been merged in and are now the default value converters. These converters change the object types returned by GetPropertyValue for more convenient types.

    Instead of returning comma-separated string values like it did before, the SliderValueConverter now returns a decimal or a Range<decimal> value that can be used directly in views.

    This change only impacts new installs (no change for upgrades).

    The new property value converters are controlled by an umbracoSettings.config setting. In the section settings/content, setting EnablePropertyValueConverters needs to be present and true to activate them.

    Database

    Umbraco has been using a PetaPoco-managed UmbracoDatabase instance since version 7 came out. We realized that some of our legacy code still bypassed that mechanism and used parallel, out-of-band database connections, causing issues with transactions.

    The legacy code has been refactored to rely on the UmbracoDatabase instance. However, because that database is disposed of during EndRequest, the code that ran after it has been disposed may not work anymore. This should then be updated to use either an HttpModule event that occurs before EndRequest or the new UmbracoModule.EndRequest event.

    More details are available on issue 146arrow-up-right on the 301 Redirect Tracker GitHub issue tracker.

    Scopes

    Version 7.6 introduces the notion of scopes, which allow for wrapping multiple service-level operations in one single transaction. The scopes API is partially public. Scopes are not meant for public use at this stage and we need a few more releases to ensure that the APIs are stable.

    Scopes should not change how Umbraco functions.

    Introducing scopes means that some public APIs signatures are changing. Most of these changes target internal and/or non-breaking APIs (as per our guidelinesarrow-up-right). This should therefore have no impact on sites but may break unit tests.

    Property Editors storing UDI instead of ID

    The property editors for pickers for content, media, members, and related links have been updated to store UDI instead of the node ID. Pickers in sites being upgraded have been marked as obsolete but will continue to work as they always did.

    New sites will have the obsolete pickers filtered out from the list of available property editors, but they can be enabled by a configuration flag.

    Rich Text Editor (RTE) Images attributes

    For a long time, we had a rel attribute on an <img> tag when inserted into the RTE. This is invalid HTML markup. We worked around this by stripping this attribute using a Property Editor Value converter. Some developers relied on this attribute so we didn't change it to a "data-id" attribute which would have been valid. In 7.6 we are not storing integer IDs in these attributes. Instead of storing UDI values so with this change we no longer use rel or data-id and instead there will be a "data-udi" attribute. This change should affect only a small amount of people that were previously relying on the values from the "rel" attribute.

    Others

    We are shipping with SignalR in the core at version 2.2.1. If you already have SignalR installed into your app and are using an older version there may be conflicts.

    The creation and editing of WebForms templates will no longer be supported as for version 7.6.0.

    Upgrading via NuGet

    This is an important one and there was no perfect solution to this. We have removed the UrlRewriting dependency and no longer ship with it. However, if you are using it we didn't want to have NuGet delete all of your rewrites. The good news is that if you are using it, the NuGet upgrade will not delete your rewrite file and everything should continue to work.

    However, if you are not using it, you will get an error after upgrading. Here's how to fix it:

    Since you aren't using UrlRewriting you will have probably never edited the UrlRewriting file. In this case, NuGet will detect that and remove it. However you will need to manually remove these UrlRewriting references from your web.config:

    and

    Remove the following httpModules from your web.config:

    and

    Forms

    Umbraco Forms 6.0.0 has been released to be compatible with Umbraco 7.6. It is a new major version release of Forms primarily due to the strict dependency on 7.6+. If you are using Forms, you will need to update it to version 6.0.0

    There are important Forms upgrade documentation that you will need to read.arrow-up-right.

    Courier

    Umbraco Courier 3.1.0 has been released to be compatible with Umbraco 7.6. If you are using Courier, you will need to update it to version 3.1.0.

    Follow the upgrade guide for Umbraco 7 to complete the upgrade

    Do not forget to merge ~/Config/trees.config and ~/Config/Dashboard.config - they contain new and updated entries that are required to be there
    • If you forget trees.config you will either not be able to browse the Developer section or you will be logged out immediately when trying to go to the developer section

  • You may experience an error saying Invalid object name 'umbracoUser' - this can be fixed by clearing your cookies on localhost

  • Follow the upgrade guide for Umbraco 7 to complete the upgrade.

    Delete bin/Microsoft.Web.Helpers.dll
  • Delete bin/Microsoft.Web.Mvc.FixedDisplayModes.dll

  • Delete bin/System.Net.Http.dll

  • Delete bin/System.Net.Http.*.dll (all dll files starting with System.Net.Http) except for System.Net.Http.Formatting.dll

  • Delete bin/umbraco.XmlSerializers.dll

  • Add this in the appSetting section of your web.config file: <add key="owin:appStartup" value="UmbracoDefaultOwinStartup" />

  • Other considerations:

    • WebApi has been updated, normally you don’t have to do anything unless you have custom webapi configuration:

      • See this article if you are using WebApiConfig.Register: https://www.asp.net/mvc/overview/releases/how-to-upgrade-an-aspnet-mvc-4-and-web-api-project-to-aspnet-mvc-5-and-web-api-2arrow-up-right

      • You need to update your web.config file to have the correct WebApi version references - this should be done by doing a compare/merge of your ~/web.config file with the ~/web.config file in the release

    • MVC has been updated to MVC5

      • You need to update your web.config file to have the correct MVC version references - this should be done by doing a compare/merge of your ~/web.config file with the ~/web.config file in the release

    • It is not required that you merge the changes for the Examine index paths in the ExamineIndex.config file. However, if you do, your indexes will be rebuilt on startup because Examine will detect that they don’t exist at the new location.

    • It's highly recommended to clear the browser cache - the ClientDependency version is automatically bumped during installation which should force the browser cache to refresh, however in some edge cases this might not be enough.

    Follow the upgrade guide for Umbraco 7 to complete the upgrade.

    value has changed to:
    /create/user.ascx
    . This is a required change otherwise creating a new user will not work.
  • There is a breaking change to be aware of, full details can be found herearrow-up-right.

  • Follow the upgrade guide for Umbraco 7 to complete the upgrade.

    Move appSettings/connectionStrings back to web.config

    • If you are on 7.0.0 you should migrate these settings into the web.config instead of having them in separate files in /config/

    • The keys in config/AppSettings.config need to be moved back to the web.config <appSettings> section and similarly, the config/ConnectionStrings.config holds the Umbraco database connections in v7.0.0 and they should be moved back to the web.config <connectionStrings> section.

    • /config/AppSettings.config and /config/ConnectionString.config can be removed after the contents have been moved back to web.config.

  • Delete all files in ~/App_Data/TEMP/Razor/

    • Related to issues with razor macros

  • Follow the upgrade guide for Umbraco 7 to complete the upgrade.

    Delete the bin/umbraco.linq.core.dll file

  • Copy the new files and folders from the zip file into your site's folder

    • /App_Plugins

    • /Views

    • Global.asax

  • Remove the Config/formHandlers.config file

  • Version 4.7.2 to 4.8.0

    • Delete the bin/App_Browsers.dll file

    • Delete the bin/App_global.asax.dll file

    • Delete the bin/Fizzler.Systems.HtmlAgilityPack.dll file

    • For people using uComponents 3.1.2 or below, 4.8.0 breaks support for it. Either upgrade to a newer version beforehand or follow the workaround

    Version 4.7.1.1 to 4.7.2

    • Delete the bin/umbraco.MacroEngines.Legacy.dll file

    Version 4.6.1 to 4.7.1.1

    • Delete bin/Iron*.dll (all dll files starting with "Iron")

    • Delete bin/RazorEngine*.dll (all dll files starting with "RazorEngine")

    • Delete bin/umbraco.MacroEngines.Legacy.dll

    • Delete bin/Microsoft.Scripting.Debugging.dll

    • Delete bin/Microsoft.Dynamic.dll

    Use ISO codes instead of language IDs for fallback languages and translationsarrow-up-right
    Breaking changes for the Delivery APIarrow-up-right
    Microsoftarrow-up-right
    Rich Text Editor documentation
    version 4 to 5arrow-up-right
    version 5 to 6arrow-up-right
    Update 'diff' from 3.5.0 to 5.0.0arrow-up-right
    Content Schedule performancearrow-up-right
    Our Umbracoarrow-up-right
    Upgrading your project from Umbraco 9 to 10arrow-up-right
    Long-term Support (LTS) majorarrow-up-right
    'Upgrading from Umbraco 9 to Umbraco 10 video tutorial'arrow-up-right
    full listarrow-up-right
    changes in IPublishedContentarrow-up-right
    Migrate your content to Umbraco 8
    upgrade guide for Umbraco 7
    upgrade guide for Umbraco 7
    the full v7 upgrade guide
    fixup packagearrow-up-right
    fixup packagearrow-up-right
    Umbraco.Extensions.ServiceCollectionExtensions.AddUnique<TImplementing>(Microsoft.
    
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Constants.Conventions.Member.
    
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Persistence.Repositories.Implement.
    
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Security.ConfigureIISServerOptions
    
    Umbraco.Cms.Tests.Common.Testing.TestOptionAttributeBase.
    Umbraco.Extensions.NPocoDatabaseExtensions.ConfigureNPocoBulkExtensions()
    
    
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Media.ImageSharpImageUrlGenerator
    
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Persistence.LocalDb
    Umbraco
    
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMacroService.GetAll(
    
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMembershipMemberService<T>.
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.PublishedCache.DataSource.ContentData.
    
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.EmbedProviders.DailyMotion
    
    bool TryFindContent(IPublishedRequestBuilder request);
    Task<bool> TryFindContent(IPublishedRequestBuilder request);
    IEnumerable<SearchResultEntity?> Search(string query, int
    
    Task<EntitySearchResults> SearchAsync(string query, int
    <nodeType alias="users">
        <header>User</header>
        <usercontrol>/create/simple.ascx</usercontrol>
        <tasks>
        <create assembly="umbraco" type="userTasks" />
        <delete assembly="umbraco" type="userTasks" />
        </tasks>
    </nodeType>
    public class Program
    {
        public static void Main(string[] args)
            => CreateHostBuilder(args)
                .Build()
                .Run();
    
        // The calls to `ConfigureUmbracoDefaults` and `webBuilder.UseStaticWebAssets()` are new.
        public static IHostBuilder CreateHostBuilder(string[] args) =>
            Host.CreateDefaultBuilder(args)
                .ConfigureUmbracoDefaults()
                .ConfigureWebHostDefaults(webBuilder =>
                {
                    webBuilder.UseStaticWebAssets();
                    webBuilder.UseStartup<Startup>();
                });
    }
    "$schema": "./umbraco/config/appsettings-schema.json",
    "$schema": "./appsettings-schema.json",
    @{
        IPublishedContent contactPage;
        var contactPageId = Model.Content.GetPropertyValue<int>("contactPagePicker");
        if (contactPageId > 0)
        {
            contactPage = Umbraco.TypedContent(contactPageId);
        }
    }
    
    <p>
      <a href="@contactPage.Url">@contactPage.Name</a>
    </p>
    <p>
        <a href="@Model.Content.ContactPagePicker.Url">@Model.ContactPagePicker.Name</a>
    </p>
    <section name="urlrewritingnet" restartOnExternalChanges="true" requirePermission="false" type="UrlRewritingNet.Configuration.UrlRewriteSection, UrlRewritingNet.UrlRewriter" />
    <urlrewritingnet configSource="config\UrlRewriting.config" />
    <system.web>
    <httpModules>
        <add name="UrlRewriteModule" type="UrlRewritingNet.Web.UrlRewriteModule, UrlRewritingNet.UrlRewriter"/>
        ...
    </httpModules>
    <system.web>
    <system.webServer>
        <modules>
        <remove name="UrlRewriteModule"/>
        <add name="UrlRewriteModule" type="UrlRewritingNet.Web.UrlRewriteModule, UrlRewritingNet.UrlRewriter"/>
        ...
        </modules>
    </system.webServer>
    The upgrader will take care of updating all other web.config’s (in all other folders, for example, the Views and App_Plugins folders) to have the correct settings
  • For general ASP.NET MVC 5 upgrade details see: https://www.asp.net/mvc/overview/releases/how-to-upgrade-an-aspnet-mvc-4-and-web-api-project-to-aspnet-mvc-5-and-web-api-2arrow-up-right

  • Extensions
    .
    DependencyInjection
    .
    IServiceCollection
    )
    Umbraco.Extensions.EnumExtensions.HasFlagAll<T>(T, T)
    Umbraco.Extensions.FriendlyImageCropperTemplateExtensions.GetLocalCropUrl(Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.MediaWithCrops, string, string?)
    IsApproved
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Constants.Conventions.Member.IsApprovedLabel
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Constants.Conventions.Member.IsLockedOut
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Constants.Conventions.Member.IsLockedOutLabel
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Constants.Conventions.Member.LastLoginDate
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Constants.Conventions.Member.LastLoginDateLabel
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Constants.Conventions.Member.LastPasswordChangeDate
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Constants.Conventions.Member.LastPasswordChangeDateLabel
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Constants.Conventions.Member.LastLockoutDate
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Constants.Conventions.Member.LastLockoutDateLabel
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Constants.Conventions.Member.FailedPasswordAttempts
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Constants.Conventions.Member.FailedPasswordAttemptsLabel
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.WebAssets.IRuntimeMinifier.Reset()
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IExternalLoginService
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ExternalLoginService.ExternalLoginService(
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Scoping.ICoreScopeProvider,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Logging.ILoggerFactory,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Events.IEventMessagesFactory,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Persistence.Repositories.IExternalLoginRepository)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ExternalLoginService.GetExternalLogins(int)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ExternalLoginService.GetExternalLoginTokens(int)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ExternalLoginService.Save(int,
    System.Collections.Generic.IEnumerable<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Security.IExternalLogin>)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ExternalLoginService.Save(int,
    System.Collections.Generic.IEnumerable<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Security.IExternalLoginToken>)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ExternalLoginService.DeleteUserLogins(int)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMacroWithAliasService
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ITwoFactorLoginService2
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.LocalizedTextService.LocalizedTextService(
    System.Collections.Generic.IDictionary<System.Globalization.CultureInfo, System.Collections.Generic.IDictionary<string, System.Collections.Generic.IDictionary<string, string>>>,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Logging.ILogger<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.LocalizedTextService>)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ServiceContext.ServiceContext(
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IPublicAccessService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IDomainService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IAuditService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ILocalizedTextService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ITagService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IContentService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IUserService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMemberService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMediaService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IContentTypeService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMediaTypeService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IDataTypeService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IFileService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ILocalizationService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IPackagingService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IServerRegistrationService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IEntityService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IRelationService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMacroService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMemberTypeService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMemberGroupService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.INotificationService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IExternalLoginService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IRedirectUrlService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IConsentService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IKeyValueService>?,
    System.Lazy<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IContentTypeBaseServiceProvider>?)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ServiceContext.CreatePartial(
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IContentService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMediaService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IContentTypeService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMediaTypeService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IDataTypeService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IFileService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ILocalizationService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IPackagingService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IEntityService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IRelationService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMemberGroupService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMemberTypeService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMemberService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IUserService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ITagService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.INotificationService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ILocalizedTextService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IAuditService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IDomainService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMacroService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IPublicAccessService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IExternalLoginService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IServerRegistrationService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IRedirectUrlService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IConsentService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IKeyValueService?,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IContentTypeBaseServiceProvider?)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.TwoFactorLoginService.TwoFactorLoginService(
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Persistence.Repositories.ITwoFactorLoginRepository,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Scoping.ICoreScopeProvider,
    System.Collections.Generic.IEnumerable<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Security.ITwoFactorProvider>,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Options.IOptions<Microsoft.AspNetCore.Identity.IdentityOptions>,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Options.IOptions<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Security.BackOfficeIdentityOptions>)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Routing.DefaultUrlProvider.DefaultUrlProvider(
    Microsoft.Extensions.Options.IOptionsMonitor<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.Models.RequestHandlerSettings>,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Logging.ILogger<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Routing.DefaultUrlProvider>,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Routing.ISiteDomainMapper,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Web.IUmbracoContextAccessor,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Routing.UriUtility)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Persistence.Repositories.IExternalLoginRepository
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Persistence.Repositories.IMacroWithAliasRepository
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Persistence.Repositories.IMemberRepository.SetLastLogin(string, System.DateTime)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Notifications.UmbracoApplicationComponentsInstallingNotification
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Notifications.UmbracoApplicationMainDomAcquiredNotification
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Notifications.UmbracoApplicationStartingNotification.UmbracoApplicationStartingNotification(Umbraco.Cms.Core.RuntimeLevel)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Notifications.UmbracoApplicationStoppingNotification.UmbracoApplicationStoppingNotification()
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.IContentTypeWithHistoryCleanup
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Language.Language(Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.Models.GlobalSettings, string)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.RelationType.RelationType(string, string, bool, System.Nullable<System.Guid>, System.Nullable<System.Guid>)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.PublishedContent.PublishedContentType.PublishedContentType(int, string,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.PublishedContent.PublishedItemType,
    System.Collections.Generic.IEnumerable<string>,
    System.Collections.Generic.IEnumerable<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.PublishedContent.PublishedPropertyType>,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.ContentVariation,
    bool)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.PublishedContent.PublishedContentType.PublishedContentType(int, string,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.PublishedContent.PublishedItemType, System.Collections.Generic.IEnumerable<string>,
    System.Func<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.PublishedContent.IPublishedContentType,
    System.Collections.Generic.IEnumerable<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.PublishedContent.IPublishedPropertyType>>,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.ContentVariation,
    bool)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Mapping.ContentTypeMapDefinition.ContentTypeMapDefinition(
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.Mapping.CommonMapper,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.PropertyEditors.PropertyEditorCollection,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IDataTypeService,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IFileService,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IContentTypeService,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMediaTypeService,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMemberTypeService,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Logging.ILoggerFactory,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Strings.IShortStringHelper,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Options.IOptions<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.Models.GlobalSettings>,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Hosting.IHostingEnvironment)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.ContentEditing.UserGroupPermissionsSave.Validate(System.ComponentModel.DataAnnotations.ValidationContext)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Install.InstallSteps.TelemetryIdentifierStep.TelemetryIdentifierStep(
    Microsoft.Extensions.Logging.ILogger<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Install.InstallSteps.TelemetryIdentifierStep>,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Options.IOptions<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.Models.GlobalSettings>,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.IConfigManipulator)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.IO.ViewHelper.ViewHelper(Umbraco.Cms.Core.IO.IFileSystem)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.HealthChecks.Checks.Security.BaseHttpHeaderCheck.BaseHttpHeaderCheck(
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Hosting.IHostingEnvironment,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ILocalizedTextService,
    string,
    string,
    string,
    bool)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.DependencyInjection.UmbracoBuilderExtensions.AddOEmbedProvider<T>(Umbraco.Cms.Core.DependencyInjection.IUmbracoBuilder)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.DependencyInjection.UmbracoBuilderExtensions.OEmbedProviders(Umbraco.Cms.Core.DependencyInjection.IUmbracoBuilder)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.Models.RequestHandlerSettings.CharCollection.get
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.Models.RequestHandlerSettings.CharCollection.set
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Composing.IUserComposer
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Security.BackOfficeUserStore.BackOfficeUserStore(
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Scoping.ICoreScopeProvider,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IUserService,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IEntityService,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IExternalLoginService,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Options.IOptions<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.Models.GlobalSettings>,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Mapping.IUmbracoMapper,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Security.BackOfficeErrorDescriber,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Cache.AppCaches)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Security.MemberUserStore.MemberUserStore(
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMemberService,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Mapping.IUmbracoMapper,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Scoping.ICoreScopeProvider,
    Microsoft.AspNetCore.Identity.IdentityErrorDescriber,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache.IPublishedSnapshotAccessor,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IExternalLoginService)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Logging.Viewer.ILogViewer.GetLogLevel()
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Logging.Viewer.SerilogLogViewerSourceBase.SerilogLogViewerSourceBase(
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Logging.Viewer.ILogViewerConfig,
    Serilog.ILogger)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Logging.Viewer.SerilogLogViewerSourceBase.GetLogLevel()
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.JsonConfigManipulator.JsonConfigManipulator(Microsoft.Extensions.Configuration.IConfiguration)
    MemberRepository
    .
    SetLastLogin
    (
    string
    ,
    System
    .
    DateTime
    )
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Packaging.PackageMigrationBase.PackageMigrationBase(
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IPackagingService,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IMediaService,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.IO.MediaFileManager,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.PropertyEditors.MediaUrlGeneratorCollection,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Strings.IShortStringHelper,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IContentTypeBaseServiceProvider,
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Migrations.IMigrationContext)
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Migrations.Install.DatabaseSchemaCreator.DatabaseSchemaCreator(
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Persistence.IUmbracoDatabase?,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Logging.ILogger<Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Migrations.Install.DatabaseSchemaCreator>,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Logging.ILoggerFactory,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.IUmbracoVersion,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Events.IEventAggregator)
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Migrations.Install.DatabaseSchemaCreatorFactory.DatabaseSchemaCreatorFactory(
    Microsoft.Extensions.Logging.ILogger<Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Migrations.Install.DatabaseSchemaCreator>,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Logging.ILoggerFactory,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.IUmbracoVersion,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Events.IEventAggregator)
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.HostedServices.RecurringHostedServiceBase.RecurringHostedServiceBase(
    System.TimeSpan,
    System.TimeSpan)
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.HostedServices.ReportSiteTask.ReportSiteTask(
    Microsoft.Extensions.Logging.ILogger<Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.HostedServices.ReportSiteTask>,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.IUmbracoVersion,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Options.IOptions<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.Models.GlobalSettings>)
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.RuntimeMinification.SmidgeRuntimeMinifier.Reset()
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Middleware.UmbracoRequestMiddleware.UmbracoRequestMiddleware(
    Microsoft.Extensions.Logging.ILogger<Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Middleware.UmbracoRequestMiddleware>,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Web.IUmbracoContextFactory,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Cache.IRequestCache,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Events.IEventAggregator,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Logging.IProfiler,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Hosting.IHostingEnvironment,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Routing.UmbracoRequestPaths,
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.WebAssets.BackOfficeWebAssets,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Options.IOptionsMonitor<Smidge.Options.SmidgeOptions>,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IRuntimeState,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.PublishedContent.IVariationContextAccessor,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.PublishedCache.IDefaultCultureAccessor)
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.Website.Controllers.UmbLoginController.UmbLoginController(
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Web.IUmbracoContextAccessor,
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Persistence.IUmbracoDatabaseFactory,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ServiceContext,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Cache.AppCaches,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Logging.IProfilingLogger,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Routing.IPublishedUrlProvider,
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Security.IMemberSignInManager)
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.BackOffice.Trees.MemberTypeAndGroupTreeControllerBase.MemberTypeAndGroupTreeControllerBase(
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ILocalizedTextService,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.UmbracoApiControllerTypeCollection,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Trees.IMenuItemCollectionFactory,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Events.IEventAggregator)
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.BackOffice.Controllers.CurrentUserController.CurrentUserController(
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.IO.MediaFileManager,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Options.IOptions<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.Models.ContentSettings>,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Hosting.IHostingEnvironment,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.IImageUrlGenerator,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Security.IBackOfficeSecurityAccessor,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IUserService,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Mapping.IUmbracoMapper,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Security.IBackOfficeUserManager,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Logging.ILoggerFactory,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ILocalizedTextService,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Cache.AppCaches,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Strings.IShortStringHelper,
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.Security.IPasswordChanger<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Security.BackOfficeIdentityUser>)
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.BackOffice.Controllers.EntityController.GetUrlsByUdis(Umbraco.Cms.Core.Udi[], string?)
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.BackOffice.Controllers.HelpController.HelpController(Microsoft.Extensions.Logging.ILogger<Umbraco.Cms.Web.BackOffice.Controllers.HelpController>)
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.BackOffice.Controllers.LanguageController.LanguageController(
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ILocalizationService,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Mapping.IUmbracoMapper,
    Microsoft.Extensions.Options.IOptionsSnapshot<Umbraco.Cms.Core.Configuration.Models.GlobalSettings>)
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.BackOffice.Controllers.LogViewerController.LogViewerController(Umbraco.Cms.Core.Logging.Viewer.ILogViewer)
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.BackOffice.Controllers.LogViewerController.GetLogLevel()
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.BackOffice.Controllers.MediaController.GetPagedReferences(int, string, int, int)
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.BackOffice.Controllers.MemberTypeController.GetAllTypes()
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.BackOffice.Controllers.TemplateController.TemplateController(
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.IFileService,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Mapping.IUmbracoMapper,
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Strings.IShortStringHelper)
    ScanAssemblies
    Umbraco.Extensions.UmbracoBuilderExtensions.AddUmbracoImageSharp(Umbraco.Cms.Core.DependencyInjection.IUmbracoBuilder)
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.ImageProcessors.CropWebProcessor
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.DependencyInjection.ConfigureImageSharpMiddlewareOptions
    Umbraco.Cms.Web.Common.DependencyInjection.ConfigurePhysicalFileSystemCacheOptions
    .
    Cms
    .
    Infrastructure
    .
    Persistence
    .
    FaultHandling
    .
    RetryPolicyFactory
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Persistence.FaultHandling.ThrottlingMode
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Persistence.FaultHandling.ThrottlingType
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Persistence.FaultHandling.ThrottledResourceType
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Persistence.FaultHandling.ThrottlingCondition
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Persistence.FaultHandling.Strategies.NetworkConnectivityErrorDetectionStrategy
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.Persistence.FaultHandling.Strategies.SqlAzureTransientErrorDetectionStrategy
    params
    string
    [])
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Persistence.Repositories.IMacroRepository.GetByAlias(string)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Persistence.Repositories.IMacroRepository.GetAllByAlias(string[])
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ITwoFactorLoginService.DisableWithCodeAsync(string, System.Guid, string)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Services.ITwoFactorLoginService.ValidateAndSaveAsync(string, System.Guid, string, string)
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Models.IContentType.HistoryCleanup
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.IImageDimensionExtractor.SupportedImageFileTypes
    SetLastLogin
    (
    string
    ,
    System
    .
    DateTime
    )
    ContentData
    ()
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.PublishedCache.DataSource.ContentData.Name.set
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.PublishedCache.DataSource.ContentData.UrlSegment.set
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.PublishedCache.DataSource.ContentData.VersionId.set
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.PublishedCache.DataSource.ContentData.VersionDate.set
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.PublishedCache.DataSource.ContentData.WriterId.set
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.PublishedCache.DataSource.ContentData.TemplateId.set
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.PublishedCache.DataSource.ContentData.Published.set
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.PublishedCache.DataSource.ContentData.Properties.set
    Umbraco.Cms.Infrastructure.PublishedCache.DataSource.ContentData.CultureInfos.set
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.EmbedProviders.Flickr
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.EmbedProviders.GettyImages
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.EmbedProviders.Giphy
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.EmbedProviders.Hulu
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.EmbedProviders.Issuu
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.EmbedProviders.Kickstarter
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.EmbedProviders.Slideshare
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.EmbedProviders.Soundcloud
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.EmbedProviders.Ted
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.EmbedProviders.Twitter
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.EmbedProviders.Vimeo
    Umbraco.Cms.Core.Media.EmbedProviders.YouTube
    pageSize
    ,
    long
    pageIndex
    ,
    out
    long
    totalFound
    ,
    string
    ?
    searchFrom
    = null)
    pageSize
    ,
    long
    pageIndex
    ,
    string
    ?
    searchFrom
    =
    null
    );
    Umbraco Deployarrow-up-right
    Upgrading - version specificarrow-up-right
    Upgrading - version specificarrow-up-right
    posted herearrow-up-right
    Playlist: Document Types in Umbraco